[Code of Federal Regulations]
[Title 10, Volume 3]
[Revised as of January 1, 2005]
From the U.S. Government Printing Office via GPO Access
[CITE: 10CFR430.27]

[Page 126-266]
 
                            TITLE 10--ENERGY
 
                    CHAPTER II--DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY
 
PART 430_ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAM FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS--Table of 
Contents
 
                        Subpart B_Test Procedures
 
Sec. 430.27  Petitions for waiver and applications for interim waiver.

    (a)(1) Any interested person may submit a petition to waive for a 
particular basic model any requirements of Sec. 430.23, or of any 
appendix to this subpart, upon the grounds that the basic model contains 
one or more design characteristics which either prevent testing of the 
basic model according to the prescribed test procedures, or the 
prescribed test procedures may evaluate the basic model in a manner so 
unrepresentative of its true energy consumption characteristics, or 
water consumption characteristics (in the case of faucets, showerheads, 
water closets, and urinals) as to provide materially inaccurate 
comparative data.
    (2) Any interested person who has submitted a Petition for Waiver as 
provided in this subpart may also file an Application for Interim Waiver 
of the applicable test procedure requirements.
    (b)(1) A Petition for Waiver shall be submitted, in triplicate, to 
the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, United 
States Department of Energy. Each Petition for Waiver shall:
    (i) Identify the particular basic model(s) for which a waiver is 
requested, the design characteristic(s) constituting the grounds for the 
petition, and the specific requirements sought to be waived and shall 
discuss in detail the need for the requested waiver;
    (ii) Identify manufacturers of all other basic models marketed in 
the United States and known to the petitioner to incorporate similar 
design characteristic(s);
    (iii) Include any alternate test procedures known to the petitioner 
to evaluate in a manner representative of the energy consumption 
characteristics, or water consumption characteristics (in the case of 
faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) of the basic model; 
and
    (iv) Be signed by the petitioner or by an authorized representative. 
In accordance with the provisions set forth in 10 CFR 1004.11, any 
request for confidential treatment of any information contained in a 
Petition for Waiver or in supporting documentation must be accompanied 
by a copy of the petition, application or supporting documentation from 
which the information claimed to be confidential has been deleted. DOE 
shall publish in the Federal Register the petition and supporting 
documents from which confidential information, as determined by DOE, has 
been deleted in accordance with 10 CFR 1004.11 and shall solicit 
comments, data and information with respect to the determination of the 
petition. Any person submitting written comments to DOE with the respect 
to a Petition for Waiver shall also send a

[[Page 127]]

copy of such comments to the petitioner. In accordance with paragraph 
(i) of this section, a petitioner may submit a rebuttal statement to the 
Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy.
    (2) An Application for Interim Waiver shall be submitted in 
triplicate, with the required three copies of the Petition for Waiver, 
to the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, U.S. 
Department of Energy. Each Application for Interim Waiver shall 
reference the Petition for Waiver by identifying the particular basic 
model(s) for which a waiver and temporary exception are being sought. 
Each Application for Interim Waiver shall demonstrate likely success of 
the Petition for Waiver and shall address what economic hardship and/or 
competitive disadvantage is likely to result absent a favorable 
determination on the Application for Interim Waiver. Each Application 
for Interim Waiver shall be signed by the applicant or by an authorized 
representative.
    (c)(1) Each petitioner, after filing a Petition for Waiver with DOE, 
and after the Petition for Waiver has been published in the Federal 
Register, shall, within five working days of such publication, notify in 
writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed units of the 
same product type (as listed in section 322(a) of the Act) and shall 
include in the notice a statement that DOE has published in the Federal 
Register on a certain date the Petition for Waiver and supporting 
documents from which confidential information, if any, as determined by 
DOE, has been deleted in accordance with 10 CFR 1004.11. Each 
petitioner, in complying with the requirements of this paragraph, shall 
file with DOE a statement certifying the names and addresses of each 
person to whom a notice of the Petition for Waiver has been sent.
    (2) Each applicant for Interim Waiver, whether filing jointly with, 
or subsequent to, a Petition for Waiver with DOE, shall concurrently 
notify in writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed units 
of the same product type (as listed in Section 322(a) of the Act) and 
shall include in the notice a copy of the Petition for Waiver and a copy 
of the Application for Interim Waiver. In complying with this section, 
each applicant shall in the written notification include a statement 
that the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy will 
receive and consider timely written comments on the Application for 
Interim Waiver. Each applicant, upon filing an Application for Interim 
Waiver, shall in complying with the requirements of this paragraph 
certify to DOE that a copy of these documents have been sent to all 
known manufacturers of domestically marked units of the same product 
type (as listed in section 322(a) of the Act). Such certification shall 
include the names and addresses of such persons. Each applicant also 
shall comply with the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section 
with respect to the petition for waiver.
    (d) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to an 
Application for Interim Waiver shall also send a copy of the comments to 
the applicant.
    (e) If administratively feasible, applicant shall be notified in 
writing of the disposition of the Application for Interim Waiver within 
15 business days of receipt of the application. Notice of DOE's 
determination on the Application for Interim Waiver shall be published 
in the Federal Register.
    (f) The filing of an Application for Interim Waiver shall not 
constitute grounds for noncompliance with any requirements of this 
subpart, until an Interim Waiver has been granted.
    (g) An Interim Waiver from test procedure requirements will be 
granted by the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy 
if it is determined that the applicant will experience economic hardship 
if the Application for Interim Waiver is denied, if it appears likely 
that the Petition for Waiver will be granted, and/or the Assistant 
Secretary determines that it would be desirable for public policy 
reasons to grant immediate relief pending a determination on the 
Petition for Waiver.
    (h) An interim waiver will terminate 180 days after issuance or upon 
the determination on the Petition for Waiver, whichever occurs first. An 
interim waiver may be extended by DOE for 180

[[Page 128]]

days. Notice of such extension and/or any modification of the terms or 
duration of the interim waiver shall be published in the Federal 
Register, and shall be based on relevant information contained in the 
record and any comments received subsequent to issuance of the interim 
waiver.
    (i) Following publication of the Petition for Waiver in the Federal 
Register, a petitioner may, within 10 working days of receipt of a copy 
of any comments submitted in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section, submit a rebuttal statement to the Assistant Secretary for 
Conservation and Renewable Energy. A petitioner may rebut more than one 
response in a single rebuttal statement.
    (j) The petitioner shall be notified in writing as soon as 
practicable of the disposition of each Petition for Waiver. The 
Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy shall issue a 
decision on the petition as soon as is practicable following receipt and 
review of the Petition for Waiver and other applicable documents, 
including, but not limited to, comments and rebuttal statements.
    (k) The filing of a Petition for Waiver shall not constitute grounds 
for noncompliance with any requirements of this subpart, until a waiver 
or interim waiver has been granted.
    (l) Waivers will be granted by the Assistant Secretary for 
Conservation and Renewable Energy, if it is determined that the basic 
model for which the waiver was requested contains a design 
characteristic which either prevents testing of the basic model 
according to the prescribed test procedures, or the prescribed test 
procedures may evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative 
of its true energy consumption characteristics, or water consumption 
characteristics (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and 
urinals) as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. Waivers 
may be granted subject to conditions, which may include adherence to 
alternate test procedures specified by the Assistant Secretary for 
Conservation and Renewable Energy. The Assistant Secretary shall consult 
with the Federal Trade Commission prior to granting any waiver, and 
shall promptly publish in the Federal Register notice of each waiver 
granted or denied, and any limiting conditions of each waiver granted.
    (m) Within one year of the granting of any waiver, the Department of 
Energy will publish in the Federal Register a notice of proposed 
rulemaking to amend its regulations so as to eliminate any need for the 
continuation of such waiver. As soon thereafter as practicable, the 
Department of Energy will publish in the Federal Register a final rule. 
Such waiver will terminate on the effective date of such final rule.
    (n) In order to exhaust administrative remedies, any person 
aggrieved by an action under this section must file an appeal with the 
DOE's Office of Hearings and Appeals as provided in 10 CFR part 1003, 
subpart C.

[51 FR 42826, Nov. 26, 1986, as amended at 60 FR 15017, Mar. 21, 1995; 
63 FR 13316, Mar. 18, 1998]

Appendix A1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
     the Energy Consumption of Electric Refrigerators and Electric 
                          Refrigerator-Freezers

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 ``HRF-1-1979'' means the Association of Home Appliance 
Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination 
refrigerator-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an 
American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B 38.1-1970.
    1.2 ``Adjusted total volume'' means the sum of (i) the fresh food 
compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, and (ii) the 
product of an adjustment factor and the net freezer compartment volume 
as defined in HRF-1-1979, in cubic feet.
    1.3 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the 
design of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer to prevent the 
accumulation of moisture on exterior surfaces of the cabinet under 
conditions of high ambient humidity.
    1.4 ``All-refrigerator'' means an electric refrigerator which does 
not include a compartment for the freezing and long time storage of food 
at temperatures below 32 [deg]F. (0.0 [deg]C.). It may include a 
compartment of 0.50 cubic feet capacity (14.2 liters) or less for the 
freezing and storage of ice.
    1.5 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use 
of an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer is 
calculated as though the consumer activated compartment temperature 
controls were set

[[Page 129]]

so that the desired compartment temperatures were maintained.
    1.6 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the 
calculated effect of operating an electric refrigerator or electric 
refrigerator-freezer for a period of 24 hours, with the consumer 
activated controls other than those that control compartment 
temperatures set to establish various operating characteristics.
    1.7 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat 
heater control, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming 
position.
    1.8 ``Automatic defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle 
is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal 
refrigeration at the conclusion of the defrost operation. The system 
automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all 
refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are 
maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
    1.9 ``Long-time Automatic Defrost'' means an automatic defrost 
system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more 
of compressor-operating time.
    1.10 ``Stabilization Period'' means the total period of time during 
which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
    1.11 ``Variable defrost control'' means a long-time automatic 
defrost system (except the 14-hour defrost qualification does not apply) 
where successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition 
variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This 
includes any electrical or mechanical device. Demand defrost is a type 
of variable defrost control.
    1.12 ``Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer'' 
means an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer that: 
has an enclosed condenser or an enclosed condenser/compressor 
compartment and a set of air ducts for transferring the exterior air 
from outside the building envelope into, through and out of the 
refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer cabinet; is capable of mixing 
exterior air with the room air before discharging into, through, and out 
of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment; includes 
thermostatically controlled dampers or controls that enable the mixing 
of the exterior and room air at low outdoor temperatures, and the 
exclusion of exterior air when the outdoor air temperature is above 80 
[deg]F or the room air temperature; and may have a thermostatically 
actuated exterior air fan.

                           2. Test Conditions

    2.1 Ambient temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 
 1 [deg]F. (32.30.6 [deg]C.) 
during the stabilization period and during the test period. The ambient 
temperature shall be 802 [deg]F dry bulb and 67 
[deg]F wet bulb during the stabilization period and during the test 
period when the unit is tested in accordance with section 3.3.
    2.2 Operational conditions. The electric refrigerator or electric 
refrigerator-freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions 
maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 7.2 through section 
7.4.3.3, except that the vertical ambient temperature gradient at 
locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of 
the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. Unless the 
area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to be 
maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform 
to a height one foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test. Defrost 
controls are to be operative and the anti-sweat heater switch is to be 
``on'' during one test and ``off'' during a second test. Other 
exceptions are noted in 2.3, 2.4, and 5.1 below.
    2.3 Conditions for automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers. For 
automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers, the freezer compartments shall 
not be loaded with any frozen food packages. Cylindrical metallic masses 
of dimensions 1.120.25 inches (2.90.6 cm) in diameter and height shall be attached in good 
thermal contact with each temperature sensor within the refrigerated 
compartments. All temperature measuring sensor masses shall be supported 
by nonthermally conductive supports in such a manner that there will be 
at least one inch (2.5 cm) of air space separating the thermal mass from 
contact with any surface. In case of interference with hardware at the 
sensor locations specified in section 5.1, the sensors shall be placed 
at the nearest adjacent location such that there will be a one inch air 
space separating the sensor mass from the hardware.
    2.4 Conditions for all-refrigerators. There shall be no load in the 
freezer compartment during the test.
    2.5 Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the 
temperature measurements in all measured compartments taken at four 
minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing 
at a rate greater than 0.042 [deg]F. (0.023 [deg]C.) per hour as 
determined by the applicable condition of A or B.
    A. The average of the measurements during a two hour period if no 
cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor 
cycles through a period of no less than two hours is compare to the 
average over an equivalent time period with three hours elapsed between 
the two measurement periods.
    B. If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during 
a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no 
less than two hours and including the last complete cycle prior to a 
defrost period, or if no cycling occurs,

[[Page 130]]

the average of the measurements during the last two hours prior to a 
defrost period; are compared to the same averaging period prior to the 
following defrost period.
    2.6 Exterior air for externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-
freezer. An exterior air source shall be provided with adjustable 
temperature and pressure capabilities. The exterior air temperature 
shall be adjustable from 351 [deg]F (1.70.6 [deg]C) to 901 [deg]F 
(32.20.6 [deg]C).
    2.6.1 Air duct. The exterior air shall pass from the exterior air 
source to the test unit through an insulated air duct.
    2.6.2 Air temperature measurement. The air temperature entering the 
condenser or condenser/compressor compartment shall be maintained to 
3 [deg]F (1.7 [deg]C) during the stabilization and 
test periods and shall be measured at the inlet point of the condenser 
or condenser/compressor compartment (``condenser inlet''). Temperature 
measurements shall be taken from at least three temperature sensors or 
one sensor per 4 square inches of the air duct cross sectional area, 
whichever is greater, and shall be averaged. For a unit that has a 
condenser air fan, a minimum of three temperature sensors at the 
condenser fan discharge shall be required. Temperature sensors shall be 
arranged to be at the centers of equally divided cross sectional areas. 
The exterior air temperature, at its source, shall be measured and 
maintained to 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) during the 
test period. The temperature measuring devices shall have an error not 
greater than 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 
[deg]C). Measurements of the air temperature during the test period 
shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
    2.6.3 Exterior air static pressure. The exterior air static pressure 
at the inlet point of the unit shall be adjusted to maintain a negative 
pressure of 0.200.05 water 
column (62 Pa12.5 Pa) for all air flow rates 
supplied to the unit. The pressure sensor shall be located on a straight 
duct with a distance of at least 7.5 times the diameter of the duct 
upstream and a distance of at least 3 times the diameter of the duct 
downstream. There shall be four static pressure taps at 90[deg]angles 
apart. The four pressures shall be averaged by interconnecting the four 
pressure taps. The air pressure measuring instrument shall have an error 
not greater than 0.01 water column (2.5 Pa).

                        3. Test Control Settings

    3.1 Model with no user operable temperature control. A test shall be 
performed during which the compartment temperatures and energy use shall 
be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature 
control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run 
continuously.
    3.2 Model with user operable temperature control. Testing shall be 
performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the 
standardized temperatures of:

All-refrigerator: 38 [deg]F. (3.3 [deg]C.) fresh food compartment 
temperature
Refrigerator: 15 [deg]F. (-9.4 [deg]C.) freezer compartment temperature
Refrigerator-freezer: 5 [deg]F. (-15 [deg]C.) freezer compartment 
temperature
Variable defrost control models: 5 [deg]F (-15 [deg]C) freezer 
compartment temperature and 38 2 [deg]F fresh food 
compartment temperature during steady-state conditions with no door-
openings. If both settings cannot be obtained, then test with the fresh 
food compartment temperature at 382 [deg]F and the 
freezer compartment as close to 5 [deg]F as possible.

    3.2.1 A first test shall be performed with all compartment 
temperature controls set at their median position midway between their 
warmest and coldest settings. Knob detents shall be mechanically 
defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. A second test shall be 
performed with all controls set at either their warmest or their coldest 
setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed), whichever is 
appropriate, to attempt to achieve compartment temperatures measured 
during the two tests which bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) 
the standardized temperature for the type of product being tested. If 
the compartment temperatures measured during these two tests bound the 
appropriate standardized temperature, then these test results shall be 
used to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature 
measured with all controls set at their coldest setting is above the 
standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all 
controls set at their warmest setting and the result of this test shall 
be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at 
their coldest setting to determine energy consumption. If the 
compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their warmest 
setting is below the standardized temperature; and the fresh food 
compartment temperature is below 45 [deg]F. (7.22 [deg]C.) in the case 
of a refrigerator or a refrigerator-freezer, excluding an all-
refrigerator, then the result of this test alone will be used to 
determine energy consumption.
    3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all 
temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment 
temperature is below the appropriate standardized temperature, and the 
fresh food compartment temperature is below 45 [deg]F. (7.22 [deg]C.) in 
the case of a refrigerator or a refrigerator-freezer, excluding an all-
refrigerator, then the result of this test alone will be used to 
determine energy consumption. If the above conditions are not met, then 
the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.

[[Page 131]]

    3.2.3 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all 
temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the compartment 
temperature is above the appropriate standardized temperature, a second 
test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest control 
setting and the results of these two tests shall be used to determine 
energy consumption. If the above condition is not met, then the unit 
shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.
    3.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After a steady-state 
condition is achieved, the optional test requires door-openings for 
122 seconds every 60 minutes on the fresh food 
compartment door and a simultaneous 122 second 
freezer compartment door-opening occurring every 4th time, to obtain 24 
fresh food and six freezer compartment door-openings per 24-hour period. 
The first freezer door-opening shall be simultaneous with the fourth 
fresh food door-opening. The doors are to be opened 60[deg] to 
90[deg]with an average velocity for the leading edge of the door of 
approximately 2 ft./sec. Prior to the initiation of the door-opening 
sequence, the refrigerator defrost control mechanism may be re-initiated 
in order to minimize the test duration.

                             4. Test Period

    4.1 Test Period. Tests shall be performed by establishing the 
conditions set forth in Section 2, and using control settings as set 
forth in Section 3, above.
    4.1.1 Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no 
automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady 
state conditions have been achieved and be of not less than three hours 
in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete 
two or more whole compressor cycles (a compressor cycle is a complete 
``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor). If no ``off'' 
cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the 
test period shall be three hours. If incomplete cycling (less than two 
compressor cycles) occurs during a 24 hour period, the results of the 24 
hour period shall be used.
    4.1.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic 
defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady state 
conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost 
period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model 
being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternative 
provisions of 4.1.2.1 may be used.If the model being tested has a 
variable defrost control, the provisions of section 4.1.2.2 or 4.1.2.3 
shall apply. If the model has a dual compressor system the provisions of 
4.1.2.4 shall apply.
    4.1.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a 
long-time automatic defrost system, the test time period may consist of 
two parts. A first part would be the same as the test for a unit having 
no defrost provisions (section 4.1.1). The second part would start when 
a defrost is initiated when the compressor ``on'' cycle is terminated 
prior to start of the defrost heater and terminates at the second turn 
``on'' of the compressor or four hours from the initiation of the 
defrost heater, whichever comes first. See diagram in Figure 1 to this 
section.

[[Page 132]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR03.019

    4.1.2.2 Variable defrost control. If the model being tested has a 
variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of three parts. 
Two parts shall be the same as the test for long-time automatic defrost 
(section 4.1.2.1). The third part is the optional test to determine the 
time between defrosts (section 5.2.1.3). The third part is used by 
manufacturers that choose not to accept the default value of F of 0.20, 
to calculate CT.
    4.1.2.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After steady-state 
conditions with no door openings are achieved in accordance with section 
3.3 above, the test is continued using the above daily door-opening 
sequence until stabilized operation is achieved. Stabilization is 
defined as a minimum of three consecutive defrost cycles with times 
between defrosts that will allow the calculation of a Mean Time Between 
Defrosts (MTBD1) that satisfies the statistical relationship of 90 
percent confidence. The test is repeated on at least one more unit of 
the model and until the Mean Time Between Defrosts for the multiple unit 
tests (MTBD2) satisfies the statistical relationship. If the time 
between defrosts is greater than 96 hours (compressor ``on'' time) and 
this defrost period can be repeated on a second unit, the test may be 
terminated at 96 hours (CT) and the absolute time value used for MTBD 
for each unit.
    4.1.2.4 Dual compressor systems with automatic defrost. If the model 
being tested has separate compressor systems for the refrigerator and 
freezer sections, each with its own automatic defrost system, then the 
two-part method in 4.1.2.1 shall be used. The second part of the method 
will be conducted separately for each automatic defrost system. The 
auxiliary components (fan motors, anti-sweat heaters, etc.) will be 
identified for

[[Page 133]]

each system and the energy consumption measured during each test.

                          5. Test Measurements

    5.1 Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made 
at the locations prescribed in Figures 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979 and 
shall be accurate to within  0.5 [deg]F. (0.3 
[deg]C.) of true value. No freezer temperature measurements need be 
taken in an all-refrigerator model.
    If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with 
those shown in Figure 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979, measurements shall be 
taken at selected locations chosen to represent approximately the entire 
refrigerated compartment. The locations selected shall be a matter of 
record.
    5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature of a 
compartment is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings 
taken in that compartment at a particular time. Measurements shall be 
taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
    5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each 
test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a 
compartment during a complete cycle or several complete cycles of the 
compressor motor (one compressor cycle is one complete motor ``on'' and 
one complete motor ``off'' period). For long-time automatic defrost 
models, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first 
part of the test period specified in 4.1.1. For models equipped with 
variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those 
measured in the first part of the test period specified in 4.1.2.2 
above.
    5.1.2.1 The number of complete compressor motor cycles over which 
the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to 
determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of 
minutes between measured temperature readings, rounded up to the next 
whole minute or a number of complete cycles over a time period exceeding 
one hour. One of the cycles shall be the last complete compressor motor 
cycle during the test period.
    5.1.2.2 If no compressor motor cycling occurs, the compartment 
temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken 
during the last thirty-two minutes of the test period.
    5.1.2.3 If incomplete cycling occurs, the compartment temperatures 
shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last 
three hours of the last complete ``on'' period.
    5.2 Energy Measurements
    5.2.1 Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in 
kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended 
during the test period as specified in section 4.1 adjusted to a 24 hour 
period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
    5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and automatic defrost models. The energy 
consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:

ET=EPx1440/T

where

ET=test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day,
EP=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period,
T=length of time of the test period in minutes, and
1440=conversion factor to adjust to a 24 hour period in minutes per day.

    5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two part test method is 
used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be 
calculated equivalent to:

ET=(1440xEP1/T1)+((EP2-(EP1xT2/T1))x12/CT)

where

ET and 1440 are defined in 5.2.1.1,
EP1=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the test,
EP2=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the 
test,
T1 and T2=length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts 
respectively,
CT=Defrost timer run time in hours required to cause it to go through a 
complete cycle, to the nearest tenth hour per cycle, and
12=factor to adjust for a 50% run time of the compressor in hours per 
day.

    5.2.1.3 Variable defrost control. The energy consumption in 
kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:

ET=(1440xEP1/T1)+(EP2-(EP1xT2/T1))x(12/CT) where 1440 is defined in 
5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2 and 12 are defined in 5.2.1.2.

CT=CTLxCTM)/(Fx(CTM-
CTL)+CTL)

CTL=least or shortest time between defrosts in tenths of an 
hour (greater than or equal to six but less than or equal to 12 hours)
CTM=maximum time between defrost cycles in tenths of an hour 
(greater than CTL but not more than 96 hours)
F=ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and 
the maximum difference in per day energy consumption and is equal to
F = (1/CT - 1/CTM)/(1/CTL - 1/CTM = 
(ET-ETL)/ETM - ETL) or 0.20 in lieu of 
testing to find CT.
ETL = least electrical energy used (kilowatt hours)
ETM=maximum electrical energy used (kilowatt hours). For 
demand defrost models with no values for CTL and 
CTM in the algorithm the default values of 12 and 84 shall be 
used, respectively.


[[Page 134]]


    5.2.1.4 Optional test method for variable defrost controls.

CT = MTBDx0.5

where:

MTBD = mean time between defrosts
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC14NO91.027

where:

X=in time between defrost cycles
N=number of defrost cycles

    5.2.1.5 Dual compressor systems with dual automatic defrost. The 
two-part test method in section 4.1.2.2 must be used, the energy 
consumption in kilowatt per day shall be calculated equivalent to:

ET=(1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2F - (EPF x T2/T1)) x 12/
CTF + (EP2R - (EPR x T3/T1)) x 12/
CTR

Where 1440, EP1, T1, EP2, 12, and CT are defined in 5.2.1.2
EPF = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second 
part of the test for the freezer system by the freezer system.
EP2F = total energy expended during the second part of the 
test for the freezer system.
EPR = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second 
part of the test for the refrigerator system by the refrigerator system.
EP2R = total energy expended during the second part of the 
test for the refrigerator system.
T2 and T3 = length of time in minutes of the second test part for the 
freezer and refrigerator systems respectively.
CTF = compressor ``on'' time between freezer defrosts (tenths 
of an hour).
CTR = compressor ``on'' time between refrigerator defrosts 
(tenths of an hour).

    5.3 Volume measurements. The electric refrigerator or electric 
refrigerator-freezer total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in 
accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and sections 4.2 through 4.3 
and be calculated equivalent to:

VT=VF+VFF

where

VT=total refrigerated volume in cubic feet,
VF=freezer compartment volume in cubic feet, and
VFF=fresh food compartment volume in cubic feet.

    5.4 Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer units. 
All test measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or 
refrigerator-freezer shall be made in accordance with the requirements 
of other sections of this appendix, except as modified in this section 
5.4 or other sections expressly applicable to externally vented 
refrigerators or refrigerator-freezers.
    5.4.1 Operability of thermostatic and mixing of air controls. Prior 
to conducting energy consumption tests, the operability of thermostatic 
controls that permit the mixing of exterior and ambient air when 
exterior air temperatures are less than 60 [deg]F must be verified. The 
operability of such controls shall be verified by operating the unit 
under ambient air temperature of 90 [deg]F and exterior air temperature 
of 45 [deg]F. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/
compressor compartment is maintained at 60 [deg]F, plus or minus three 
degrees, energy consumption of the unit shall be measured under 5.4.2.2 
and 5.4.2.3. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/
compressor compartment is not maintained at 60 [deg]F, plus or minus 
three degrees, energy consumption of the unit shall also be measured 
under 5.4.2.4.
    5.4.2 Energy consumption tests.
    5.4.2.1 Correction factor test. To enable calculation of a 
correction factor, K, two full cycle tests shall be conducted to measure 
energy consumption of the unit with air mixing controls disabled and the 
condenser inlet air temperatures set at 90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) and 80 
[deg]F (26.7 [deg]C). Both tests shall be conducted with all compartment 
temperature controls set at the position midway between their warmest 
and coldest settings and the anti-sweat heater switch off. Record the 
energy consumptions ec90 and ec80, in kWh/day.
    5.4.2.2 Energy consumption at 90 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at 
90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy 
consumptions (e90)i in kWh/day. For a given 
setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two 
states of the compartment temperature control positions.
    5.4.2.3 Energy consumption at 60 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at 
60 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy 
consumptions (e60)i in kWh/day. For a given 
setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two 
states of the compartment temperature control positions.
    5.4.2.4 Energy consumption if mixing controls do not operate 
properly. If the operability of temperature and mixing controls has not 
been verified as required under 5.4.1, the unit shall be tested at 50 
[deg]F (10.0 [deg]C) and 30 [deg]F (-1.1 [deg]C) exterior air 
temperatures to record the energy consumptions 
(e50)i and (e30)i. For a 
given setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two 
states of the compartment temperature control positions.

        6. Calculation of Derived Results from Test Measurements

    6.1 Adjusted Total Volume.
    6.1.1 Electric refrigerators. The adjusted total volume, VA, for 
electric refrigerators under test shall be defined as:

VA=(VFxCR)+VFF


[[Page 135]]


where

VA=adjusted total volume in cubic feet,
VF and VFF are defined in 5.3, and
CR=adjustment factor of 1.44 for refrigerators other than all-
refrigerators, or 1.0 for all-refrigerators, dimensionless,

    6.1.2 Electric refrigerator-freezers. The adjusted total volume, VA, 
for electric refrigerator-freezers under test shall be calculated as 
follows:

VA=(VFxCRF)+VFF

where

VF and VFF are defined in 5.3 and VA is defined in 6.1.1,
CRF=adjustment factor of 1.63, dimensionless,

    6.2 Average Per-Cycle Energy consumption.
    6.2.1 All-refrigerator Models. The average per-cycle energy 
consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to 
the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the 
temperature attainable in the fresh food compartment as shown below.
    6.2.1.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is always below 
38.0 [deg]F. (3.3 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption 
shall be equivalent to:

E=ET1

where

E=Total per-cycle energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day,
ET is defined in 5.2.1, and Number 1 indicates the test period during 
which the highest fresh food compartment temperature is measured.

    6.2.1.2 If one of the fresh food compartment temperatures measured 
for a test period is greater than 38.0 [deg]F. (3.3 [deg]C.), the 
average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:

E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(38.0-TR1)/(TR2-TR1))

where

E is defined in 6.2.1.1,
ET is defined in 5.2.1,
TR=Fresh food compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.2 in 
degrees F,
Number 1 and 2 indicates measurements taken during the first and second 
test period as appropriate, and
38.0=Standardized fresh food compartment temperature in degrees F.

    6.2.2 Refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers. The average per-cycle 
energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per-
cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall be 
defined in the applicable following manner.
    6.2.2.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is always at or 
below 45 [deg]F. (7.2 [deg]C.) in both of the tests and the freezer 
compartment temperature is always at or below 15 [deg]F. (-9.4 [deg]C.) 
in both tests of a refrigerator or at or below 5 [deg]F. (-15 [deg]C.) 
in both tests of a refrigerator-freezer, the per-cycle energy 
consumption shall be:

E=ET1

where

E is defined in 6.2.1.1,
ET is defined in 5.2.1, and
Number 1 indicates the test period during which the highest freezer 
compartment temperature was measured.
    6.2.2.2 If the conditions of 6.2.2.1 do not exist, the per-cycle 
energy consumption shall be defined by the higher of the two values 
calculated by the following two formulas:

E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(45.0-TR1)/(TR2-TR1))
and
E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(k-TF1)/(TF2-TF1))

where
E is defined in 6.2.1.1,
ET is defined in 5.2.1,
TR and number 1 and 2 are defined in 6.2.1.2,
TF=Freezer compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.2 in 
degrees F,
45.0 is a specified fresh food compartment temperature in degree F, and
k is a constant 15.0 for refrigerators or 5.0 for refrigerator-freezers 
each being standardized freezer compartment temperature in degrees F.
    6.3 Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezers. Per-
cycle energy consumption measurements for the externally vented 
refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be calculated in accordance 
with the requirements of this Appendix, as modified in sections 6.3.1-
6.3.7.
    6.3.1 Correction factor. A correction factor, K, shall be calculated 
as:

K = ec90/ec80

where ec90 and ec80 = the energy consumption test 
results as determined under 5.4.2.1.

    6.3.2 Combining test results of different settings of compartment 
temperature controls. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, 
follow the calculation procedures of 6.2 to combine the test results for 
energy consumption of the unit at different temperature control settings 
for each condenser inlet air temperature tested under 5.4.2.2, 5.4.2.3, 
and 5.4.2.4, where applicable, (e90)i, 
(e60)i, (e50)i, and 
(e30)i. The combined values are 
[epsi]90, [epsi]60, [epsi]50, and 
[epsi]30, where applicable, in kWh/day.
    6.3.3 Energy consumption corrections. For a given setting of the 
anti-sweat heater, the energy consumptions [epsi]90, 
[epsi]60, [epsi]50, and [epsi]30 
calculated in 6.3.2 shall be adjusted by multiplying the correction 
factor K to obtain the

[[Page 136]]

corrected energy consumptions per day, in kWh/day:

E90 = K x [epsi]90,
E60 = K x [epsi]60
E50 = K x [epsi]50, and
E30 = K x [epsi]30

where,

K is determined under section 6.3.1, and [epsi]90, 
[epsi]60, [epsi]50, and [epsi]30 are 
determined under section 6.3.2.

    6.3.4 Energy profile equation. For a given setting of the anti-sweat 
heater, the energy consumption EX, in kWh/day, at a specific 
exterior air temperature between 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) and 60 [deg]F 
(26.7 [deg]C) shall be calculated by the following equation:

EX = a + bTX,

where,

TX = exterior air temperature in [deg]F;
a = 3E60-2E90, in kWh/day;
b = (E90-E60)/30, in kWh/day per [deg]F.

    6.3.5 Energy consumption at 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9 
[deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C). For a given setting of the anti-
sweat heater, calculate the energy consumptions at 80 [deg]F (26.7 
[deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) exterior 
air temperatures, E80, E75 and E65, 
respectively, in kWh/day, using the equation in 6.3.4.
    6.3.6 National average per cycle energy consumption. For a given 
setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the national average energy 
consumption, EN, in kWh/day, using one of the following 
equations:

EN = 0.523 x E60 + 0.165 x E65 + 0.181 
x E75 + 0.131 x E80, for units not tested under 
5.4.2.4,

EN = 0.257 x E30 + 0.266 x E50 + 0.165 
x E65 + 0.181 x E75 + 0.131 x E80, for 
units tested under 5.4.2.4,

where,

E30, E50, and E60 are defined in 6.3.3,
E65, E75, and E80 are defined in 6.3.5, 
and
the coefficients are weather associated weighting factors.

    6.3.7 Regional average per cycle energy consumption. If regional 
average per cycle energy consumption is required to be calculated, for a 
given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the regional average 
per cycle energy consumption, ER, in kWh/day, for the regions 
in figure 1 using one of the following equations and the coefficients in 
the table A:

ER = a1 x E60 + c x E65 + d 
x E75 + e x E80, for a unit that is not required 
to be tested under 5.4.2.4,

ER = a x E30 + b x E50 + c x 
E65 + d x E75 + e x E80, for a unit 
tested under 5.4.2.4,

where:

E30, E50, and E60 are defined in 6.3.3,
E65, E75, and E80 are defined in 6.3.5, 
and
a1, a, b, c, d, e are weather associated weighting factors 
for the Regions, as specified in Table A:

               Table A--Coefficients for Calculating Regional Average per Cycle Energy Consumption
                                               [Weighting Factors]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          Regions                              a1       a        b        c        d        e
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I.........................................................    0.282    0.039    0.244    0.194    0.326    0.198
II........................................................    0.486    0.194    0.293    0.191    0.193    0.129
III.......................................................    0.584    0.302    0.282    0.178    0.159    0.079
IV........................................................    0.664    0.420    0.244    0.161    0.121    0.055
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 137]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09SE97.000


[47 FR 34526, Aug. 10, 1982; 48 FR 13013, Mar. 29, 1983, as amended at 
54 FR 36240, Aug. 31, 1989; 54 FR 38788, Sept. 20, 1989; 62 FR 47539, 
47540, Sept. 9, 1997; 68 FR 10960, Mar. 7, 2003]

Appendix B1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
                   the Energy Consumption of Freezers

                             1. Definitions.

    1.1 ``HRF-1-1979'' means the Association of Home Appliance 
Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination 
refrigerators-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an 
American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B38.1-1970.
    1.2 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the 
design of a freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior 
surfaces of the cabinet under conditions of high ambient humidity.
    1.3 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use 
of a freezer is calculated as though the consumer-activated compartment 
temperature controls were preset so that the desired compartment 
temperatures were maintained.
    1.4 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the 
calculated effect of operating a freezer for a period of 24 hours with 
the consumer-activated controls other than the compartment temperature 
control set to establish various operating characteristics.
    1.5 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat 
heater switch, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming 
position.
    1.6 ``Adjusted total volume'' means the product of, (1) the freezer 
volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, times (2) an adjustment 
factor.
    1.7 ``Automatic Defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle 
is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal 
refrigeration at the conclusion of defrost operation. The system 
automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all 
refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are 
maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
    1.8 ``Long-time Automatic Defrost'' means an automatic defrost 
system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more 
of compressor-operating time.
    1.9 ``Stabilization Period'' means the total period of time during 
which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
    1.10 ``Variable defrost control'' means a long-time automatic 
defrost system (except the 14-hour defrost qualification does not

[[Page 138]]

apply) where successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating 
condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating 
time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device. Demand defrost 
is a type of variable defrost control.
    1.11 ``Quick freeze'' means an optional feature on freezers which is 
initiated manually and shut off manually. It bypasses the thermostat 
control and places the compressor in a steady-state operating condition 
until it is shut off.

                           2. Test Conditions.

    2.1 Ambient temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.01.0 [deg]F. (32.20.6 [deg]C.) 
during the stabilization period and during the test period. The ambient 
temperature shall be 802 [deg]F dry bulb and 67 
[deg]F wet bulb during the stabilization period and during the test 
period when the unit is tested in accordance with section 3.3.
    2.2 Operational conditions. The freezer shall be installed and its 
operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 
7.2 through section 7.4.3.3, except that the vertical ambient gradient 
at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the the centers of the two 
sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. 
Unless the area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to 
be maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting 
platform to a height one foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test. 
Defrost controls are to be operative and the anti-sweat heater switch is 
to be ``on'' during one test and ``off'' during a second test. The quick 
freeze option shall be switched off unless specified.
    2.3 Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the 
temperature measurements taken at four minute intervals or less during a 
stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 
[deg]F. (0.023 [deg]C.) per hour as determined by the applicable 
condition of A or B.
A--The average of the measurements during a two hour period if no 
cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor 
cycles through a period of no less than two hours is compared to the 
average over an equivalent time period with three hours elapsed between 
the two measurement periods.
B--If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a 
number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no 
less than two hours and including the last complete cycle prior to a 
defrost period, or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements 
during the last two hours prior to a defrost period; are compared to the 
same averaging period prior to the following defrost period.

                        3. Test Control Settings.

    3.1 Model with no user operable temperature control. A test shall be 
performed during which the compartment temperature and energy use shall 
be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature 
control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run 
continuously. If the model has the quick freeze option, it is to be used 
to bypass the temperature control.
    3.2 Model with user operable temperature control. Testing shall be 
performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the 
standardized temperature of 0.0 [deg]F. (-17.8 [deg]C.). Variable 
defrost control models shall achieve 02 [deg]F 
during the steady-state conditions prior to the optional test with no 
door openings.
    3.2.1 A first test shall be performed with all temperature controls 
set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest 
settings. Knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to 
attain a median setting. A second test shall be performed with all 
controls set at either their warmest or their coldest setting (not 
electrically or mechanically bypassed), whichever is appropriate, to 
attempt to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two 
tests which bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) the standardized 
temperature. If the compartment temperatures measured during these two 
tests bound the standardized temperature, then these test results shall 
be used to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature 
measured with all controls set at their coldest setting is above the 
standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all 
controls set at their warmest setting and the result of this test shall 
be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at 
their coldest setting to determine energy consumption. If the 
compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their warmest 
setting is below the standardized temperature; then the result of this 
test alone will be used to determine energy consumption.
    3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all 
temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment 
temperature is below the standardized temperature, then the result of 
this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If the 
above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance 
with 3.2.1 above.
    3.2.3 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all 
temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the compartment 
temperature is above the standardized temperature, a second test shall 
be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting and the 
results of these two tests shall be used to determine energy 
consumption. If

[[Page 139]]

the above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in 
accordance with 3.2.1 above.
    3.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After a steady-state 
condition is achieved, the door-opening sequence is initiated with an 
182 second freezer door-opening occurring every 
eight hours to obtain three door-openings per 24-hour period. The first 
freezer door-opening shall occur at the initiation of the test period. 
The door(s) are to be opened 60 to 90[deg]with an average velocity for 
the leading edge of the door of approximately two feet per second. Prior 
to the initiation of the door-opening sequence, the freezer defrost 
control mechanism may be re-initiated in order to minimize the test 
duration.

                             4. Test Period.

    4.1 Test Period. Tests shall be performed by establishing the 
conditions set forth in Section 2 and using control settings as set 
forth in Section 3 above.
    4.1.1 Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no 
automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady 
state conditions have been achieved, and be of not less than three 
hours' duration. During the test period the compressor motor shall 
complete two or more whole cycles (a compressor cycle is a complete 
``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor). If no ``off'' 
cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the 
test period shall be three hours. If incomplete cycling (less than two 
compressor cycles) occurs during a 24 hour period, the results of the 24 
hour period shall be used.
    4.1.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic 
defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady state 
conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost 
period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model 
being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternate 
provisions of 4.1.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a 
variable defrost control the provisions of 4.1.2.2. shall apply.
    4.1.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a 
long-time automatic defrost system, the test time period may consist of 
two parts. A first part would be the same as the test for a unit having 
no defrost provisions (section 4.1.1). The second part would start when 
a defrost period is initiated during a compressor ``on'' cycle and 
terminate at the second turn ``on'' of the compressor motor or after 
four hours, whichever comes first.
    4.1.2.2 Variable defrost control. If the model being tested has a 
variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of three parts. 
Two parts shall be the same as the test for long-time automatic defrost 
in accordance with section 4.1.2.1 above. The third part is the optional 
test to determine the time between defrosts (5.2.1.3). The third part is 
used by manufacturers that choose not to accept the default value of F 
of 0.20, to calculate CT.
    4.1.2.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After steady-state 
conditions with no door-openings are achieved in accordance with section 
3.3 above, the test is continued using the above daily door-opening 
sequence until stabilized operation is achieved. Stabilization is 
defined as a minimum of three consecutive defrost cycles with times 
between defrost that will allow the calculation of a Mean Time Between 
Defrosts (MTBD1) that satisfies the statistical relationship of 90 
percent confidence. The test is repeated on at least one more unit of 
the model and until the Mean Time Between Defrosts for the multiple unit 
test (MTBD2) satisfies the statistical relationship. If the time between 
defrosts is greater than 96 hours (compressor ``on'' time) and this 
defrost period can be repeated on a second unit, the test may be 
terminated at 96 hours (CT) and the absolute time value used for MTBD 
for each unit.

                          5. Test Measurements.

    5.1 Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made 
at the locations prescribed in Figure 7-2 of HRF-1-1979 and shall be 
accurate to within 0.5 [deg]F. (0.3 [deg]C.) of 
true value.
    5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature is to be the 
average of all sensor temperature readings taken at a particular time. 
Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four 
minutes.
    5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each 
test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken 
during a complete cycle or several complete cycles of the compressor 
motor (one compressor cycle is one complete motor ``on'' and one 
complete motor ``off'' period). For long-time automatic defrost models, 
compartment temperature shall be that measured in the first part of the 
test period specified in 4.1.1. For models equipped with variable 
defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in 
the first part of the test period specified in 4.1.2.2.
    5.1.2.1 The number of complete compressor motor cycles over which 
the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to 
determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of 
minutes between measured temperature readings rounded up to the next 
whole minute or a number of complete cycles over a time period exceeding 
one hour. One of the cycles shall be the last complete compressor motor 
cycles during the test period.
    5.1.2.2 If no compressor motor cycling occurs, the compartment 
temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures

[[Page 140]]

taken during the last thirty-two minutes of the test period.
    5.1.2.3 If incomplete cycling occurs (less than one cycle) the 
compartment temperature shall be the average of all readings taken 
during the last three hours of the last complete ``on'' period.
    5.2 Energy Measurements:
    5.2.1 Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in 
kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended 
during the test period as specified in section 4.1 adjusted to a 24 hour 
period.
    The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
    5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and automatic defrost models. The energy 
consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:

ET=(EPx1440x K)/T where

ET=test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day,
EP=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period.
T=length of time of the test period in minutes,
1440=conversion factor to adjust to a 24 hour period in minutes per day, 
and
K=correction factor of 0.7 for chest freezers and 0.85 for upright 
freezers to adjust for average household usage, dimensionless.

    5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two part test method is 
used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be 
calculated equivalent to:

ET=(1440x Kx EP1/T1) + ((EP2-(EP1x T2/T1))x Kx12/CT)

where

ET, 1440, and K are defined in 5.2.1.1
EP1=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the test.
EP2=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the 
test,
CT=Defrost timer run time in hours required to cause it to go through a 
complete cycle, to the nearest tenth hour per cycle,
12=conversion factor to adjust for a 50% run time of the compressor in 
hours per day, and
T1 and T2=length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts 
respectively.

    5.2.1.3 Variable defrost control. The energy consumption in 
kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:

ET=(1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2 - (EP1 x T2/T1) x (12/CT) where 1440 is 
defined in 5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2 and 12 are defined in 5.2.1.2.

CT=(CTL x CTM)/(Fx (CTM - 
CTL) + CTL)

where:

CTL=least or shortest time between defrost in tenths of an 
hour (greater than or equal to 6 hours but less than or equal to 12 
hours, 6 <= L <= 12)
CTM=maximum time between defrost cycles in tenths of an hour 
(greater than CTL but not more than 96 hours, CTL 
<= CTM <= 96)
F=ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and 
the maximum difference in per day energy consumption and is equal to
F=(1/CT - 1/CTM)/(1/CTL - 1/CTM) = (ET 
- ETL)/(ETM - ETL) or 0.20 in lieu of 
testing to find CT
ETL=least electrical energy consumed, in kilowatt hours
ETM=maximum electrical energy consumed, in kilowatt hours

    For demand defrost models with no values for CTL and 
CTM in the algorithm the default values of 12 and 84 shall be 
used, respectively.
    5.2.1.4 Variable defrost control optional test. Perform the optional 
test for variable defrost control models to find CT.
CT=MTBD x 0.5
MTBD=mean time between defrost
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC14NO91.028

X=time between defrost cycles
N=number of defrost cycles

    5.3 Volume measurements. The total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be 
measured in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and section 5.1 
through 5.3.

        6. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements.

    6.1 Adjusted Total Volume. The adjusted total volume, VA, for 
freezers under test shall be defined as:

VA=VTx CF

where

VA=adjusted total volume in cubic feet,
VT=total refrigerated volume in cubic feet, and
CF=Correction factor of 1.73, dimensionless.

    6.2 Average Per Cycle Energy Consumption:
    6.2.1 The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is 
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth 
(0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the compartment temperature 
attainable as shown below.
    6.2.1.1 If the compartment temperature is always below 0.0 [deg]F. 
(-17.8 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be 
equivalent to:

E=ET1

where
E=Total per-cycle energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day.

[[Page 141]]

ET is defined in 5.2.1, and
Number 1 indicates the test period during which the highest compartment 
temperature is measured.
    6.2.1.2 If one of the compartment temperatures measured for a test 
period is greater than 0.0 [deg]F. (17.8 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle 
energy consumption shall be equivalent to:

E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(0.0-TF1)/(TF2-TF1))
where
E is defined in 6.2.1.1
ET is defined in 5.2.1
TF=compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.2 in degrees F.
Numbers 1 and 2 indicate measurements taken during the first and second 
test period as appropriate, and
0.0=Standardized compartment temperature in degrees F.

[47 FR 34528, Aug. 10, 1982; 48 FR 13013, Mar. 29, 1983, as amended at 
54 FR 36241, Aug. 31, 1989; 54 FR 38788, Sept. 20, 1989]

 Appendix C to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
                  the Energy Consumption of Dishwashers

    The provisions of this Appendix C shall apply to products 
manufactured after September 29, 2003. The restriction on 
representations concerning energy use or efficiency in 42 U.S.C. 
6293(c)(2) shall apply on February 25, 2004.

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 AHAM means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
    1.2 Compact dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity of 
less than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in 
ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (see Sec. 430.22), using the test load specified in 
section 2.7 of this Appendix.
    1.3 Cycle means a sequence of operations of a dishwasher which 
performs a complete dishwashing function, and may include variations or 
combinations of washing, rinsing, and drying.
    1.4 Cycle type means any complete sequence of operations capable of 
being preset on the dishwasher prior to the initiation of machine 
operation.
    1.5 Non-soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that does not 
have the ability to adjust automatically any energy consuming aspect of 
a wash cycle based on the soil load of the dishes.
    1.6 Normal cycle means the cycle type recommended by the 
manufacturer for completely washing a full load of normally soiled 
dishes including the power-dry feature.
    1.7 Power-dry feature means the introduction of electrically 
generated heat into the washing chamber for the purpose of improving the 
drying performance of the dishwasher.
    1.8 Preconditioning cycle means any cycle that includes a fill, 
circulation, and drain to ensure that the water lines and sump area of 
the pump are primed.
    1.9 Sensor heavy response means, for standard dishwashers, the set 
of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load 
of dishes, four place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/
AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). For compact 
dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that two soiled place 
settings are used instead of four.
    1.10 Sensor light response means, for both standard and compact 
dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for 
completely washing a load of dishes, one place setting of which is 
soiled with half of the gram weight of soils for each item specified in 
a single place setting according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by 
reference, see Sec. 430.22).
    1.11 Sensor medium response means, for standard dishwashers, the set 
of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load 
of dishes, two place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/AHAM 
DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). For compact 
dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that one soiled place 
setting is used instead of two.
    1.12 Soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that has the ability 
to adjust any energy consuming aspect of a wash cycle based on the soil 
load of the dishes.
    1.13 Standard dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity 
equal to or greater than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as 
specified in ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 
430.22), using the test load specified in section 2.7 of this Appendix.
    1.14 Standby mode means the lowest power consumption mode which 
cannot be switched off or influenced by the user and that may persist 
for an indefinite time when the dishwasher is connected to the main 
electricity supply and used in accordance with the manufacturer's 
instructions.
    1.15 Truncated normal cycle means the normal cycle interrupted to 
eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse 
operation.
    1.16 Truncated sensor heavy response means the sensor heavy response 
interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of 
the last rinse operation.
    1.17 Truncated sensor light response means the sensor light response 
interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of 
the last rinse operation.
    1.18 Truncated sensor medium response means the sensor medium 
response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature

[[Page 142]]

after the termination of the last rinse operation.
    1.19 Water-heating dishwasher means a dishwasher which, as 
recommended by the manufacturer, is designed for heating cold inlet 
water (nominal 50 [deg]F) or designed for heating water with a nominal 
inlet temperature of 120 [deg]F. Any dishwasher designated as water-
heating (50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F inlet water) must provide internal 
water heating to above 120 [deg]F in at least one wash phase of the 
normal cycle.

                         2. Testing conditions:

    2.1 Installation Requirements. Install the dishwasher according to 
the manufacturer's instructions. A standard or compact under-counter or 
under-sink dishwasher must be tested in a rectangular enclosure 
constructed of nominal 0.374 inch (9.5 mm) plywood painted black. The 
enclosure must consist of a top, a bottom, a back, and two sides. If the 
dishwasher includes a counter top as part of the appliance, omit the top 
of the enclosure. Bring the enclosure into the closest contact with the 
appliance that the configuration of the dishwasher will allow.
    2.2 Electrical energy supply.
    2.2.1 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 115 
volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 115 volts 
 2 percent and within 1 percent of the nameplate 
frequency as specified by the manufacturer.
    2.2.2 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 240 
volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 240 volts 
 2 percent and within 1 percent of its nameplate 
frequency as specified by the manufacturer.
    2.3 Water temperature. Measure the temperature of the water supplied 
to the dishwasher using a temperature measuring device as specified in 
section 3.1 of this Appendix.
    2.3.1 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water 
temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 140[deg]  2 [deg]F.
    2.3.2 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 120 [deg]F inlet water 
temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 120[deg]  2 [deg]F.
    2.3.3 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 50 [deg]F inlet water 
temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 50[deg]  2 [deg]F.
    2.4 Water pressure. Using a water pressure gauge as specified in 
section 3.4 of this Appendix, maintain the pressure of the water supply 
at 35  2.5 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) 
when the water is flowing.
    2.5 Ambient and machine temperature. Using a temperature measuring 
device as specified in section 3.1 of this Appendix, maintain the room 
ambient air temperature at 75[deg]  5 [deg]F, and 
ensure that the dishwasher and the test load are at room ambient 
temperature at the start of each test cycle.
    2.6 Test Cycle and Load.
    2.6.1 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet 
temperature of 140 [deg]F. These units must be tested on the normal 
cycle and truncated normal cycle without a test load if the dishwasher 
does not heat water in the normal cycle.
    2.6.2 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet 
temperature of 50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F. These units must be tested on 
the normal cycle with a clean load of eight place settings plus six 
serving pieces, as specified in section 2.7 of this Appendix. If the 
capacity of the dishwasher, as stated by the manufacturer, is less than 
eight place settings, then the test load must be the stated capacity.
    2.6.3 Soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet 
temperature of 50 [deg]F, 120 [deg]F, or 140 [deg]F. These units must be 
tested first for the sensor heavy response, then tested for the sensor 
medium response, and finally for the sensor light response with the 
following combinations of soiled and clean test loads.
    2.6.3.1 For tests of the sensor heavy response, as defined in 
section 1.9 of this Appendix:
    (A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a 
total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in 
section 2.7 of this Appendix. Four of the eight place settings must be 
soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 
430.22) while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all 
flatware are not soiled.
    (B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four 
place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of 
this Appendix. Two of the four place settings must be soiled according 
to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) while 
the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not 
soiled.
    2.6.3.2 For tests of the sensor medium response, as defined in 
section 1.11 of this Appendix:
    (A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a 
total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in 
section 2.7 of this Appendix. Two of the eight place settings must be 
soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 
430.22) while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all 
flatware are not soiled.
    (B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four 
place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of 
this Appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled according 
to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) while 
the remaining place settings, serving pieces and all flatware are not 
soiled.
    2.6.3.3 For tests of the sensor light response, as defined in 
section 1.10 of this Appendix:

[[Page 143]]

    (A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a 
total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in 
section 2.7 of this Appendix. One of the eight place settings must be 
soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting 
according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 
430.22) while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all 
flatware are not soiled.
    (B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four 
place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of 
this Appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled with half 
of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to the 
ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) while the 
remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not 
soiled.
    2.7 Test Load.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Dishware/glassware/flatware                                                                          Alternate
             item               Primary source     Description      Primary No.   Alternate source   source No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dinner Plate.................  Corning           10 inch Dinner   6003893
                                Comcor[reg]/      Plate.
                                Corelle[reg].
Bread and Butter Plate.......  Corning           6.75 inch Bread  6003887         Arzberg.........    8500217100
                                Comcor[reg]/      & Butter.
                                Corelle[reg].
Fruit Bowl...................  Corning           10 oz. Dessert   6003899         Arzberg.........    3820513100
                                Comcor[reg]/      Bowl.
                                Corelle[reg].
Cup..........................  Corning           8 oz. Ceramic    6014162         Arzberg.........    3824732100
                                Comcor[reg]/      Cup.
                                Corelle[reg].
Saucer.......................  Corning           6 inch Saucer..  6010972         Arzberg.........    3824731100
                                Comcor[reg]/
                                Corelle[reg].
Serving Bowl.................  Corning           1 qt. Serving    6003911
                                Comcor[reg]/      Bowl.
                                Corelle[reg].
Platter......................  Corning           9.5 inch Oval    6011655
                                Comcor[reg]/      Platter.
                                Corelle[reg].
Glass-Iced Tea...............  Libbey..........  ...............  551 HT
Flatware--Knife..............  Oneida[reg]--Acc  ...............  2619KPVF
                                ent.
Flatware--Dinner Fork........  Oneida[reg]--Acc  ...............  2619FRSF
                                ent.
Flatware--Salad Fork.........  Oneida[reg]--Acc  ...............  2619FSLF
                                ent.
Flatware--Teaspoon...........  Oneida[reg]--Acc  ...............  2619STSF
                                ent.
Flatware--Serving Fork.......  Oneida[reg]--Fli  ...............  2865FCM
                                ght.
Flatware--Serving Spoon......  Oneida[reg]--Acc  ...............  2619STBF
                                ent.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    2.8 Detergent. Use half the quantity of detergent specified 
according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 
430.22).
    2.9 Testing requirements. Provisions in this Appendix pertaining to 
dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F 
or 120 [deg]F apply only to water-heating dishwashers as defined in 
section 1.19 of this Appendix.
    2.10 Preconditioning requirements. Precondition the dishwasher by 
establishing the testing conditions set forth in sections 2.1 through 
2.5 of this Appendix. Set the dishwasher to the preconditioning cycle as 
defined in section 1.8 of this Appendix, without using a test load, and 
initiate the cycle.

                           3. Instrumentation

    Test instruments must be calibrated annually.
    3.1 Temperature measuring device. The device must have an error no 
greater than  1 [deg]F over the range being 
measured.
    3.2 Timer. Time measurements for each monitoring period shall be 
accurate to within 2 seconds.
    3.3 Water meter. The water meter must have a resolution of no larger 
than 0.1 gallons and a maximum error no greater than  1.5 percent of the measured flow rate for all water 
temperatures encountered in the test cycle.
    3.4 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge must have a 
resolution of one pound per square inch (psi) and must have an error no 
greater than 5 percent of any measured value over the range of 35  2.5 psig.
    3.5 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter must have a resolution of 1 
watt-hour or less and a maximum error of no more than 1 percent of the 
measured value for any demand greater than 50 watts.
    3.6 Standby wattmeter. The standby wattmeter must have a resolution 
of 0.1 watt or less, a maximum error of no more than 1 percent of the 
measured value, and must be capable of operating within the stated 
tolerances for input voltages up to 5 percent total harmonic distortion. 
The standby wattmeter must be capable of operating at frequencies from 
47 hertz through 63 hertz. Power measurements must have a crest factor 
of 3 or more at currents of 2 amps RMS or less.
    3.7 Standby watt-hour meter. The standby watt-hour meter must meet 
all the requirements of the standby wattmeter and must accumulate watt-
hours at a minimum power level of 20 milliwatts.

[[Page 144]]

                     4. Test Cycle and Measurements

    4.1 Test cycle. Perform a test cycle by establishing the testing 
conditions set forth in section 2 of this Appendix, setting the 
dishwasher to the cycle type to be tested, initiating the cycle, and 
allowing the cycle to proceed to completion.
    4.2 Machine electrical energy consumption. Measure the machine 
electrical energy consumption, M, expressed as the number of kilowatt-
hours of electricity consumed by the machine during the entire test 
cycle, using a water supply temperature as set forth in section 2.3 of 
this Appendix and using a watt-hour meter as specified in section 3.5 of 
this Appendix.
    4.3 Water consumption. Measure the water consumption, V, expressed 
as the number of gallons of water delivered to the machine during the 
entire test cycle, using a water meter as specified in section 3.3 of 
this Appendix.
    4.4 Standby power. Connect the dishwasher to a standby wattmeter or 
a standby watt-hour meter as specified in sections 3.6 and 3.7, 
respectively, of this Appendix. Select the conditions necessary to 
achieve operation in the standby mode as defined in section 1.14 of this 
Appendix. Monitor the power consumption but allow the dishwasher to 
stabilize for at least 5 minutes. Then monitor the power consumption for 
at least an additional 5 minutes. If the power level does not change by 
more than 5 percent from the maximum observed value during the later 5 
minutes and there is no cyclic or pulsing behavior of the load, the load 
can be considered stable. For stable operation, standby power, 
Sm, can be recorded directly from the standby watt meter in 
watts or accumulated using the standby watt-hour meter over a period of 
at least 5 minutes. For unstable operation, the energy must be 
accumulated using the standby watt-hour meter over a period of at least 
5 minutes and must capture the energy use over one or more complete 
cycles. Calculate the average standby power, Sm, expressed in 
watts by dividing the accumulated energy consumption by the duration of 
the measurement period.

        5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements

    5.1 Machine energy consumption.
    5.1.1 Machine energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric 
dishwashers. Take the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix as 
the per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. Express the value, 
M, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
    5.1.2 Machine energy consumption for soil-sensing electric 
dishwashers. The machine energy consumption for the sensor normal cycle, 
M, is defined as:

M = (MhrxFhr) + (MmrxFmr) + 
(MlrxFlr)

where,

Mhr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix for 
the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per 
cycle,
Mmr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix for 
the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per 
cycle,
Mlr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix for 
the test of the sensor light response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per 
cycle,
Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy 
response = 0.05,
Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium 
response = 0.33,
Flr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light 
response = 0.62.

    5.2 Drying energy.
    5.2.1 Drying energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric 
dishwashers. Calculate the amount of energy consumed using the power-dry 
feature after the termination of the last rinse option of the normal 
cycle. Express the value, ED, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
    5.2.2 Drying energy consumption for soil-sensing electric 
dishwashers. The drying energy consumption, ED, for the 
sensor normal cycle is defined as:

ED = (EDhr + EDmr + EDlr)/3

Where,

EDhr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the 
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor heavy response, 
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,
EDmr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the 
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor medium response, 
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,
EDlr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the 
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor light response, 
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle.

    5.3 Water consumption.
    5.3.1 Water consumption for non-soil-sensing dishwashers using 
electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water.
    Take the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix as the per-
cycle water energy consumption. Express the value, V, in gallons per 
cycle.
    5.3.2 Water consumption for soil-sensing dishwashers using 
electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water.
    The water consumption for the sensor normal cycle, V, is defined as:

V = (VhrxFhr) + (VmrxFmr) + 
(VlrxFlr)

Where,

Vhr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix for 
the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in gallons per cycle,
Vmr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix for 
the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in gallons per cycle,

[[Page 145]]

Vlr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix for 
the test of the sensor light response, expressed in gallons per cycle,
Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy 
response = 0.05,
Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium 
response = 0.33,
Flr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light 
response = 0.62.

    5.4 Water energy consumption for non-soil-sensing or soil-sensing 
dishwashers using electrically heated water.
    5.4.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water 
temperature, only. For the normal and truncated normal test cycle, 
calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-hours 
per cycle and defined as:

W = VxTxK

Where,

V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section 
5.3.1 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F,
K = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree 
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.

    5.4.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet water 
temperature of 120 [deg]F. For the normal and truncated normal test 
cycle, calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle and defined as:

W = VxTxK

Where,

V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section 
5.3.1 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F,
K = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree 
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.

    5.5 Water energy consumption per cycle using gas-heated or oil-
heated water.
    5.5.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water 
temperature, only.
    For each test cycle, calculate the water energy consumption using 
gas-heated or oil-heated water, Wg, expressed in Btu's per 
cycle and defined as:

Wg = VxTxC/e

Where,
V = reported water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in 
section 5.3.2 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F,
C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit = 
8.2,
e = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.
    5.5.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet water 
temperature of 120 [deg]F. For each test cycle, calculate the water 
energy consumption using gas heated or oil heated water, Wg, 
expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as:

Wg = VxTxC/e

Where,

V = reported water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in 
section 5.3.2 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F,
C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit = 
8.2,
e = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.

    5.6 Annual standby energy consumption. Calculate the estimated 
annual standby energy consumption. First determine the number of standby 
hours per year, Hs, defined as:

Hs = H-(NxL).

Where,

H = the total number of hours per year = 8766 hours per year,
N = the representative average dishwasher use of 215 cycles per year,
L = the average of the duration of the normal cycle and truncated normal 
cycle, for non-soil-sensing dishwashers with a truncated normal cycle; 
the duration of the normal cycle, for non-soil-sensing dishwashers 
without a truncated normal cycle; the average duration of the sensor 
light response, truncated sensor light response, sensor medium response, 
truncated sensor medium response, sensor heavy response, and truncated 
sensor heavy response, for soil-sensing dishwashers with a truncated 
cycle option; the average duration of the sensor light response, sensor 
medium response, and sensor heavy response, for soil-sensing dishwashers 
without a truncated cycle option.
    Then calculate the estimated annual standby power use, S, expressed 
in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as:

S = Smx((Hs)/1000)

Where,

Sm = the average standby power in watts as determined in 
section 4.4 of this Appendix.

[68 FR 51900, Aug. 29, 2003]

 Appendix D to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
                the Energy Consumption of Clothes Dryers

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 ``AHAM'' means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
    1.2 ``Bone dry'' means a condition of a load of test clothes which 
has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 
minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 
10-

[[Page 146]]

minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or 
less.
    1.3 ``Compact'' or compact size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum 
capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet.
    1.4 ``Cool down'' means that portion of the clothes drying cycle 
when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes 
continue to tumble and dry within the drum.
    1.5 ``Cycle'' means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which 
performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or 
combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling and drying.
    1.6 ``Drum capacity'' means the volume of the drying drum in cubic 
feet.
    1.7 ``HLD-1'' means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and titled 
``AHAM Performance Evaluation Procedure for Household Tumble Type 
Clothes Dryers'', June 1974, and designated as HLD-1.
    1.8 ``HLD-2EC'' means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and 
titled ``Test Method for Measuring Energy Consumption of Household 
Tumble Type Clothes Dryers,'' December 1975, and designated as HLD-2EC.
    1.9 ``Standard size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 
4.4 cubic feet or greater.
    1.10 ``Moisture content'' means the ratio of the weight of water 
contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, 
expressed as a percent.
    1.11 ``Automatic termination control'' means a dryer control system 
with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its 
moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates 
the drying process. A mark or detent which indicates a preferred 
automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to 
be classified as having an ``automatic termination control.'' A mark is 
a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls.
    1.12 ``Temperature sensing control'' means a system which monitors 
dryer exhaust air temperature and automatically terminates the dryer 
cycle.
    1.13 ``Moisture sensing control'' means a system which utilizes a 
moisture sensing element within the dryer drum that monitors the amount 
of moisture in the clothes and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.

                          2. Testing Conditions

    2.1 Installation. Install the clothes dryer in accordance with 
manufacturer's instructions. The dryer exhaust shall be restricted by 
adding the AHAM exhaust simulator described in 3.3.5 of HLD-1. All 
external joints should be taped to avoid air leakage. Disconnect all 
console light or other lighting systems on the clothes dryer which do 
not consume more than 10 watts during the clothes dryer test cycle.
    2.2 Ambient temperature and humidity. Maintain the room ambient air 
temperature at 75 3 [deg]F and the room relative 
humidity at 5010 percent relative humidity.
    2.3 Energy supply.
    2.3.1 Electrical supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the 
clothes dryer terminal block within 1 percent of 120/240 or 120/208Y or 
120 volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system 
and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the 
manufacturer. If the dryer has a dual voltage conversion capability, 
conduct test at the highest voltage specified by the manufacturer.
    2.3.2 Gas supply.
    2.3.2.1 Natural gas. Maintains the gas supply to the clothes dryer 
at a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7 
to 10 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a 
gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure at the 
normal test pressure shall be approximately that recommended by the 
manufacturer. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained 
within 5 percent of the rating specified by the 
manufacturer. The natural gas supplied should have a heating value of 
approximately 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot. The actual heating 
value, Hn2, in Btu's per standard cubic foot, for the natural 
gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements 
made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous 
flow calorimeter as described in 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled 
natural gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a 
rating as could be obtained from measurements with a standard continuous 
flow calorimeter as described in 2.4.6.
    2.3.2.2 Propane gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer at 
a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 11 to 
13 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas 
appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure at the 
normal test pressure shall be approximately that recommended by the 
manufacturer. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained 
within 5 percent of the rating specified by the 
manufacturer. The propane gas supplied should have a heating value of 
approximately 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot. The actual heating 
value, Hp, in Btu's per standard cubic foot, for the propane 
gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements 
made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous 
flow calorimeter as described in 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled gas 
whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as 
could be obtained from measurement with a standard continuous 
calorimeter as described in 2.4.6.

[[Page 147]]

    2.4 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the 
following instruments as appropriate.
    2.4.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a range of 
0 to a maximum of 30 pounds with a resolution of at least 0.2 ounces and 
a maximum error no greater than 0.3 percent of any measured value within 
the range of 3 to 15 pounds.
    2.4.1.2 Weighing scale for drum capacity measurements. The scale 
should have a range of 0 to a maximum of 500 pounds with resolution of 
0.50 pounds and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the 
measured value.
    2.4.2 Kilowatt-hour meter. The kilowatt-hour meter shall have a 
resolution of 0.001 kilowatt-hours and a maximum error no greater than 
0.5 percent of the measured value.
    2.4.3 Gas meter. The gas meter shall have a resolution of 0.001 
cubic feet and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the 
measured value.
    2.4.4 Dry and wet bulb psychrometer. The dry and wet bulb 
psychrometer shall have an error no greater than 1 
[deg]F.
    2.4.5 Temperature. The temperature sensor shall have an error no 
greater than 1 [deg]F.
    2.4.6 Standard Continuous Flow Calorimeter. The Calorimeter shall 
have an operating range of 750 to 3,500 Btu per cubic feet. The maximum 
error of the basic calorimeter shall be no greater than 0.2 percent of 
the actual heating value of the gas used in the test. The indicator 
readout shall have a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the 
measured value within the operating range and a resolution of 0.2 
percent of the full scale reading of the indicator instrument.
    2.5 Lint trap. Clean the lint trap thoroughly before each test run.
    2.6 Test cloths.
    2.6.1 Energy test cloth. The energy test cloth shall be clean and 
consist of the following:
    (a) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite 
weave, which is a blended fabric of 50 percent cotton and 50 percent 
polyester and weighs within +10 percent of 5.75 ounces per square yard 
after test cloth preconditioning and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 
picks on the fill. The individual warp and fill yarns are a blend of 50 
percent cotton and 50 percent polyester fibers.
    (b) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches and has been 
hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage 
after five washes shall not be more than four percent on the length and 
width.
    (c) The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not 
exceed 25 runs.
    2.6.2 Energy stuffer cloths. The energy stuffer cloths shall be made 
from energy test cloth material and shall consist of pieces of material 
that are 12 inches by 12 inches and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10 
inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not 
be more than four percent on the length and width. The number of test 
runs on the same energy stuffer cloth shall not exceed 25 runs after 
test cloth preconditioning.
    2.6.3 Test Cloth Preconditioning.
    A new test cloth load and energy stuffer cloths shall be treated as 
follows:
    (1) Bone dry the load to a weight change of 1 
percent, or less, as prescribed in Section 1.2.
    (2) Place test cloth load in a standard clothes washer set at the 
maximum water fill level. Wash the load for 10 minutes in soft water (17 
parts per million hardness or less), using 6.0 grams of AHAM Standard 
Test Detergent, IIA, per gallon of water. Wash water temperature is to 
controlled at 140[deg]5 [deg]F (60[deg]2.7 [deg]C). Rinse water temperature is to be controlled 
at 100[deg]5 [deg]F (37.72.7 
[deg]C).
    (3) Rinse the load again at the same water temperature.
    (4) Bone dry the load as prescribed in Section 1.2 and weigh the 
load.
    (5) This procedure is repeated until there is a weight change of one 
percent or less.
    (6) A final cycle is to be a hot water wash with no detergent, 
followed by two warm water rinses.
    2.7 Test loads.
    2.7.1 Compact size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of 
energy cloths which weighs 3.00 pounds .03 pounds. 
Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by 
the use of energy stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths 
per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 
100[deg] 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts 
per million hardness for approximately two minutes in order to saturate 
the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the 
load until the moisture content of the load is between 66.5 percent to 
73.5 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load.
    2.7.2 Standard size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of 
energy cloths which weighs 7.00 pounds .07 pounds. 
Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by 
the use of energy stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths 
per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 
100[deg] 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts 
per million hardness for approximately two minutes in order to saturate 
the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the 
load until the moisture content of the load is between 66.5 percent to 
73.5 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load.
    2.7.3 Method of loading. Load the energy test cloths by grasping 
them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely and then dropping them 
in the dryer at random.

[[Page 148]]

    2.8 Clothes dryer preconditioning. Before any test cycle, operate 
the dryer without a test load in the non-heat mode for 15 minutes or 
until the discharge air temperature is varying less than 1 [deg]F for 10 
minutes, which ever is longer, in the test installation location with 
the ambient conditions within the specified rest condition tolerances of 
2.2.

                   3. Test Procedures and Measurements

    3.1 Drum capacity. Measure the drum capacity by sealing all openings 
in the drum except the loading port with a plastic bag, and ensure that 
all corners and depressions are filled and that there are no extrusions 
of the plastic bag through the opening in the drum. Support the dryer's 
rear drum surface on a platform scale to prevent deflection of the 
dryer, and record the weight of the empty dryer. Fill the drum with 
water to a level determined by the intersection of the door plane and 
the loading port. Record the temperature of the water and then the 
weight of the dryer with the added water and then determine the mass of 
the water in pounds. Add or subtract the appropriate volume depending on 
whether or not the plastic bag protrudes into the drum interior. The 
drum capacity is calculated as follows:

C=w/d
    C= capacity in cubic feet.
    w= weight of water in pounds.
    d= density of water at the measured temperature in pounds per cubic 
feet.
    3.2 Dryer loading. Load the dryer as specified in 2.7.
    3.3 Test cycle. Operate the clothes dryer at the maximum temperature 
setting and, if equipped with a timer, at the maximum time setting and 
dry the test load until the moisture content of the test load is between 
2.5 percent to 5.0 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load, but 
do not permit the dryer to advance into cool down. If required, reset 
the timer or automatic dry control.
    3.4 Data recording. Record for each test cycle:
    3.4.1 Bone-dry weight of the test load described in 2.7.
    3.4.2 Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, as 
described in 2.7.
    3.4.3 Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test 
described in 3.3.
    3.4.4 Test room conditions, temperature and percent relative 
humidity described in 2.2.
    3.4.5 For electric dryers--the total kilowatt-hours of electric 
energy, Et, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
    3.4.6 For gas dryers:
    3.4.6.1 Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, Ete, 
consumed during the test described in 3.3.
    3.4.6.2 Cubic feet of gas per cycle, Etg, consumed during 
the test described in 3.3.
    3.4.6.3 On gas dryers using a continuously burning pilot light--the 
cubic feet of gas, Epg, consumed by the gas pilot light in 
one hour.
    3.4.6.4 Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 
and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in 
accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938. A sample 
calculation is illustrated in Appendix E of HLD-1.
    3.5 Test for automatic termination field use factor credits. Credit 
for automatic termination can be claimed for those dryers which meet the 
requirements for either temperature-sensing control, 1.12, or moisture 
sensing control, 1.13, and having present the appropriate mark or detent 
feed defined in 1.11.

        4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements

    4.1 Total per-cycle electric dryer energy consumption. Calculate the 
total electric dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ece 
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

Ece=[66/Ww-Wd)]xEttxFU
    Et=the energy recorded in 3.4.5.
    66=an experimentally established value for the percent reduction in 
the moisture content of the test load during a laboratory test cycle 
expressed as a percent.
    FU=Field use factor.
     =1.18 for time termination control systems.
     =1.04 for automatic control systems which meet the requirements of 
the definitions for automatic termination controls in 1.11.1, 1.12 and 
1.13.
    Ww=the moisture content of the wet test load as recorded 
in 3.4.2.
    Wd=the moisture content of the dry test load as recorded 
in 3.4.3.
    4.2 Per-cycle gas dryer electrical energy consumption. Calculate the 
gas dryer electrical energy consumption per cycle, Ege, 
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

Ege=[66/(Ww-Wd)]xEtexFU
    Ete=the energy recorded in 3.4.6.1

FU, 66, Ww, Wd as defined in 4.1
    4.3 Per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption. Calculate the gas 
dryer gas energy consumption per cycle, Ege. expressed in Btu's per 
cycle as defined as:

Egg=[66/(Ww-Wd)]xEtgxFUxGEF
    Etg=the energy recorded in 3.4.6.2
    GEF=corrected gas heat value (Btu per cubic feet) as defined in 
3.4.6.4
    FU, 66, Ww Wd as defined in 4.1
    4.4 Per-cycle gas dryer continuously burning pilot light gas energy 
consumption. Calculate the gas dryer continuously burning pilot light 
gas energy consumption per cycle, Eup expressed in Btu's per cycle and 
defined as:

Eup=Epgx(8760-140/416)xGEF
    Epg=the energy recorded in 3.4.6.3
    8760=number of hours in a year

[[Page 149]]

    416=representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year
    140=estimated number of hours that the continuously burning pilot 
light is on during the operation of the clothes dryer for the 
representative average use cycle for clothes dryers (416 cycles per 
year)
    GEF as defined in 4.3
    4.5 Total per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption expressed in 
Btu's. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per cycle, Eg, 
expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as:

Eg=Egg+Eup
    Egg as defined in 4.3
    Eup as defined in 4.4
    4.6 Total per-cycle gas dryer energy consumption expressed in 
kilowatt-hours. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per 
cycle, Ecg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

Ecg=Ege+(Eg/3412 Btu/k Wh)
    Ege as defined in 4.2
    Eg as defined in 4.5

[46 FR 27326, May 19, 1981]

 Appendix E to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
                 the Energy Consumption of Water Heaters

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 Cut-in means the time when or water temperature at which a water 
heater control or thermostat acts to increase the energy or fuel input 
to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
    1.2 Cut-out means the time when or water temperature at which a 
water heater control or thermostat acts to reduce to a minimum the 
energy or fuel input to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
    1.3 Design Power Rating means the nominal power rating that a water 
heater manufacturer assigns to a particular design of water heater, 
expressed in kilowatts or Btu (kJ) per hour as appropriate.
    1.4 Energy Factor means a measure of water heater overall 
efficiency.
    1.5 First-Hour Rating means an estimate of the maximum volume of 
``hot'' water that a storage-type water heater can supply within an hour 
that begins with the water heater fully heated (i.e., with all 
thermostats satisfied). It is a function of both the storage volume and 
the recovery rate.
    1.6 Heat Trap means a device which can be integrally connected or 
independently attached to the hot and/or cold water pipe connections of 
a water heater such that the device will develop a thermal or mechanical 
seal to minimize the recirculation of water due to thermal convection 
between the water heater tank and its connecting pipes.
    1.7 Instantaneous Water Heaters
    1.7.1 Electric Instantaneous Water Heater Reserved.
    1.7.2 Gas Instantaneous Water Heater means a water heater that uses 
gas as the energy source, initiates heating based on sensing water flow, 
is designed to deliver water at a controlled temperature of less than 
180 [deg]F (82 [deg]C), has an input greater than 50,000 Btu/h (53 MJ/h) 
but less than 200,000 Btu/h (210 MJ/h), and has a manufacturer's 
specified storage capacity of less than 2 gallons (7.6 liters). The unit 
may use a fixed or variable burner input.
    1.8 Maximum gpm (L/min) Rating means the maximum gallons per minute 
(liters per minute) of hot water that can be supplied by an 
instantaneous water heater while maintaining a nominal temperature rise 
of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) during steady state operation.
    1.9 Rated Storage Volume means the water storage capacity of a water 
heater, in gallons (liters), as specified by the manufacturer.
    1.10 Recovery Efficiency means the ratio of energy delivered to the 
water to the energy content of the fuel consumed by the water heater.
    1.11 Standby means the time during which water is not being 
withdrawn from the water heater. There are two standby time intervals 
used within this test procedure: [tau]stby,1 represents the 
elapsed time between the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature 
is observed after the sixth draw and subsequent recovery and the end of 
the 24-hour test; [tau]stby,2 represents the total time 
during the 24-hour simulated use test when water is not being withdrawn 
from the water heater.
    1.12 Storage-type Water Heaters
    1.12.1 Electric Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that 
uses electricity as the energy source, is designed to heat and store 
water at a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 
[deg]F (82 [deg]C), has a nominal input of 12 kilowatts (40,956 Btu/h) 
or less, and has a rated storage capacity of not less than 20 gallons 
(76 liters) nor more than 120 gallons (450 liters).
    1.12.2 Gas Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that uses 
gas as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a 
thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 
[deg]C), has a nominal input of 75,000 Btu (79 MJ) per hour or less, and 
has a rated storage capacity of not less than 20 gallons (76 liters) nor 
more than 100 gallons (380 liters).
    1.12.3 Heat Pump Water Heater means a water heater that uses 
electricity as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at 
a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 
[deg]C), has a maximum current rating of 24 amperes (including the 
compressor and all auxiliary equipment such as fans, pumps, controls, 
and, if on the same circuit, any resistive elements) for an input 
voltage of 250 volts or

[[Page 150]]

less, and, if the tank is supplied, has a manufacturer's rated storage 
capacity of 120 gallons (450 liters) or less. Resistive elements used to 
provide supplemental heating may use the same circuit as the compressor 
if (1) an interlocking mechanism prevents concurrent compressor 
operation and resistive heating or (2) concurrent operation does not 
result in the maximum current rating of 24 amperes being exceeded. 
Otherwise, the resistive elements and the heat pump components must use 
separate circuits. A heat pump water heater may be sold by the 
manufacturer with or without a storage tank.
    a. Heat Pump Water Heater with Storage Tank means an air-to-water 
heat pump sold by the manufacturer with an insulated storage tank as a 
packaged unit. The tank and heat pump can be an integral unit or they 
can be separated.
    b. Heat Pump Water Heater without Storage Tank (also called Add-on 
Heat Pump Water Heater) means an air-to-water heat pump designed for use 
with a storage-type water heater or a storage tank that is not specified 
or supplied by the manufacturer.
    1.12.4 Oil Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that uses 
oil as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a 
thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 
[deg]C), has a nominal energy input of 105,000 Btu/h (110 MJ/h) or less, 
and has a manufacturer's rated storage capacity of 50 gallons (190 
liters) or less.
    1.12.5 Storage-type Water Heater of More than 2 Gallons (7.6 Liters) 
and Less than 20 Gallons (76 Liters). Reserved.
    1.13 ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 means the standard published in 1986 by 
the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning 
Engineers, Inc., and titled Standard Measurement Guide: Section on 
Temperature Measurements.
    1.14 ASTM-D-2156-80 means the test standard published in 1980 by the 
American Society for Testing and Measurements and titled ``Smoke Density 
in Flue Gases from Burning Distillate Fuels, Test Method for''.
    1.15 Symbol Usage The following identity relationships are provided 
to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure:

Cp specific heat capacity of water
Eannual annual energy consumption of a water heater
Ef energy factor of a water heater
Fhr first-hour rating of a storage-type water heater
Fmax maximum gpm (L/min) rating of an instantaneous water 
heater rated at a temperature rise of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) across the 
heater
i a subscript to indicate an ith draw during a test
Mi mass of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to 6) of 
the 24-hr simulated use test
M*i for storage-type water heaters, mass of water removed 
during the ith draw (i=1 to n) during the first-hour rating test
M10m for instantaneous water heaters, mass of water removed 
continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum gpm (L/min) 
rating test
n for storage-type water heaters, total number of draws during the 
first-hour rating test
Q total fossil fuel and/or electric energy consumed during the entire 
24-hr simulated use test
Qd daily water heating energy consumption adjusted for net 
change in internal energy
Qda adjusted daily water heating energy consumption with 
adjustment for variation of tank to ambient air temperature difference 
from nominal value
Qdm overall adjusted daily water heating energy consumption 
including Qda and QHWD
Qhr hourly standby losses
QHW daily energy consumption to heat water over the measured 
average temperature rise across the water heater
QHWD adjustment to daily energy consumption, Qhw, 
due to variation of the temperature rise across the water heater not 
equal to the nominal value of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C)
Qr energy consumption of fossil fuel or heat pump water 
heaters between thermostat (or burner) cut-out prior to the first draw 
and cut-out following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Qr, max energy consumption of a modulating instantaneous 
water heater between cut-out (burner) prior to the first draw and cut-
out following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Qr, min energy consumption of a modulating instantaneous 
water heater from immediately prior to the fourth draw to burner cut-out 
following the fourth draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Qstby total energy consumed by the water heater during the 
standby time interval [tau]stby, 1
Qsu total fossil fueled and/or electric energy consumed from 
the beginning of the first draw to the thermostat (or burner) cut-out 
following the completion of the sixth draw during the 24-hr simulated 
use test
Tmin for modulating instantaneous water heaters, steady state 
outlet water temperature at the minimum fuel input rate
T0 mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hr 
simulated use test
T24 mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hr simulated 
use test
Ta, stby average ambient air temperature during standby 
periods of the 24-hr use test
Tdel for instantaneous water heaters, average outlet water 
temperature during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the maximum 
gpm (L/min) rating test

[[Page 151]]

Tdel, i average outlet water temperature during the ith draw 
of the 24-hr simulated use test
Tin for instantaneous water heaters, average inlet water 
temperature during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the maximum 
gpm (L/min) rating test
Tin, i average inlet water temperature during the ith draw of 
the 24-hr simulated use test
Tmax, 1 maximum measured mean tank temperature after cut-out 
following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Tstby average storage tank temperature during the standby 
period [tau]stby, 2 of the 24-hr use test
Tsu maximum measured mean tank temperature after cut-out 
following the sixth draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Tt, stby average storage tank temperature during the standby 
period [tau]stby, 1 of the 24-hr use test
T*del, i for storage-type water heaters, average outlet water 
temperature during the ith draw (i=1 to n) of the first-hour rating test
T*max, i for storage-type water heaters, maximum outlet water 
temperature observed during the ith draw (i=1 to n) of the first-hour 
rating test
T*min, i for storage-type water heaters, minimum outlet water 
temperature to terminate the ith draw during the first-hour rating test
UA standby loss coefficient of a storage-type water heater
Vi volume of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to 6) of 
the 24-hr simulated use test
V*i volume of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to n) 
during the first-hour rating test
V10m for instantaneous water heaters, volume of water removed 
continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum gpm (L/min) 
rating test
Vmax steady state water flow rate of an instantaneous water 
heater at the rated input to give a discharge temperature of 135 [deg]F 
 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 
[deg]C)
Vmin steady state water flow rate of a modulating 
instantaneous water heater at the minimum input to give a discharge 
temperature of Tmin up to 135 [deg]F  5 
[deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 [deg]C)
Vst measured storage volume of the storage tank
Wf weight of storage tank when completely filled with water
Wt tare weight of storage tank when completely empty of water
nr recovery efficiency
p density of water
[tau]stby, 1 elapsed time between the time the maximum mean 
tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw and the end of the 24-
hr simulated use test
[tau]stby, 2 overall standby periods when no water is 
withdrawn during the 24-hr simulated use test
    1.16 Tabletop water heater means a water heater in a rectangular box 
enclosure designed to slide into a kitchen countertop space with typical 
dimensions of 36 inches high, 25 inches deep and 24 inches wide.

                           2. Test Conditions

    2.1 Installation Requirements. Tests shall be performed with the 
water heater and instrumentation installed in accordance with Section 4 
of this appendix.
    2.2 Ambient Air Temperature. The ambient air temperature shall be 
maintained between 65.0 [deg]F and 70.0 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C and 21.1 
[deg]C) on a continuous basis. For heat pump water heaters, the dry bulb 
temperature shall be maintained at 67.5 [deg]F  1 
[deg]F (19.7 [deg]C  0.6 [deg]C) and, in addition, 
the relative humidity shall be maintained between 49% and 51%.
    2.3 Supply Water Temperature. The temperature of the water being 
supplied to the water heater shall be maintained at 58 [deg]F  2 [deg]F (14.4 [deg]C  1.1 
[deg]C) throughout the test.
    2.4 Storage Tank Temperature. The average temperature of the water 
within the storage tank shall be set to 135 [deg]F  5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 
[deg]C).
    2.5 Supply Water Pressure. During the test when water is not being 
withdrawn, the supply pressure shall be maintained between 40 psig (275 
kPa) and the maximum allowable pressure specified by the water heater 
manufacturer.
    2.6 Electrical and/or Fossil Fuel Supply.
    2.6.1 Electrical. Maintain the electrical supply voltage to within 
 1% of the center of the voltage range specified 
by the water heater and/or heat pump manufacturer.
    2.6.2 Natural Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with 
the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not 
specified, maintain a supply pressure of 7-10 inches of water column 
(1.7-2.5 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance 
pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within  10% of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. 
For all tests, use natural gas having a heating value of approximately 
1,025 Btu per standard cubic foot (38,190 kJ per standard cubic meter).
    2.6.3 Propane Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with 
the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not 
specified, maintain a supply pressure of 11-13 inches of water column 
(2.7-3.2 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance 
pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within  10% of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. 
For all tests, use propane gas with a heating value of approximately 
2,500 Btu per standard cubic foot (93,147 kJ per standard cubic meter).

[[Page 152]]

    2.6.4 Fuel Oil Supply. Maintain an uninterrupted supply of fuel oil. 
Use fuel oil having a heating value of approximately 138,700 Btu per 
gallon (38,660 kJ per liter).

                           3. Instrumentation

    3.1 Pressure Measurements. Pressure-measuring instruments shall have 
an error no greater than the following values:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Item measured          Instrument accuracy  Instrument precision
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gas pressure................   0.1 inch of       eq> 0.05 inch of
                               water column (      minus
                               0.025 kPa).           0.012 kPa).
Atmospheric pressure........   0.1 inch of       eq> 0.05 inch of
                               mercury column        mercury column
                               ( 0.34 kPa).        eq> 0.17 kPa).
Water pressure..............   1.0 pounds per    eq> 0.50 pounds per
                               square inch (      minus
                               6.9 kPa).             3.45 kPa).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    3.2 Temperature Measurement
    3.2.1 Measurement. Temperature measurements shall be made in 
accordance with the Standard Measurement Guide: Section on Temperature 
Measurements, ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86.
    3.2.2 Accuracy and Precision. The accuracy and precision of the 
instruments, including their associated readout devices, shall be within 
the following limits:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Item measured                   Instrument accuracy                  Instrument precision
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air dry bulb temperature.............   0.2      0.1 [deg]F ( 0.06 [deg]C)
                                        eq> 0.1 [deg]C).
Air wet bulb temperature.............   0.2      0.1 [deg]F ( 0.06 [deg]C)
                                        eq> 0.1 [deg]C).
Inlet and outlet water temperatures..   0.2      0.1 [deg]F ( 0.06 [deg]C)
                                        eq> 0.1 [deg]C).
Storage tank temperatures............   0.5      0.25 [deg]F ( 0.14 [deg]C)
                                        eq> 0.3 [deg]C).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    3.2.3 Scale Division. In no case shall the smallest scale division 
of the instrument or instrument system exceed 2 times the specified 
precision.
    3.2.4 Temperature Difference. Temperature difference between the 
entering and leaving water may be measured with any of the following:

a. A thermopile
b. Calibrated resistance thermometers
c. Precision thermometers
d. Calibrated thermistors
e. Calibrated thermocouples
f. Quartz thermometers

    3.2.5 Thermopile Construction. If a thermopile is used, it shall be 
made from calibrated thermocouple wire taken from a single spool. 
Extension wires to the recording device shall also be made from that 
same spool.
    3.2.6 Time Constant. The time constant of the instruments used to 
measure the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be no greater than 
5 seconds.
    3.3 Liquid Flow Rate Measurement. The accuracy of the liquid flow 
rate measurement, using the calibration if furnished, shall be equal to 
or less than  1% of the measured value in mass 
units per unit time.
    3.4 Electric Energy. The electrical energy used shall be measured 
with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within 
 1% of the reading.
    3.5 Fossil Fuels. The quantity of fuel used by the water heater 
shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that 
is accurate within  1% of the reading.
    3.6 Mass Measurements. For mass measurements greater than or equal 
to 10 pounds (4.5 kg), a scale that is accurate within  1% of the reading shall be used to make the 
measurement. For mass measurements less than 10 pounds (4.5 kg), the 
scale shall provide a measurement that is accurate within  0.1 pound (0.045 kg).
    3.7 Heating Value. The higher heating value of the natural gas, 
propane, or fuel oil shall be measured with an instrument and associated 
readout device that is accurate within  1% of the 
reading. The heating value of natural gas and propane must be corrected 
for local temperature and pressure conditions.
    3.8 Time. The elapsed time measurements shall be measured with an 
instrument that is accurate within  0.5 seconds 
per hour.
    3.9 Volume. Volume measurements shall be measured with an accuracy 
of  2% of the total volume.

                             4. Installation

    4.1 Water Heater Mounting. A water heater designed to be 
freestanding shall be placed on a \3/4\ inch (2 cm) thick plywood 
platform supported by three 2 x 4 inch (5 cm x 10 cm) runners. If the 
water heater is not approved for installation on combustible flooring, 
suitable non-combustible material shall be placed between the water 
heater and the platform. Counter-top water heaters shall be placed 
against a simulated wall section. Wall-mounted water heaters shall be 
supported on a simulated wall in accordance

[[Page 153]]

with the manufacturer-published installation instructions. When a 
simulated wall is used, the recommended construction is 2 x 4 inch (5 cm 
x 10 cm) studs, faced with \3/4\ inch (2 cm) plywood. For heat pump 
water heaters that are supplied with a storage tank, the two components, 
if not delivered as a single package, shall be connected in accordance 
with the manufacturer-published installation instructions and the 
overall system shall be placed on the above-described plywood platform. 
If installation instructions are not provided by the heat pump 
manufacturer, uninsulated 8 foot (2.4 m) long connecting hoses having an 
inside diameter of \5/8\ inch (1.6 cm) shall be used to connect the 
storage tank and the heat pump water heater. With the exception of using 
the storage tank described in 4.10, the same requirements shall apply 
for heat pump water heaters that are supplied without a storage tank 
from the manufacturer. The testing of the water heater shall occur in an 
area that is protected from drafts.
    4.2 Water Supply. Connect the water heater to a water supply capable 
of delivering water at conditions as specified in Sections 2.3 and 2.5 
of this appendix.
    4.3 Water Inlet and Outlet Configuration. For freestanding water 
heaters that are taller than 36 inches (91.4 cm), inlet and outlet 
piping connections shall be configured in a manner consistent with 
Figures 1 and 2. Inlet and outlet piping connections for wall-mounted 
water heaters shall be consistent with Figure 3. For freestanding water 
heaters that are 36 inches or less in height and not supplied as part of 
a counter-top enclosure (commonly referred to as an under-the-counter 
model), inlet and outlet piping shall be installed in a manner 
consistent with Figures 4, 5, and 6. For water heaters that are supplied 
with a counter-top enclosure, inlet and outlet piping shall be made in a 
manner consistent with Figures 7A and 7B, respectively. The vertical 
piping noted in Figures 7A and 7B shall be located (whether inside the 
enclosure or along the outside in a recessed channel) in accordance with 
the manufacturer-published installation instructions.
    All dimensions noted in Figures 1 through 7 shall be achieved. All 
piping between the water heater and the inlet and outlet temperature 
sensors, noted as TIN and TOUT in the figures, 
shall be Type ``L'' hard copper having the same diameter as the 
connections on the water heater. Unions may be used to facilitate 
installation and removal of the piping arrangements. A pressure gauge 
and diaphragm expansion tank shall be installed in the supply water 
piping at a location upstream of the inlet temperature sensor. An 
appropriately rated pressure and temperature relief valve shall be 
installed on all water heaters at the port specified by the 
manufacturer. Discharge piping for the relief valve shall be non-
metallic. If heat traps, piping insulation, or pressure relief valve 
insulation are supplied with the water heater, they shall be installed 
for testing. Except when using a simulated wall, clearance shall be 
provided such that none of the piping contacts other surfaces in the 
test room.

[[Page 154]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.005


[[Page 155]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.006


[[Page 156]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.007


[[Page 157]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.008

    4.4 Fuel and/or Electrical Power and Energy Consumption. Install one 
or more instruments which measure, as appropriate, the quantity and rate 
of electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumption in accordance with 
Section 3. For heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive 
heating, the electrical energy supplied to the resistive element(s) 
shall be metered separately from the electrical energy supplied to the 
entire appliance or to the remaining components (e.g., compressor, fans, 
pumps, controls).
    4.5 Internal Storage Tank Temperature Measurements. Install six 
temperature measurement sensors inside the water heater tank with a 
vertical distance of at least 4 inches (100 mm) between successive 
sensors. A temperature sensor shall be positioned at the vertical 
midpoint of each of the six equal

[[Page 158]]

volume nodes within the tank. Nodes designate the equal volumes used to 
evenly partition the total volume of the tank. As much as is possible, 
the temperature sensor should be positioned away from any heating 
elements, anodic protective devices, tank walls, and flue pipe walls. If 
the tank cannot accommodate six temperature sensors and meet the 
installation requirements specified above, install the maximum number of 
sensors which comply with the installation requirements. The temperature 
sensors shall be installed either through (1) the anodic device opening; 
(2) the relief valve opening; or (3) the hot water outlet. If installed 
through the relief valve opening or the hot water outlet, a tee fitting 
or outlet piping, as applicable, shall be installed as close as possible 
to its original location. If the relief valve temperature sensor is 
relocated, and it no longer extends into the top of the tank, a 
substitute relief valve that has a sensing element that can reach into 
the tank shall be installed. If the hot water outlet includes a heat 
trap, the heat trap shall be installed on top of the tee fitting. Added 
fittings shall be covered with thermal insulation having an R value 
between 4 and 8 h0ft2/ [deg]F/Btu (0.7 and 1.4 
m2/ [deg]C/W).
    4.6 Ambient Air Temperature Measurement. Install an ambient air 
temperature sensor at the vertical mid-point of the water heater and 
approximately 2 feet (610 mm) from the surface of the water heater. The 
sensor shall be shielded against radiation.
    4.7 Inlet and Outlet Water Temperature Measurements. Install 
temperature sensors in the cold-water inlet pipe and hot-water outlet 
pipe as shown in Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7a and 7b, as applicable.
    4.8 Flow Control. A valve shall be installed to provide flow as 
specified in sections 5.1.4.1 for storage tank water heaters and 5.2.1 
for instantaneous water heaters.
    4.9 Flue Requirements.
    4.9.1 Gas-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a natural draft in the 
following manner. For gas-fired water heaters with a vertically 
discharging draft hood outlet, a 5-foot (1.5-meter) vertical vent pipe 
extension with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the 
draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. For gas-fired 
water heaters with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, a 90-
degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of 
the draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. A 5-foot 
(1.5-meter) length of vent pipe shall be connected to the elbow and 
oriented to discharge vertically upward. Direct vent gas-fired water 
heaters shall be installed with venting equipment specified in the 
manufacturer's instructions using the minimum vertical and horizontal 
lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
    4.9.2 Oil-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a draft at the flue collar 
at the value specified in the manufacturer's instructions. Establish the 
draft by using a sufficient length of vent pipe connected to the water 
heater flue outlet, and directed vertically upward. For an oil-fired 
water heater with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, a 90-
degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of 
the draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. A length of 
vent pipe sufficient to establish the draft shall be connected to the 
elbow fitting and oriented to discharge vertically upward. Direct-vent 
oil-fired water heaters should be installed with venting equipment as 
specified in the manufacturer's instructions, using the minimum vertical 
and horizontal lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
    4.10 Heat Pump Water Heater Storage Tank. The tank to be used for 
testing a heat pump water heater without a tank supplied by the 
manufacturer (see Section 1.12.3b) shall be an electric storage-type 
water heater having a measured volume of 47.0 gallons 1.0 gallon (178 liters 3.8 
liters); two 4.5 kW heating elements controlled in such a manner as to 
prevent both elements from operating simultaneously; and an energy 
factor greater than or equal to the minimum energy conservation standard 
(as determined in accordance with Section 6.1.7) and less than or equal 
to the sum of the minimum energy conservation standard and 0.02.

                           5. Test Procedures

    5.1 Storage-type Water Heaters, Including Heat Pump Water Heaters.
    5.1.1 Determination of Storage Tank Volume. Determine the storage 
capacity, Vst, of the water heater under test, in gallons 
(liters), by subtracting the tare weight--measured while the tank is 
empty--from the gross weight of the storage tank when completely filled 
with water (with all air eliminated and line pressure applied as 
described in section 2.5) and dividing the resulting net weight by the 
density of water at the measured temperature.
    5.1.2 Setting the Thermostat.
    5.1.2.1 Single Thermostat Tanks. Starting with a tank at the supply 
water temperature, initiate normal operation of the water heater. After 
cut-out, determine the mean tank temperature every minute until the 
maximum value is observed. Determine whether this maximum value for the 
mean tank temperature is within the range of 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C). 
If not, turn off the water heater, adjust the thermostat, drain and 
refill the tank with supply water. Then, once again, initiate normal 
operation of the water heater, and determine the maximum mean tank 
temperature after cut-out. Repeat this sequence until the maximum mean

[[Page 159]]

tank temperature after cut-out is 135 [deg]F5 
[deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C).
    5.1.2.2 Tanks with Two or More Thermostats. Follow the same sequence 
as for a single thermostat tank, i.e. start at the supply water 
temperature, operate normally until cutout. Determine if the thermostat 
that controls the uppermost heating element yields a maximum water 
temperature of 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 
[deg]C2.8 [deg]C), as measured by the in-tank 
sensors that are positioned above the uppermost heating element. If the 
tank temperature at the thermostat is not within 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C), 
turn off the water heater, adjust the thermostat, drain and refill the 
tank with supply water. The thermostat that controls the heating element 
positioned next highest in the tank shall then be set to yield a maximum 
water temperature of 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 
[deg]C2.8 [deg]C). This process shall be repeated 
until the thermostat controlling the lowest element is correctly 
adjusted. When adjusting the thermostat that controls the lowest 
element, the maximum mean tank temperature after cut-out, as determined 
using all the in-tank sensors, shall be 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C). 
When adjusting all other thermostats, use only the in-tank temperature 
sensors positioned above the heating element in question to evaluate the 
maximum water temperature after cut-out.
    For heat pump water heaters that control an auxiliary resistive 
element, the thermostat shall be set in accordance with the 
manufacturer's installation instructions.
    5.1.3 Power Input Determination. For all water heaters except 
electric types having immersed heating elements, initiate normal 
operation and determine the power input, P, to the main burners 
(including pilot light power, if any) after 15 minutes of operation. If 
the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, 
the regulator outlet pressure shall be set within  
10% of that recommended by the manufacturer. For oil-fired water heaters 
the fuel pump pressure shall be within  10% of the 
manufacturer's specified pump pressure. All burners shall be adjusted to 
achieve an hourly Btu (kJ) rating that is within  
2% of the value specified by the manufacturer. For an oil-fired water 
heater, adjust the burner to give a CO2 reading recommended 
by the manufacturer and an hourly Btu (kJ) rating that is within  2% of that specified by the manufacturer. Smoke in the 
flue may not exceed No. 1 smoke as measured by the procedure in ASTM-D-
2156-80.
    5.1.4 First-Hour Rating Test.
    5.1.4.1 General. During hot water draws, remove water at a rate of 
3.00.25 gallons per minute (11.40.95 liters per minute). Collect the water in a 
container that is large enough to hold the volume removed during an 
individual draw and suitable for weighing at the termination of each 
draw. Alternatively, a water meter may be used to directly measure the 
water volume(s) withdrawn.
    5.1.4.2 Draw Initiation Criteria. Begin the first-hour rating test 
by imposing a draw on the storage-type water heater. After completion of 
this first draw, initiate successive draws based on the following 
criteria. For gas-and oil-fired water heaters, initiate successive draws 
when the thermostat acts to reduce the supply of fuel to the main 
burner. For electric water heaters having a single element or multiple 
elements that all operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when 
the thermostat acts to reduce the electrical input supplied to the 
element(s). For electric water heaters having two or more elements that 
do not operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when the 
applicable thermostat acts to reduce the electrical input to the element 
located vertically highest in the storage tank. For heat pump waters 
heaters that do not use supplemental resistive heating, initiate 
successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the 
compressor is reduced by the action of the water heater's thermostat. 
For heat pump waters heaters that use supplemental resistive heating, 
initiate successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the 
compressor or the uppermost resistive element is reduced by the action 
of the applicable water heater thermostat. This draw initiation 
criterion for heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive 
heating, however, shall only apply when the water located above the 
thermostat at cut-out is heated to 135 [deg]F5 
[deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C).
    5.1.4.3 Test Sequence. Establish normal water heater operation. If 
the water heater is not presently operating, initiate a draw. The draw 
may be terminated anytime after cut-in occurs. After cut-out occurs 
(i.e., all thermostats are satisfied), monitor the internal storage tank 
temperature sensors described in section 4.5 every minute.
    Initiate a draw after a maximum mean tank temperature has been 
observed following cut-out. Record the time when the draw is initiated 
and designate it as an elapsed time of zero ([tau]* = 0). (The 
superscript * is used to denote variables pertaining to the first-hour 
rating test.) Record the outlet water temperature beginning 15 seconds 
after the draw is initiated and at 5-second intervals thereafter until 
the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that 
occurs during this first draw and record it as T*max, 1. For 
the duration of this first draw and all successive draws, in addition, 
monitor the inlet temperature to the water heater to ensure that the 
required 58 [deg]F2 [deg]F (14.4 [deg]C1.1 [deg]C) test condition is met. Terminate the hot 
water draw when the outlet temperature decreases to T*max,1-
25 [deg]F (T*max,1-13.9 [deg]C). Record this temperature as

[[Page 160]]

T*min,1. Following draw termination, determine the average 
outlet water temperature and the mass or volume removed during this 
first draw and record them as T*del,1 and M*1 or 
V*1, respectively.
    Initiate a second and, if applicable, successive draw each time the 
applicable draw initiation criteria described in section 5.1.4.2 are 
satisfied. As required for the first draw, record the outlet water 
temperature 15 seconds after initiating each draw and at 5-second 
intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum 
outlet temperature that occurs during each draw and record it as 
T*max, i, where the subscript i refers to the draw number. 
Terminate each hot water draw when the outlet temperature decreases to 
T*max, i-25 [deg]F (T*max, i-13.9 [deg]C). Record 
this temperature as T*min, i. Calculate and record the 
average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed during each 
draw (T*del, i and M*i or V*i, 
respectively). Continue this sequence of draw and recovery until one 
hour has elapsed, then shut off the electrical power and/or fuel 
supplied to the water heater.
    If a draw is occurring at an elapsed time of one hour, continue this 
draw until the outlet temperature decreases to T*max, n-25 
[deg]F (T*max, n -13.9 [deg]C), at which time the draw shall 
be immediately terminated. (The subscript n shall be used to denote 
quantities associated with the final draw.) If a draw is not occurring 
at an elapsed time of one hour, a final draw shall be imposed at one 
hour. This draw shall be immediately terminated when the outlet 
temperature first indicates a value less than or equal to the cut-off 
temperature used for the previous draw (T*min, n-1). For 
cases where the outlet temperature is close to T*min, n-1, 
the final draw shall proceed for a minimum of 30 seconds. If an outlet 
temperature greater than T*min, n-1 is not measured within 30 
seconds, the draw shall be immediately terminated and zero additional 
credit shall be given towards first-hour rating (i.e., M*n = 
0 or V*n = 0). After the final draw is terminated, calculate 
and record the average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed 
during the draw (T*del, n and M*n or 
V*n, respectively).
    5.1.5 24-Hour Simulated Use Test. During the simulated use test, a 
total of 64.3 1.0 gallons (2433.8 liters) shall be removed. This value is referred to 
as the daily hot water usage in the following text.
    With the water heater turned off, fill the water heater with supply 
water and apply pressure as described in section 2.5. Turn on the water 
heater and associated heat pump unit, if present. After the cut-out 
occurs, the water heater may be operated for up to three cycles of 
drawing until cut-in, and then operating until cut-out, prior to the 
start of the test.
    At this time, record the mean tank temperature (To), and 
the electrical and/or fuel measurement readings, as appropriate. Begin 
the 24-hour simulated use test by withdrawing a volume from the water 
heater that equals one-sixth of the daily hot water usage. Record the 
time when this first draw is initiated and assign it as the test elapsed 
time ([tau]) of zero (0). Record the average storage tank and ambient 
temperature every 15 minutes throughout the 24-hour simulated use test 
unless a recovery or a draw is occurring. At elapsed time intervals of 
one, two, three, four, and five hours from [tau] = 0, initiate 
additional draws, removing an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of 
the daily hot water usage with the maximum allowable deviation for any 
single draw being  0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The 
quantity of water withdrawn during the sixth draw shall be increased or 
decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn 
equals 64.3 gallons  1.0 gallon (243.4 liters 
 3.8 liters).
    All draws during the simulated use test shall be made at flow rates 
of 3.0 gallons  0.25 gallons per minute (11.4 
liters  0.95 liters per minute). Measurements of 
the inlet and outlet temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the 
draw is initiated and at every subsequent 5-second interval throughout 
the duration of each draw. The arithmetic mean of the hot water 
discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature shall be 
determined for each draw (Tdel, i and Tin, i). 
Determine and record the net mass or volume removed (Mi or 
Vi ), as appropriate, after each draw.
    At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, record 
the maximum mean tank temperature observed after cut-out, 
Tmax, 1, and the energy consumed by an electric resistance, 
gas or oil-fired water heater, Qr. For heat pump water 
heaters, the total electrical energy consumed during the first recovery 
by the heat pump (including compressor, fan, controls, pump, etc.) and, 
if applicable, by the resistive element(s) shall be recorded as 
Qr.
    At the end of the recovery period that follows the sixth draw, 
determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel 
consumed since the beginning of the test, Qsu. In preparation 
for determining the energy consumed during standby, record the reading 
given on the electrical energy (watt-hour) meter, the gas meter, and/or 
the scale used to determine oil consumption, as appropriate. Record the 
maximum value of the mean tank temperature after cut-out as 
Tsu. Except as noted below, allow the water heater to remain 
in the standby mode until 24 hours have elapsed from the start of the 
test (i.e., since = 0). Prevent the water heater from beginning a 
recovery cycle during the last hour of the test by turning off the 
electric power to the electrical heating elements and heat pump, if 
present, or by turning down the fuel supply to the main burner at

[[Page 161]]

an elapsed time of 23 hours. If a recovery is taking place at an elapsed 
time of 23 hours, wait until the recovery is complete before reducing 
the electrical and/or fuel supply to the water heater. At 24 hours, 
record the mean tank temperature, T24, and the electric and/
or fuel instrument readings. Determine the total fossil fuel or 
electrical energy consumption, as appropriate, for the entire 24-hour 
simulated use test, Q. Record the time interval between the time at 
which the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw 
and the end of the 24-hour test as stby, 1. Record the time 
during which water is not being withdrawn from the water heater during 
the entire 24-hour period as stby, 2.
    5.2 Instantaneous Gas and Electric Water Heaters
    5.2.1 Setting the Outlet Discharge Temperature. Initiate normal 
operation of the water heater at the full input rating for electric 
instantaneous water heaters and at the maximum firing rate specified by 
the manufacturer for gas instantaneous water heaters. Monitor the 
discharge water temperature and set to a value of 135 [deg]F  5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 
[deg]C) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If the water 
heater is not capable of providing this discharge temperature when the 
flow rate is 3.0 gallons  0.25 gallons per minute 
(11.4 liters  0.95 liters per minute), then adjust 
the flow rate as necessary to achieve the specified discharge water 
temperature. Record the corresponding flow rate as Vmax.
    5.2.2 Additional Requirements for Variable Input Instantaneous Gas 
Water Heaters. If the instantaneous water heater incorporates a 
controller that permits operation at a reduced input rate, adjust the 
flow rate as necessary to achieve a discharge water temperature of 135 
[deg]F  5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 [deg]C) while maintaining the minimum input rate. 
Record the corresponding flow rate as Vmin. If an outlet 
temperature of 135 [deg]F  5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 
 2.8 [deg]C) cannot be achieved at the minimum 
flow rate permitted by the instantaneous water heater, record the flow 
rate as Vmin and the corresponding outlet temperature as 
Tmin.
    5.2.3 Maximum GPM Rating Test for Instantaneous Water Heaters. 
Establish normal water heater operation at the full input rate for 
electric instantaneous water heaters and at the maximum firing rate for 
gas instantaneous water heaters with the discharge water temperature set 
in accordance with Section 5.2.1. During the 10-minute test, either 
collect the withdrawn water for later measurement of the total mass 
removed, or alternatively, use a water meter to directly measure the 
water volume removed.
    After recording the scale or water meter reading, initiate water 
flow throughout the water heater, record the inlet and outlet water 
temperatures beginning 15 seconds after the start of the test and at 
subsequent 5-second intervals throughout the duration of the test. At 
the end of 10 minutes, turn off the water. Determine the mass of water 
collected, M10m, in pounds (kilograms), or the volume of 
water, V10m, in gallons (liters).
    5.2.4 24-hour Simulated Use Test for Gas Instantaneous Water 
Heaters.
    5.2.4.1 Fixed Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. Establish normal 
operation with the discharge water temperature and flow rate set to 
values of 135 [deg]F  5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 [deg]C) and Vmax per Section 5.2.1, 
respectively. With no draw occurring, record the reading given by the 
gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Begin the 
24-hour simulated use test by drawing an amount of water out of the 
water heater equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot water usage. 
Record the time when this first draw is initiated and designate it as an 
elapsed time, [tau], of 0. At elapsed time intervals of one, two, three, 
four, and five hours from [tau] = 0, initiate additional draws, removing 
an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot water usage, 
with the maximum allowable deviation for any single draw being  0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The quantity of water drawn 
during the sixth draw shall be increased or decreased as necessary such 
that the total volume of water withdrawn equals 64.3 gallons  1.0 gallons (243.4 liters  3.8 
liters).
    Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be 
made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every 5-second 
interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. The arithmetic 
mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet 
temperature shall be determined for each draw. Record the scale used to 
measure the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as 
appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the recovery period 
following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel or 
electrical energy consumed, Qr. Following the sixth draw and 
subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the standby 
mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the test 
(i.e., since [tau] = 0). At 24 hours, record the reading given by the 
gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Determine 
the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour 
simulated use test and designate the quantity as Q.
    5.2.4.2 Variable Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. If the 
instantaneous water heater incorporates a controller that permits 
continuous operation at a reduced input rate, the first three draws 
shall be conducted using the maximum flow rate, Vmax, while 
removing an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot 
water usage, with the maximum allowable deviation for any one of

[[Page 162]]

the three draws being  0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). 
The second three draws shall be conducted at Vmin. If an 
outlet temperature of 135 [deg]F  5 [deg]F (57.2 
[deg]C  2.8 [deg]C) could not be achieved at the 
minimum flow rate permitted by the instantaneous water heater, the last 
three draws should be lengthened such that the volume removed is:

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.001

or
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.002

where Tmin is the outlet water temperature at the flow rate 
Vmin as determined in Section 5.2.1, and where the maximum 
allowable variation for any one of the three draws is  0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The quantity of water 
withdrawn during the sixth draw shall be increased or decreased as 
necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn equals (32.15 + 
3/V4,5,6)  1.0 gallons

((121.7 + 3 / V4,5,6)  3.8 liters).

    Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be 
made 5 seconds after a draw is initiated and at every 5-second interval 
thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. Determine the arithmetic 
mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet 
temperature for each draw. Record the scale used to measure the mass of 
the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after 
each draw. At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, 
determine and record the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed, 
Qr, max. Likewise, record the reading of the meter used to 
measure fossil fuel or electrical energy consumption prior to the fourth 
draw and at the end of the recovery period following the fourth draw, 
and designate the difference as Qr,min. Following the sixth 
draw and subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the 
standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the 
test (i.e., since [tau]=0). At 24 hours, record the reading given by the 
gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter, as appropriate. Determine 
the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour 
simulated use test and designate the quantity as Q.

                             6. Computations

    6.1 Storage Tank and Heat Pump Water Heaters.
    6.1.1 Storage Tank Capacity. The storage tank capacity is computed 
using the following:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.003

Where:

Vst = the storage capacity of the water heater, gal (L).
Wf = the weight of the storage tank when completely filled 
with water, lb (kg).
Wt = the (tare) weight of the storage tank when completely 
empty, lb (kg).
[rho] = the density of water used to fill the tank measured at the 
temperature of the water, lb/gal (kg/L).

    6.1.2. First-Hour Rating Computation. For the case in which the 
final draw is initiated at or prior to an elapsed time of one hour, the 
first-hour rating shall be computed using,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.004

Where:

n = the number of draws that are completed during the first-hour rating 
test.
V*i = the volume of water removed during the ith draw of the 
first-hour rating test, gal (L)
or, if the mass of water is being measured,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.005

Where:

M*i = the mass of water removed during the ith draw of the 
first-hour rating test, lb (kg).
[rho] = the water density corresponding to the average outlet 
temperature measured during the ith draw, (T*del, I), lb/gal 
(kg/L).

    For the case in which a draw is not in progress at the elapsed time 
of one hour and a final draw is imposed at the elapsed time of one hour, 
the first-hour rating shall be calculated using
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.006

where n and V*i are the same quantities as defined above, and

V*n = the volume of water drawn during the nth (final) draw 
of the first-hour rating test, gal (L)
T*del,n-1 = the average water outlet temperature measured 
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
T*del,n = the average water outlet temperature measured 
during the nth (final) draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F 
([deg]C).

[[Page 163]]

T*min,n-1 = the minimum water outlet temperature measured 
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F ([deg]C).

    6.1.3 Recovery Efficiency. The recovery efficiency for gas, oil, and 
heat pump storage-type water heaters is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.007

Where:

M1 = total mass removed during the first draw of the 24-hour 
simulated use test, lb (kg), or, if the volume of water is being 
measured,
M1 = V1 [rho]1

Where:

V1 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).
[rho]1 = density of the water at the water temperature 
measured at the point where the flow volume is measured, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water, 
(Tdel,1 + Tin,1) 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/kg [deg]C).
Tdel,1 = average water outlet temperature measured during the 
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin,1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the 
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.
[rho]2 = density of stored hot water, (Tmax,1 + 
To)/2, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp2 = specific heat of stored hot water evaluated at 
(Tmax,1 + To) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/
kg2 [deg]C).
Tmax,1 = maximum mean tank temperature recorded after cut-out 
following the first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F 
([deg]C).
To = maximum mean tank temperature recorded prior to the 
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first draw, 
including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps, fans, etc., Btu 
(kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be converted to thermal energy 
using the following conversion: 1 kWh = 3,412 Btu.)

    The recovery efficiency for electric water heaters with immersed 
heating elements is assumed to be 98%.
    6.1.4 Hourly Standby Losses. The hourly standby energy losses are 
computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.008

Where:

    Qhr = the hourly standby energy losses of the water 
heater, Btu/h (kJ/h).

Qstby = the total energy consumed by the water heater between 
the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after 
the sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour test period, Btu (kJ).
Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.
[rho] = density of stored hot water, (T24 + Tsu) / 
2, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp = specific heat of the stored water, (T24 + 
Tsu) / 2, Btu/lb/[deg]F (kJ/kg/[deg]C).
T24 = the mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour 
simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tsu = the maximum mean tank temperature observed after the 
sixth draw, [deg]F ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.
[tau]stby, 1 = elapsed time between the time at which the 
maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw and the 
end of the 24-hour simulated use test, h.

    The standby heat loss coefficient for the tank is computed as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.009
    
Where:

UA = standby heat loss coefficient of the storage tank, Btu/h/[deg]F 
(kJ/h/[deg]C).
Qhr = as defined in this section.
Tt, stby,1= overall average storage tank temperature between 
the time when the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the 
sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F 
([deg]C).
Ta, stby,1= overall average ambient temperature between the 
time when the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth 
draw and the end of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).

    6.1.5 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water 
heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.010

Where:


[[Page 164]]


Q = total energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour simulated 
use test including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps, fans, 
etc., Btu (kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be converted to 
thermal energy using the following conversion: 1 kWh = 3,412 Btu.)
Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.
[rho]= density of the stored hot water, (T24 + To) 
/ 2, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp = specific heat of the stored water, (T24 + 
To) / 2, Btu/lb/[deg]F (kJ/kg/[deg]C).
T24 = mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour 
simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
To = mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hour 
simulated use test, recorded one minute before the first draw is 
initiated, [deg]F ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.

    6.1.6 Adjusted Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The adjusted 
daily water heating energy consumption, Qda, takes into 
account that the temperature difference between the storage tank and 
surrounding ambient air may not be the nominal value of 67.5 [deg]F (135 
[deg]F-67.5 [deg]F) or 37.5 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-19.7 [deg]C) due to the 
10 [deg]F (5.6 [deg]C) allowable variation in storage tank temperature, 
135 [deg]F  5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 [deg]C), and the 5 [deg]F (2.8 [deg]C) allowable 
variation in surrounding ambient temperature 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) to 
70 [deg]F (21.1 [deg]C). The adjusted daily water heating energy 
consumption is computed as:

Qda = QD - [(Tstby, 2 - Ta, stby,2) - (135 [deg]F - 67.5 [deg]F)] 
UA[tau]stby, 2
or Qda = QD - [(Tstby, 2 - Ta, stby, 2) - (57.2 [deg]C - 19.7 [deg]C)] 
UA[tau]stby, 2
Where:

Qda = the adjusted daily water heating energy consumption, 
Btu (kJ).
Qd = as defined in section 6.1.5.
Tstby, 2 = the mean tank temperature during the total standby 
portion, [tau]stby, 2, of the 24-hour test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Ta, stby, 2 = the average ambient temperature during the 
total standby portion, [tau]stby, 2, of the 24-hour test, [deg]F 
([deg]C).
UA = as defined in section 6.1.4.
[tau]stby, 2 = the number of hours during the 24-hour 
simulated test when water is not being withdrawn from the water heater.

    A modification is also needed to take into account that the 
temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply 
water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77 
[deg]F (135 [deg]F-58 [deg]F) or 42.8 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C). 
The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77 
[deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise.
    The energy used to heat water, Btu/day (kJ/day), may be computed as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.011
    
Where:

Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to 6), lb 
(kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw, Btu/lb/ 
[deg]F (kJ/kg/ [deg]C).
Tdel, i = the average water outlet temperature measured 
during the ith draw (i=1 to 6), [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin, i = the average water inlet temperature measured during 
the ith draw (i=1 to 6), [deg]F ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.
    The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77 
[deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise, Btu/day (kJ/day), is:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.012

    The difference between these two values is:

QHWD = QHW, 77[deg]-F -QHW
or QHWD = QHW,42.8[deg]-F -QHW
which must be added to the adjusted daily water heating energy 
consumption value. Thus, the daily energy consumption value which takes 
into account that the temperature difference between the storage tank 
and ambient temperature may not be 67.5 [deg]F (37.5 [deg]C) and that 
the temperature rise across the storage tank may not be 77 [deg]F (42.8 
[deg]C) is:

Qdm = Qda + QHWD

    6.1.7 Energy Factor. The energy factor, Ef, is computed as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.013
    
or
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.014

Where:

Qdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as 
computed in accordance with section 6.1.6, Btu (kJ).
Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to 6), lb 
(kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw, Btu/lb 
[deg]F (kJ/kg [deg]C).

    6.1.8 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for 
storage-type and heat pump water heaters is computed as:

Eannual = 365 x Qdm

Where:

Qdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as 
computed in accordance with section 6.1.6, Btu (kJ).
365 = the number of days in a year.


[[Page 165]]


    6.2 Instantaneous Water Heaters.
    6.2.1 Maximum GPM (L/min) Rating Computation. Compute the maximum 
gpm (L/min) rating as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.015

which may be expressed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.016


Where:

M10m = the mass of water collected during the 10-minute test, 
lb (kg).
Tdel = the average delivery temperature, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin = the average inlet temperature, [deg]F ([deg]C).
[rho] = the density of water at the average delivery temperature, lb/gal 
(kg/L).

    If a water meter is used the maximum gpm (L/min) rating is computed 
as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.017

Where:

V10m = the volume of water measured during the 10-minute 
test, gal (L).
Tdel = as defined in this section.
Tin = as defined in this section.

    6.2.2 Recovery Efficiency
    6.2.2.1 Fixed Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. The recovery 
efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.018

Where:

M1 = total mass removed during the first draw of the 24-hour 
simulated use test, lb (kg), or, if the volume of water is being 
measured,
M1 = V1. [rho]

Where:

V1 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).
[rho]= density of the water at the water temperature measured at the 
point where the flow volume is measured, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water, 
(Tdel,1 + Tin,1) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/kg 
[deg]C).
Tdel, 1 = average water outlet temperature measured during 
the first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin, 1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the 
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first draw, 
including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps, fans, etc., Btu 
(kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be converted to thermal energy 
using the following conversion: 1 kWh = 3,412 Btu.)
    6.2.2.2 Variable Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. For 
instantaneous water heaters that have a variable firing rate, two 
recovery efficiency values are computed, one at the maximum input rate 
and one at the minimum input rate. The recovery efficiency used in 
subsequent computations is taken as the average of these two values. The 
maximum recovery efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.019

Where:

M1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Cp1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Tdel, 1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Tin, 1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Qr, max = the total energy used by the water heater between 
burner cut-out prior to the first draw and burner cut-out following the 
first draw, including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, Btu (kJ).

    The minimum recovery efficiency is computed as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.020
    
Where:

M4 = the mass withdrawn during the fourth draw, lb (kg), or, 
if the volume of water is being measured,
M4 = V4 [rho]

Where:

V4 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).
[rho] = as defined in 6.2.2.1

[[Page 166]]

Cp4 = the specific heat of water, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/kg 
[deg]C).
Tdel, 4 = the average delivery temperature for the fourth 
draw, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin, 4 = the average inlet temperature for the fourth draw, 
[deg]F ([deg]C).
Qr, min = the total energy consumed between the beginning of 
the fourth draw and burner cut-out following the fourth draw, including 
auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, Btu (kJ).

    The recovery efficiency is computed as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.021
    
Where:

[eta]r,max = as calculated above.
[eta]r,min = as calculated above.

    6.2.3 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water 
heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as:

Qd = Q

Where:

Q = the energy used by the instantaneous water heater during the 24-hr 
simulated use test.

    A modification is needed to take into account that the temperature 
difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water 
temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77 [deg]F (135 
[deg]F-58 [deg]F) or 42.8 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C). The 
following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77 [deg]F 
(42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise.
    The energy used to heat water may be computed as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.022
    
Where:

Mi = the mass withdrawn during the ith draw, lb (kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of water of the ith draw, Btu/lb 
[deg]F (kJ/kg ([deg]C).
Tdel,i = the average delivery temperature of the ith draw, 
[deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin,i = the average inlet temperature of the ith draw, [deg]F 
([deg]C).
[eta]r = as calculated in section 6.2.2.2.

    The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77 
[deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise is:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.023

Where:

Mi = the mass withdrawn during the ith draw, lb (kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of water of the ith draw, Btu/lb 
[deg]F (kJ/kg ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as calculated above.

    The difference between these two values is:

QHWD = QHW, 77 [deg]F - QHW
or QHWD = QHW, 42.8 [deg]C - QHW

which much be added to the daily water heating energy consumption value. 
Thus, the daily energy consumption value which takes into account that 
the temperature rise across the storage tank may not be 77 [deg]F (42.8 
[deg]C) is:

Qdm = Qd + QHWD

    6.2.4 Energy Factor. The energy factor, Ef, is computed 
as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.024

Where:

Qdm = the daily water heating energy consumption as computed 
in accordance with section 6.2.3, Btu (kJ).
Mi = the mass associated with the ith draw, lb (kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of water computed at a temperature of 
(58 [deg]F + 135 [deg]F) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F [(14.4 [deg]C + 57.2 [deg]C) 
/ 2, kJ/kg [deg]C].

    6.2.5 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for 
instantaneous type water heaters is computed as:

Eannual = 365 x Qdm

Where:

Qdm = the modified daily energy consumption, Btu/day (kJ/
day).
365 = the number of days in a year.

                     7. Ratings for Untested Models

    In order to relieve the test burden on manufacturers who offer water 
heaters which differ only in fuel type or power input, ratings for 
untested models may be established in accordance with the following 
procedures. In lieu of the following procedures a manufacturer may elect 
to test the unit for which a rating is sought.
    7.1 Gas Water Heaters. Ratings obtained for gas water heaters using 
natural gas can be used for an identical water heater which utilizes 
propane gas if the input ratings are within  10%.
    7.2 Electric Water Heaters
    7.2.1 First-Hour Rating. If an electric storage-type water heater is 
available with more

[[Page 167]]

than one input rating, the manufacturer shall designate the standard 
input rating, and the water heater need only be tested with heating 
elements at the designated standard input ratings. The first-hour 
ratings for units having power input rating less than the designated 
standard input rating shall be assigned a first-hour rating equivalent 
to the first draw of the first-hour rating for the electric water heater 
with the standard input rating. For units having power inputs greater 
than the designated standard input rating, the first-hour rating shall 
be equivalent to that measured for the water heater with the standard 
input rating.
    7.2.2 Energy Factor. The energy factor for identical electric 
storage-type water heaters, with the exception of heating element 
wattage, may use the energy factor obtained during testing of the water 
heater with the designated standard input rating.

[63 FR 26008, May 11, 1998; 63 FR 38738, July 20, 1998, as amended at 66 
FR 4497, Jan. 17, 2001]

 Appendix F to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
             the Energy Consumption of Room Air Conditioners

    1. Test method. The test method for testing room air conditioners 
shall consist of application of the methods and conditions in American 
National Standard (ANS) Z234.1-1972, ``Room Air Conditioners,'' sections 
4, 5, 6.1, and 6.5, and in American Society of Heating, Refrigerating 
and Air Conditioning in Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 16-69, ``Method of 
Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners.''
    2. Test conditions. Establish the test conditions described in 
sections 4 and 5 of ANS Z234.1-1972 and in accordance with ASHRAE 
Standard 16-69.
    3. Measurements. Measure the quantities delineated in section 5 of 
ANS Z234.1-1972.
    4. Calculations. 4.1 Calculate the cooling capacity (expressed in 
Btu/hr) as required in section 6.1 of ANS Z234.1-1972 and in accordance 
with ASHRAE Standard 16-69.
    4.2 Determine the electrical power input (expressed in watts) as 
required by section 6.5 of ANS Z234.1-1972 and in accordance with ASHRAE 
Standard 16-69.

[42 FR 27898, June 1, 1977. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938, 
June 29, 1979]

 Appendix G to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
        the Energy Consumption of Unvented Home Heating Equipment

                         1. Testing conditions.

    1.1 Installation.
    1.1.1 Electric heater. Install heater according to manufacturer's 
instructions. Heaters shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit 
of nameplate voltage with a wattmeter installed in the circuit. The 
wattmeter shall have a maximum error not greater than one percent.
    1.1.2 Unvented gas heater. Install heater according to 
manufacturer's instructions. Heaters shall be connected to a gas supply 
line with a gas displacement meter installed between the supply line and 
the heater according to manufacturer's specifications. The gas 
displacement meter shall have a maximum error not greater than one 
percent. Gas heaters with electrical auxiliaries shall be connected to 
an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a wattmeter 
installed in the circuit. The wattmeter shall have a maximum error not 
greater than one percent.
    1.1.3 Unvented oil heater. Install heater according to 
manufacturer's instructions. Oil heaters with electric auxiliaries shall 
be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a 
wattmeter installed in the circuit. The wattmeter shall have a maximum 
error not greater than one percent.
    1.2 Temperature regulating controls. All temperature regulating 
controls shall be shorted out of the circuit or adjusted so that they 
will not operate during the test period.
    1.3 Fan controls. All fan controls shall be set at the highest fan 
speed setting.
    1.4 Energy supply.
    1.4.1 Electrical supply. Supply power to the heater within one 
percent of the nameplate voltage.
    1.4.2 Natural gas supply. For an unvented gas heater utilizing 
natural gas, maintain the gas supply to the heater with a normal inlet 
test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7 to 10 inches of 
water column. The regulator outlet pressure at normal supply test 
pressure shall be approximately that recommended by the manufacturer. 
The natural gas supplied should have a higher heating value within 
 5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot. 
Determine the higher heating value, in Btu's per standard cubic foot, 
for the natural gas to be used in the test, with an error no greater 
than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using 
``bottled'' natural gas of a higher heating value within  5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot as 
long as the actual higher heating value of the bottled natural gas has 
been determined with an error no greater than one percent as certified 
by the supplier.
    1.4.3 Propane gas supply. For an unvented gas heater utilizing 
propane, maintain the gas supply to the heater with a normal inlet test 
pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 11 to 13 inches of water 
column. The regulator outlet pressure at normal supply

[[Page 168]]

test pressure shall be that recommended by the manufacturer. The propane 
supplied should have a higher heating value of within 5 percent of 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot. 
Determine the higher heating value in Btu's per standard foot, for the 
propane to be used in the test, with an error no greater than one 
percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using ``bottled'' 
propane of a higher heating value within  5 
percent of 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot as long as the actual 
higher heating value of the bottled propane has been determined with an 
error no greater than one percent as certified by the supplier.
    1.4.4 Oil supply. For an unvented oil heater utilizing kerosene, 
determine the higher heating value in Btu's per gallon with an error no 
greater than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using 
a tested fuel of a higher heating value within  5 
percent of 137,400 Btu's per gallon as long as the actual higher heating 
value of the tested fuel has been determined with an error no greater 
than one percent as certified by the supplier.
    1.5 Energy flow instrumentation. Install one or more energy flow 
instruments which measure, as appropriate and with an error no greater 
than one percent, the quantity of electrical energy, natural gas, 
propane gas, or oil supplied to the heater.

                      2. Testing and measurements.

    2.1 Electric power measurement. Establish the test conditions set 
forth in section 1 of this appendix. Allow an electric heater to warm up 
for at least five minutes before recording the maximum electric power 
measurement from the wattmeter. Record the maximum electric power 
(PE) expressed in kilowatts.
    Allow the auxiliary electrical system of a forced air unvented gas, 
propane, or oil heater to operate for at least five minutes before 
recording the maximum auxiliary electric power measurement from the 
wattmeter. Record the maximum auxiliary electric power (PA) 
expressed in kilowatts.
    2.2 Natural gas, propane, and oil measurement. Establish the test 
conditions as set forth in section 1 of this appendix. A natural gas, 
propane, or oil heater shall be operated for one hour. Using either the 
nameplate rating or the energy flow instrumentation set forth in section 
1.5 of this appendix and the fuel supply rating set forth in sections 
1.4.2, 1.4.3, or 1.4.4 of this appendix, as appropriate, determine the 
maximum fuel input (PF) of the heater under test in Btu's per 
hour. The energy flow instrumentation shall measure the maximum fuel 
input with an error no greater than one percent.

                            3. Calculations.

    3.1 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters. For 
primary electric heaters, calculate the annual energy consumption 
(EE) expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as:

EE=2080(0.77)DHR

where:

2080=national average annual heating load hours
0.77=adjustment factor
DHR=design heating requirement and is equal to PE /1.2 in 
kilowatts.
PE=as defined in 2.1 of this appendix
1.2=typical oversizing factor for primary electric heaters

    3.2 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters by 
geographic region of the United States. For primary electric heaters, 
calculate the annual energy consumption by geographic region of the 
United States (ER) expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and 
defined as:

ER=HLH(0.77) (DHR)

where:

HLH=heating load hours for a specific region determined from Figure 1 of 
this appendix in hours
0.77=as defined in 3.1 of this appendix
DHR=as defined in 3.1 of this appendix

    3.3 Rated output for electric heaters. Calculate the rated output 
(Qout) for electric heaters, expressed in Btu's per hour, and 
defined as:

Qout=PE (3,412 Btu/kWh)

where:

PE=as defined in 2.1 of this appendix

    3.4 Rated output for unvented heaters using either natural gas, 
propane, or oil. For unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, 
or oil equipped without auxiliary electrical systems, the rated output 
(Qout), expressed in Btu's per hour, is equal to 
PF, as determined in section 2.2 of this appendix.
    For unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil 
equipped with auxiliary electrical systems, calculate the rated output 
(Qout), expressed in Btu's per hour, and defined as:

Qout=PF+PA (3,412 Btu/kWh)

where:

PF=as defined in 2.2 of this appendix in Btu/hr
PA=as defined in 2.1 of this appendix in Btu/hr

[[Page 169]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.002


(Energy Policy and Conservation Act, Pub. L. 94-163, as amended by Pub. 
L. 94-385; Federal Energy Administration Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93-275, as 
amended by Pub. L. 94-385; Department of Energy Organization Act, Pub. 
L. 95-91; E.O. 11790, 39 FR 23185)

[43 FR 20132, May 10, 1978. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938, 
June 29, 1979; 49 FR 12157, Mar. 28, 1984]

 Appendix H to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
                the Energy Consumption of Television Sets

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 ``IRE-unit flat field'' means a specific video electrical signal 
which results in a particular level of brightness of the television 
screen as established by the Institute of Radio Engineers.
    1.2 ``Filament keep-warm'' means a feature that provides a voltage 
to keep vacuum tube and/or picture tube filaments warm for the purpose 
of allowing almost instantaneous response to the power control swtich.
    1.3 ``Operating time'' (to) means the hours per year during which 
the television set is operating with power control turned on.
    1.4 ``Remote control'' means an optional feature which allows the 
user to control the television set from more than one location by a hand 
held device.
    1.5 ``Standby power consumption'' (Ps) means the minimum amount of 
energy consumed with the power control switch turned off.
    1.6 ``Standby time'' (ts) means the hours per year during which the 
television set is

[[Page 170]]

connected to a power outlet with the power control switch turned off.
    1.7 ``Vacation switch or master on-off switch'' means an optional 
energy saving feature incorporated into the design of a television set 
that permits the user to disconnect the filament keep-warm circuit(s).
    1.8 ``Remote control defeat switch'' means a switch which permits 
the user to disconnect all standby power to a television set.

                 2. Testing Conditions and Measurements

    2.1 Test equipment and test signals. The following equipment and 
test signals shall be used for testing of television sets.
    2.1.1 Regulated power source capable of supplying 120 volts (1.2 volts) alternating current.
    2.1.2 Signal generator capable of producing radio frequency (RF) 
television test signals, at a convenient very high frequency (VHF) 
channel, modulated with, National Television System Committee composite 
video as follows:
    2.1.2.1 Standard White Pattern, RF signal modulated to 87 percent 
with a 100 IRE-unit flat field.
    2.1.2.2 Standard Black Pattern, all adjustments as for 2.1.2.1 
except modulated with a zero IRE-unit flat field.
    2.1.2.3 The test signals in 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2, supplied by a 
source whose impedance equals the design antenna impedance of the 
television set under test, shall be adjusted to a level of 70 decibels 
(dB) 3dB, referred to a zero dB level of one 
femtowatt (1x10-15 watt) available power. (For a 300 ohm source, 70 dB 
referred to one femtowatt corresponds to an open-circuit voltage of 3.5 
millivolts. For the calculation of ``available power'' use American 
National Standard C.16.13-1961, Method of Testing Monochrome Television 
Broadcast Receivers.)
    2.1.3 Wattmeter capable of measuring the average power consumption 
of the television set under test. The wattmeter shall be accurate to 
within 1 percent of the full scale value. All measurements shall be made 
on the upper half of the scale of the wattmeter.
    2.2 Initial set-up of television set.
    2.2.1 Remove all batteries from television sets designed for both 
battery and alternating current operation. Deactivate all present or 
automatic controls affecting brightness which are customer options. 
Adjust all non-customer controls according to the manufacturer's service 
procedure.
    2.2.2 Apply power to the television set under test from the power 
source specified in 2.1.1 through the wattmeter specified in 2.1.3. 
Adjust the volume control to the lowest possible setting.
    2.2.3 Connect the output of the signal generator as specified in 
2.1.2 to the VHF antenna terminals of the television set. Tune the 
television set to the channel of the RF signal.
    2.3 Measurement of operating power consumption (Po)
    2.3.1 Turn on the television set and allow at least five minutes 
warm-up time. With the synchronization controls adjusted for a stable 
test pattern, apply the standard white pattern specified in 2.1.2.1 to 
the television set. Adjust any customer controls other than the volume 
or synchronization controls for maximum power consumption as indicated 
by the wattmeter specified in 2.1.3. Illuminate any room illuminance 
sensor which has not been deactivated, to produce maximum power 
consumption. Record the white pattern consumption (Pw) as indicated by 
the wattmeter in watts.
    2.3.2 Change the signal source to the standard black pattern 
specified in 2.1.2.2. Adjust any customer controls, other than the 
volume or synchronization controls, for the minimum power consumption as 
indicated by the wattmeter. Cover any room illuminance sensor which has 
not been deactivated. Record the black pattern power consumption (Pb) as 
indicated by the wattmeter in watts.
    2.3.3 Compute the operating power consumption (po) as follows:

Po=(Pw+Pb/2)

where

Po=operating power consumption in watts
Pw=as determined from 2.3.1
Pb=as determined from 2.3.2

    2.2 Measurements of standby power consumption (Ps)
    2.4.1 For television sets without either a vacation switch or a 
remote control defeat switch, turn the power switch off and after two 
minutes measure the standby power consumption (P).
    2.4.2 For a television set equipped with a remote control defeat 
switch, a vacation switch or both, turn the power switch, any vacation 
switch, and any remote er consumptions, (Pmax).The standby power is then 
calculated from the equation:

Ps=[(Pmax-Pmin)/2]+Pmin

where

Ps=standby power consumption in watts
Pmax=power consumption, in watts, measured with the 
television set power switch off and the vacation switch and remote 
control defeat switch in the highest energy consuming position.
Pmin=power consumption, in watts, measured with the 
television set power switch off and the vacation switch and remote 
control defeat switch in the lowest energy consuming position.

    3.0 Average Annual Energy Consumption

E=(Poto/1,000)+(Psts/1,000)=2.2Po+6.56Ps

where


[[Page 171]]


E=total average energy consumed by the television set (kilowatt-hour per 
year)
Po=operating power consumption as computed in 2.3.3
to=operating time, 2,200 h/yr
Ps=standby power consumption computed in 2.4
ts=standby time, 6,560 h/yr

[42 FR 46154, Sept. 14, 1977. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938, 
June 29, 1979]

 Appendix I to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
  the Energy Consumption of Conventional Ranges, Conventional Cooking 
              Tops, Conventional Ovens, and Microwave Ovens

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 Built-in means the product is supported by surrounding 
cabinetry, walls, or other similar structures.
    1.2 Drop-in means the product is supported by horizontal surface 
cabinetry.
    1.3 Forced convection means a mode of conventional oven operation in 
which a fan is used to circulate the heated air within the oven 
compartment during cooking.
    1.4 Freestanding means the product is not supported by surrounding 
cabinetry, walls, or other similar structures.
    1.5 IEC 705 refers to the test standard published by the 
International Electrotechnical Commission, entitled ``Method for 
Measuring the Performance of Microwave Ovens for Household and Similar 
Purposes,'' Publication 705-1988 and Amendment 2--1993. (See 10 CFR 
430.22)
    1.6 Normal nonoperating temperature means the temperature of all 
areas of an appliance to be tested are within 5 [deg]F (2.8 [deg]C) of 
the temperature that the identical areas of the same basic model of the 
appliance would attain if it remained in the test room for 24 hours 
while not operating with all oven doors closed and with any gas pilot 
lights on and adjusted in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
    1.7 Primary energy consumption means either the electrical energy 
consumption of a conventional electric oven or the gas energy 
consumption of a conventional gas oven.
    1.8 Secondary energy consumption means any electrical energy 
consumption, other than clock energy consumption, of a conventional gas 
oven.
    1.9 Standard cubic foot (L) of gas means that quantity of gas that 
occupies 1 cubic foot (L) when saturated with water vapor at a 
temperature of 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C) and a pressure of 30 inches of 
mercury (101.6 kPa) (density of mercury equals 13.595 grams per cubic 
centimeter).
    1.10 Thermocouple means a device consisting of two dissimilar metals 
which are joined together and, with their associated wires, are used to 
measure temperature by means of electromotive force.
    1.11 Symbol Usage. The following identity relationships are provided 
to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure.

A--Number of Hours in a Year
B--Number of Hours Pilot Light Contributes to Cooking
C--Specific Heat
E--Energy Consumed
Eff--Cooking Efficiency
H--Heating Value of Gas
K--Conversion for Watt-hours to Kilowatt hours
Ke--3.412 Btu/Wh, Conversion for Watt-hours to Btu's
M--Mass
n--Number of Units
O--Annual Useful Cooking Energy Output
P--Power
Q--Gas Flow Rate
R--Energy Factor, Ratio of useful Cooking Energy Output to Total Energy 
Input
S--Number of Self Cleaning Operations per Year
T--Temperature
t--Time
V--Volume of Gas Consumed
W--Weight of Test Block

                           2. Test Conditions

    2.1 Installation. A free standing kitchen range shall be installed 
with the back directly against, or as near as possible to, a vertical 
wall which extends at least 1 foot above and on either side of the 
appliance. There shall be no side walls. A drop-in, built-in or wall-
mounted appliance shall be installed in an enclosure in accordance with 
the manufacturer's instructions. These appliances are to be completely 
assembled with all handles, knobs, guards and the like mounted in place. 
Any electric resistance heaters, gas burners, baking racks, and baffles 
shall be in place in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions; 
however, broiler pans are to be removed from the oven's baking 
compartment. Disconnect any electrical clock which uses energy 
continuously, except for those that are an integral part of the timing 
or temperature controlling circuit of the oven, cooktop, or microwave 
oven. Do not disconnect or modify the circuit to any other electrical 
devices or features.
    2.1.1 Conventional electric ranges, ovens, and cooking tops. These 
products shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit with voltage 
as specified in Section 2.2.1 with a watt-hour meter installed in the 
circuit. The watt-hour meter shall be as described in Section 2.9.1.1.

[[Page 172]]

    2.1.2 Conventional gas ranges, ovens, and cooking tops. These 
products shall be connected to a gas supply line with a gas meter 
installed between the supply line and the appliance being tested, 
according to manufacturer's specifications. The gas meter shall be as 
described in Section 2.9.2. Conventional gas ranges, ovens and cooking 
tops with electrical ignition devices or other electrical components 
shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage 
with a watt-hour meter installed in the circuit. The watt-hour meter 
shall be as described in Section 2.9.1.1.
    2.1.3 Microwave ovens. Install the microwave oven in accordance with 
the manufacturer's instructions and connect to an electrical supply 
circuit with voltage as specified in Section 2.2.1. A watt-hour meter 
and watt meter shall be installed in the circuit and shall be as 
described in Section 2.9.1.1 and 2.9.1.2. If trial runs are needed to 
set the ``on'' time for the test, the test measurements are to be 
separated according to Section 4, Paragraph 12.6 of IEC 705 Amendment 2. 
(See 10 CFR 430.22)
    2.2 Energy supply.
    2.2.1 Electrical supply. Maintain the electrical supply to the 
conventional range, conventional cooking top, and conventional oven 
being tested at 240/120 volts except that basic models rated only at 
208/120 volts shall be tested at that rating. Maintain the voltage 
within 2 percent of the above specified voltages. For the microwave oven 
testing, however, maintain the electrical supply to a microwave oven at 
120 volts 1 volt and at 60 hertz.
    2.2.2 Gas supply.
    2.2.2.1 Gas burner adjustments. Conventional gas ranges, ovens, and 
cooking tops shall be tested with all of the gas burners adjusted in 
accordance with the installation or operation instructions provided by 
the manufacturer. In every case, the burner must be adjusted with 
sufficient air flow to prevent a yellow flame or a flame with yellow 
tips.
    2.2.2.2 Natural gas. For testing convertible cooking appliances or 
appliances which are designed to operate using only natural gas, 
maintain the natural gas pressure immediately ahead of all controls of 
the unit under test at 7 to 10 inches of water column (1743.6 to 2490.8 
Pa). The regulator outlet pressure shall equal the manufacturer's 
recommendation. The natural gas supplied should have a heating value of 
approximately 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot (38.2 kJ/L). The 
actual gross heating value, Hn, in Btu's per standard cubic 
foot (kJ/L), for the natural gas to be used in the test shall be 
obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting 
the test using equipment that meets the requirements described in 
Section 2.9.4 or by the use of bottled natural gas whose gross heating 
value is certified to be at least as accurate a value that meets the 
requirements in Section 2.9.4.
    2.2.2.3 Propane. For testing convertible cooking appliances with 
propane or for testing appliances which are designed to operate using 
only LP-gas, maintain the propane pressure immediately ahead of all 
controls of the unit under test at 11 to 13 inches of water column (2740 
to 3238 Pa). The regulator outlet pressure shall equal the 
manufacturer's recommendation. The propane supplied should have a 
heating value of approximately 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot (93.2 
kJ/L). The actual gross heating value, Hp, in Btu's per 
standard cubic foot (kJ/L), for the propane to be used in the test shall 
be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting 
the test using equipment that meets the requirements described in 
Section 2.9.4 or by the use of bottled propane whose gross heating value 
is certified to be at least as accurate a value that meets the 
requirements described in Section 2.9.4.
    2.2.2.4 Test gas. A basic model of a convertible cooking appliance 
shall be tested with natural gas, but may also be tested with propane. 
Any basic model of a conventional range, conventional cooking top, or 
conventional oven which is designed to operate using only natural gas as 
the energy source must be tested with natural gas. Any basic model of a 
conventional range, conventional cooking top, or conventional oven which 
is designed to operate using only LP gas as the gas energy source must 
be tested with propane gas.
    2.3 Air circulation. Maintain air circulation in the room sufficient 
to secure a reasonably uniform temperature distribution, but do not 
cause a direct draft on the unit under test.
    2.4 Setting the conventional oven thermostat.
    2.4.1 Conventional electric oven. Install a thermocouple 
approximately in the center of the usable baking space. Provide a 
temperature indicator system for measuring the oven's temperature with 
an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.3.2. If the oven thermostat does 
not cycle on and off, adjust or determine the conventional electric oven 
thermostat setting to provide an average internal temperature which is 
325[deg]5 [deg]F (180.6[deg] 2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air 
temperature. If the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, 
adjust or determine the conventional electric oven thermostat setting to 
provide an average internal temperature which is 325[deg] 5 [deg]F (180.6[deg]2.8 [deg]C) 
higher than the room ambient air temperature. This shall be done by 
measuring the maximum and minimum temperatures in any three consecutive 
cut-off/cut-on actions of the electric resistance heaters, excluding the 
initial cut-off/cut-on action, by the thermostat after the temperature 
rise of 325[deg]5 [deg]F

[[Page 173]]

(180.6[deg] 2.8 [deg]C) has been attained by the 
conventional electric oven. Remove the thermocouple after the thermostat 
has been set.
    2.4.2 Conventional gas oven. Install five parallel-connected 
weighted thermocouples, one located at the center of the conventional 
gas oven's usable baking space and the other four equally spaced between 
the center and the corners of the conventional gas oven on the diagonals 
of a horizontal plane through the center of the conventional gas oven. 
Each weighted thermocouple shall be constructed of a copper disc that is 
1-inch (25.4 mm) in diameter and \1/8\-inch (3.2 mm) thick. The two 
thermocouple wires shall be located in two holes in the disc spaced \1/
2\-inch (12.7 mm) apart, with each hole being located \1/4\-inch (6.4 
mm) from the center of the disc. Both thermocouple wires shall be 
silver-soldered to the copper disc. Provide a temperature indicator 
system for measuring the oven's temperature with an accuracy as 
indicated in Section 2.9.3.2. If the oven thermostat does not cycle on 
or off, adjust or determine the conventional gas oven thermostat setting 
to provide an average internal temperature which is 325 [deg]5 [deg]F (180.6 [deg]2.8 [deg]C) 
higher than the room ambient air temperature. If the oven thermostat 
operates by cycling on and off, adjust or determine the conventional gas 
oven thermostat setting to provide an average internal temperature which 
is 325[deg]5 [deg]F (180.62.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air 
temperature. This shall be done by measuring the maximum and minimum 
temperatures in any three consecutive cut-off/cut-on actions of the gas 
burners, excluding the initial cut-off/cut-on action, by the thermostat 
after the temperature rise of 325[deg]5 [deg]F 
(180.6 [deg]2.8 [deg]C) has been attained by the 
conventional gas oven. Remove the thermocouples after the thermostat has 
been set.
    2.5 Ambient room air temperature. During the test, maintain an 
ambient room air temperature, TR, of 77[deg]9 [deg]F (25[deg]5 [deg]C) for 
conventional ovens and cooking tops, or as indicated in Section 4, 
Paragraph 12.4 of IEC 705 Amendment 2 for microwave ovens, as measured 
at least 5 feet (1.5 m) and not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) from the 
nearest surface of the unit under test and approximately 3 feet (0.9 m) 
above the floor. The temperature shall be measured with a thermometer or 
temperature indicating system with an accuracy as specified in Section 
2.9.3.1.
    2.6  Normal nonoperating temperature. All areas of the appliance to 
be tested shall attain the normal nonoperating temperature, as defined 
in Section 1.6, before any testing begins. The equipment for measuring 
the applicable normal nonoperating temperature shall be as described in 
Sections 2.9.3.1, 2.9.3.2, 2.9.3.3, 2.9.3.4, and 2.9.3.5, as applicable.
    2.7 Test blocks for conventional oven and cooking top. The test 
blocks shall be made of aluminum alloy No. 6061, with a specific heat of 
0.23 Btu/lb- [deg]F (0.96 kJ/[kg / [deg]C]) and with any temper that 
will give a czoefficient of thermal conductivity of 1073.3 to 1189.1 
Btu-in/h-ft\2\- [deg]F (154.8 to 171.5 W/[m / [deg]C]). Each block shall 
have a hole at its top. The hole shall be 0.08 inch (2.03 mm) in 
diameter and 0.80 inch (20.3 mm) deep. The manufacturer conducting the 
test may provide other means which will ensure that the thermocouple 
junction is installed at this same position and depth.
    The bottom of each block shall be flat to within 0.002 inch (0.051 
mm) TIR (total indicator reading). Determine the actual weight of each 
test block with a scale with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.5.
    2.7.1 Conventional oven test block. The test block for the 
conventional oven, W1, shall be 6.250.05 inches (158.81.3 mm) in 
diameter, approximately 2.8 inches (71 mm) high and shall weigh 
8.50.1 lbs (3.860.05 kg). 
The block shall be finished with an anodic black coating which has a 
minimum thickness of 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) or with a finish having the 
equivalent absorptivity.
    2.7.2 Small test block for conventional cooking top. The small test 
block, W2, shall be 6.250.05 inches 
(158.81.3 mm) in diameter, approximately 2.8 
inches (71 mm) high and shall weigh 8.50.1 lbs 
(3.860.05 kg).
    2.7.3 Large test block for conventional cooking top. The large test 
block for the conventional cooking top, W3, shall be 90.05 inches (228.61.3 mm) in 
diameter, approximately 3.0 inches (76 mm) high and shall weigh 190.1 lbs (8.620.05 kg).
    2.7.4 Thermocouple installation. Install the thermocouple such that 
the thermocouple junction (where the thermocouple contacts the test 
block) is at the bottom of the hole provided in the test block and that 
the thermocouple junction makes good thermal contact with the aluminum 
block. If the test blocks are to be water cooled between tests the 
thermocouple hole should be sealed, or other steps taken, to insure that 
the thermocouple hole is completely dry at the start of the next test. 
Provide a temperature indicator system for measuring the test block 
temperature with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.3.3.
    2.7.5 Initial test block temperature. Maintain the initial 
temperature of the test blocks, TI, within 4 [deg]F (2.2 [deg]C) of the 
ambient room air temperature as specified in Section 2.5. If the test 
block has been cooled (or heated) to bring it to room temperature, allow 
the block to stabilize for at least 2 minutes after removal from the 
cooling (or heating) source, before measuring its initial temperature.
    2.8 Microwave oven test load.
    2.8.1 Test container. The test container shall be as specified in 
Section 4, Paragraph 12.2 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.

[[Page 174]]

    2.8.2 Test water load. The test water load shall be as specified in 
Section 4, Paragraph 12.1 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.
    2.8.2.1 Test water load and test container temperature. Before the 
start of the test, the oven and the test container shall be at ambient 
temperature as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 12.4 of IEC 705 
Amendment 2. The test water load shall be contained in a chiller (not 
the test container) and maintained at 18[deg]  1.8 
[deg]F (10[deg]  1 [deg]C) below the ambient room 
temperature.
    2.9 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the 
following instruments, as appropriate:
    2.9.1 Electrical Measurements.
    2.9.1.1 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter for measuring the 
electrical energy consumption of conventional ovens and cooking tops 
shall have a resolution of 1 watt-hour (3.6 kJ) or less and a maximum 
error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured value for any demand 
greater than 100 watts. The watt-hour meter for measuring the energy 
consumption of microwave ovens shall have a resolution of 0.1 watt-hour 
(0.36 kJ) or less and a maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the 
measured value.
    2.9.1.2 Watt meter. The watt meter used to measure the conventional 
oven, conventional range, range clock power or the power input of the 
microwave oven shall have a resolution of 0.2 watt (0.2 J/s) or less and 
a maximum error no greater than 5 percent of the measured value.
    2.9.2 Gas Measurements.
    2.9.2.1 Positive displacement meters. The gas meter to be used for 
measuring the gas consumed by the gas burners of the oven or cooking top 
shall have a resolution of 0.01 cubic foot (0.28 L) or less and a 
maximum error no greater than 1 percent of the measured value for any 
demand greater than 2.2 cubic feet per hour (62.3 L/h). If a positive 
displacement gas meter is used for measuring the gas consumed by the 
pilot lights, it shall have a resolution of at least 0.01 cubic foot 
(0.28 L) or less and have a maximum error no greater than 2 percent of 
the measured value.
    2.9.2.2 Flow meter. If a gas flow meter is used for measuring the 
gas consumed by the pilot lights, it shall be calibrated to have a 
maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured value and a 
resolution of 1 percent or less of the measured value.
    2.9.3 Temperature measurement equipment.
    2.9.3.1 Room temperature indicating system. The room temperature 
indicating system shall be as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 12.3 of 
IEC 705 Amendment 2 for microwave ovens and Section 2.9.3.5 for ranges, 
ovens and cooktops.
    2.9.3.2 Temperature indicator system for measuring conventional oven 
temperature. The equipment for measuring the conventional oven 
temperature shall have an error no greater than 4 
[deg]F (2.2 [deg]C) over the range of 65[deg] to 
500 [deg]F (18 [deg]C to 260 [deg]C).
    2.9.3.3 Temperature indicator system for measuring test block 
temperature. The system shall have an error no greater than 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) when 
measuring specific temperatures over the range of 65[deg] to 330 [deg]F 
(18.3 [deg]C to 165.6 [deg]C). It shall also have an error no greater 
than 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) 
when measuring any temperature difference up to 240 [deg]F (133.3 
[deg]C) within the above range.
    2.9.3.4 Test load temperatures. The thermometer or other temperature 
measuring instrument used to measure the test water load temperature 
shall be as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 12.3 of IEC 705 Amendment 
2. Use only one thermometer or other temperature measuring device 
throughout the entire test procedure.
    2.9.3.5 Temperature indicator system for measuring surface 
temperatures. The temperature of any surface of an appliance shall be 
measured by means of a thermocouple in firm contact with the surface. 
The temperature indicating system shall have an error no greater than 
1 [deg]F (0.6[deg]C) over 
the range 65[deg] to 90 [deg]F (18 [deg]C to 32 [deg]C).
    2.9.4 Heating Value. The heating value of the natural gas or propane 
shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that 
has a maximum error no greater than 0.5% of the 
measured value and a resolution of 0.2% or less of 
the full scale reading of the indicator instrument. The heating value of 
natural gas or propane must be corrected for local temperature and 
pressure conditions.
    2.9.5 Scale. The scale used for weighing the test blocks shall have 
a maximum error no greater than 1 ounce (28.4 g). The scale used for 
weighing the microwave oven test water load shall be as specified in 
Section 4, paragraph 12.3 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.

                    3. Test Methods and Measurements

    3.1 Test methods.
    3.1.1 Conventional oven. Perform a test by establishing the testing 
conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this 
Appendix, and adjust any pilot lights of a conventional gas oven in 
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and turn off the gas 
flow to the conventional cooking top, if so equipped. Before beginning 
the test, the conventional oven shall be at its normal nonoperating 
temperature as defined in Section 1.6 and described in Section 2.6. Set 
the conventional oven test block W1 approximately in the 
center of the usable baking space. If there is a selector switch for 
selecting the mode of operation of the oven, set it for normal baking. 
If an oven permits baking by either forced convection by using a fan, or 
without forced convection, the oven is to be tested in each of those two 
modes. The oven shall remain on for at least one complete

[[Page 175]]

thermostat ``cut-off/cut-on'' of the electrical resistance heaters or 
gas burners after the test block temperature has increased 234 [deg]F 
(130 [deg]C) above its initial temperature.
    3.1.1.1 Self-cleaning operation of a conventional oven. Establish 
the test conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this 
Appendix. Adjust any pilot lights of a conventional gas oven in 
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and turn off the gas 
flow to the conventional cooking top. The temperature of the 
conventional oven shall be its normal nonoperating temperature as 
defined in Section 1.6 and described in Section 2.6. Then set the 
conventional oven's self-cleaning process in accordance with the 
manufacturer's instructions. If the self-cleaning process is adjustable, 
use the average time recommended by the manufacturer for a moderately 
soiled oven.
    3.1.1.2 Continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional gas 
oven. Establish the test conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST 
CONDITIONS,'' of this Appendix. Adjust any pilot lights of a 
conventional gas oven in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 
and turn off the gas flow to the conventional cooking top. If a positive 
displacement gas meter is used the, test duration shall be sufficient to 
measure a gas consumption which is at least 200 times the resolution of 
the gas meter.
    3.1.2 Conventional cooking top. Establish the test conditions set 
forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this Appendix. Adjust any 
pilot lights of a conventional gas cooking top in accordance with the 
manufacturer's instructions and turn off the gas flow to the 
conventional oven(s), if so equipped. The temperature of the 
conventional cooking top shall be its normal nonoperating temperature as 
defined in Section 1.6 and described in Section 2.6. Set the test block 
in the center of the surface unit under test. The small test block, 
W2, shall be used on electric surface units of 7 inches (178 
mm) or less in diameter. The large test block, W3, shall be 
used on electric surface units over 7 inches (177.8 mm) in diameter and 
on all gas surface units. Turn on the surface unit under test and set 
its energy input rate to the maximum setting. When the test block 
reaches 144 [deg]F (80 [deg]C) above its initial test block temperature, 
immediately reduce the energy input rate to 255 
percent of the maximum energy input rate. After 150.1 minutes at the reduced energy setting, turn off the 
surface unit under test.
    3.1.2.1 Continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional gas 
cooking top. Establish the test conditions set forth in Section 2, 
``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this Appendix. Adjust any pilot lights of a 
conventional gas cooking top in accordance with the manufacturer's 
instructions and turn off the gas flow to the conventional oven(s). If a 
positive displacement gas meter is used, the test duration shall be 
sufficient to measure a gas consumption which is at least 200 times the 
resolution of the gas meter.
    3.1.3 Microwave oven.
    3.1.3.1 Microwave oven test energy or power output. Establish the 
testing conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this 
Appendix. Follow the test procedure as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 
12.4 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.
    3.2 Test measurements.
    3.2.1 Conventional oven test energy consumption. If the oven 
thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off, 
measure the energy consumed, EO, when the temperature of the 
block reaches TO (TO is 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) 
above the initial block temperature, TI). If the oven 
thermostat operates by cycling on and off, make the following series of 
measurements: Measure the block temperature, TA, and the 
energy consumed, EA, or volume of gas consumed, 
VA, at the end of the last ``ON'' period of the conventional 
oven before the block reaches TO. Measure the block 
temperature, TB, and the energy consumed, EB, or 
volume of gas consumed, VB, at the beginning of the next 
``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, TC, and the 
energy consumed, EC, or volume of gas consumed, 
VC, at the end of that ``ON'' period. Measure the block 
temperature, TD, and the energy consumed, ED, or 
volume of gas consumed, VD, at the beginning of the following 
``ON'' period. Energy measurements for EO, EA, 
EB, EC and ED, should be expressed in 
watt-hours (kJ) for conventional electric ovens and volume measurements 
for VA, VB, VC and VD should 
be expressed in standard cubic feet (L) of gas for conventional gas 
ovens. For a gas oven, measure in watt-hours (kJ) any electrical energy, 
EIO, consumed by an ignition device or other electrical 
components required for the operation of a conventional gas oven while 
heating the test block to TO. The energy consumed by a 
continuously operating clock that is an integral part of the timing or 
temperature control circuit and cannot be disconnected during the test 
may be subtracted from the oven test energy to obtain the test energy 
consumption, EO or EIO.
    3.2.1.1 Conventional oven average test energy consumption. If the 
conventional oven permits baking by either forced convection or without 
forced convection and the oven thermostat does not cycle on and off, 
measure the energy consumed with the forced convection mode, 
(EO)1, and without the forced convection mode, 
(EO)2, when the temperature of the block reaches 
TO (TO is 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) above the 
initial block temperature, TI). If the conventional oven 
permits baking by either forced convection or without forced convection 
and the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, make the 
following series of measurements with and without the forced convection 
mode: Measure the block

[[Page 176]]

temperature, TA, and the energy consumed, EA, or 
volume of gas consumed, VA, at the end of the last ``ON'' 
period of the conventional oven before the block reaches TO. 
Measure the block temperature, TB, and the energy consumed, 
EB, or volume of gas consumed, VB, at the 
beginning of the next ``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, 
TC, and the energy consumed, EC, or volume of gas 
consumed, VC, at the end of that ``ON'' period. Measure the 
block temperature, TD, and the energy consumed, 
ED, or volume of gas consumed, VD, at the 
beginning of the following ``ON'' period. Energy measurements for 
EO, EA, EB, EC and 
ED should be expressed in watt-hours (kJ) for conventional 
electric ovens and volume measurements for VA, VB, 
VC and VD should be expressed in standard cubic 
feet (L) of gas for conventional gas ovens. For a gas oven that can be 
operated with or without forced convection, measure in watt-hours (kJ) 
any electrical energy consumed by an ignition device or other electrical 
components required for the operation of a conventional gas oven while 
heating the test block to TO using the forced convection 
mode, (EIO)1, and without using the forced 
convection mode, (EIO)2. The energy consumed by a 
continuously operating clock that is an integral part of the timing or 
temperature control circuit and cannot be disconnected during the test 
may be subtracted from the oven test energy to obtain the test energy 
consumption, (EO)1 and (EO)2 
or (EIO)1 and (EIO)2.
    3.2.1.2 Energy consumption of self-cleaning operation. Measure the 
energy consumption, ES, in watt-hours (kJ) of electricity or 
the volume of gas consumption, VS, in standard cubic feet (L) 
during the self-cleaning test set forth in Section 3.1.1.1. For a gas 
oven, also measure in watt-hours (kJ) any electrical energy, 
EIS, consumed by ignition devices or other electrical 
components required during the self-cleaning test. The energy consumed 
by a continuously operating clock that is an integral part of the timing 
or temperature control circuit and cannot be disconnected during the 
test may be subtracted from the self-cleaning test energy to obtain the 
energy consumption, ES or EIS
    3.2.1.3 Gas consumption of continuously burning pilot lights. 
Measure the gas consumption of the pilot lights, VOP, in 
standard cubic feet (L) of gas and the test duration, tOP, in 
hours for the test set forth in Section 3.1.1.2. If a gas flow rate 
meter is used, measure the flow rate, QOP, in standard cubic 
feet per hour (L/h).
    3.2.1.4 Clock power. If the conventional oven or conventional range 
includes an electric clock which is on continuously, and the power 
rating in watts (J/s) of this feature is not known, measure the clock 
power, PCL, in watts (J/s.) The power rating or measurement 
of continuously operating clocks, that are an integral part of the 
timing or temperature control circuits and cannot be disconnected during 
testing, shall be multiplied by the applicable test period to calculate 
the clock energy consumption, in watt-hours (kJ), during a test. The 
energy consumed by the clock during the test may then be subtracted from 
the test energy to obtain the specified test energy consumption value.
    3.2.2 Conventional surface unit test energy consumption. For the 
surface unit under test, measure the energy consumption, ECT, 
in watt-hours (kJ) of electricity or the volume of gas consumption, 
VCT, in standard cubic feet (L) of gas and the test block 
temperature, TCT, at the end of the 15 minute (reduced input 
setting) test interval for the test specified in Section 3.1.2 and the 
total time, tCT, in hours, that the unit is under test. 
Measure any electrical energy, EIC, consumed by an ignition 
device of a gas heating element in watt-hours (kJ). The energy consumed 
by a continuously operating clock that is an integral part of the timing 
or temperature control circuit and cannot be disconnected during the 
test may be subtracted from the cooktop test energy to obtain the test 
energy consumption, ECT or EIC.
    3.2.2.1 Gas consumption of continuously burning pilot lights. If the 
conventional gas cooking top under test has one or more continuously 
burning pilot lights, measure the gas consumed during the test by the 
pilot lights, VCP, in standard cubic feet (L) of gas, and the 
test duration, tCP, in hours as specified in Section 3.1.2.1. 
If a gas flow rate meter is used, measure the flow rate, QCP, 
in standard cubic feet per hour (L/h).
    3.2.3 Microwave oven test energy consumption and power input. 
Measurements are to be made as specified in Section 4, Paragraphs 12.4 
and 13 of IEC 705 and Amendment 2. Measure the electrical input energy, 
EM, in watt-hours (kJ) consumed by the microwave oven during 
the test. Repeat the tests three times unless the power output value 
resulting from the second measurement is within 1.5% of the value 
obtained from the first measurement as stated in Section 4, Paragraphs 
12.6 of IEC 705 Amendment 2. (See 10 CFR 430.22.)
    3.3 Recorded values.
    3.3.1 Record the test room temperature, TR, at the start 
and end of each range, oven or cooktop test, as determined in Section 
2.5.
    3.3.2 Record measured test block weights W1, 
W2, and W3 in pounds (kg).
    3.3.3 Record the initial temperature, T1, of the test 
block under test.
    3.3.4 For a conventional oven with a thermostat which operates by 
cycling on and off, record the conventional oven test measurements 
TA, EA, TB, EB, 
TC, EC, TD, and ED for 
conventional electric ovens or TA, VA, 
TB, VB, TC, VC, 
TD, and VD for conventional gas ovens. If the 
thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off, 
record EO. For a gas oven which also uses

[[Page 177]]

electrical energy for the ignition or operation of the oven, also record 
EIO.
    3.3.5 For a conventional oven that can be operated with or without 
forced convection and the oven thermostat controls the oven temperature 
without cycling on and off, measure the energy consumed with the forced 
convection mode, (EO)1, and without the forced 
convection mode, (EO)2. If the conventional oven 
operates with or without forced convection and the thermostat controls 
the oven temperature by cycling on and off, record the conventional oven 
test measurements TA, EA, TB, 
EB, TC, EC, TD, and 
ED for conventional electric ovens or TA, 
VA, TB, VB, TC, 
VC, TD, and VD for conventional gas 
ovens. For a gas oven that can be operated with or without forced 
convection, measure any electrical energy consumed by an ignition device 
or other electrical components used during the forced convection mode, 
(EIO)1, and without using the forced convection 
mode, (EIO)2.
    3.3.6 Record the measured energy consumption, ES, or gas 
consumption, VS, and for a gas oven, any electrical energy, 
EIS, for the test of the self-cleaning operation of a 
conventional oven.
    3.3.7 Record the gas flow rate, QOP; or the gas 
consumption, VOP, and the elapsed time, tOP, that 
any continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional oven are under 
test.
    3.3.8 Record the clock power measurement or rating, PCL, 
in watts (J/s), except for microwave oven tests.
    3.3.9 For the surface unit under test, record the electric energy 
consumption, ECT, or the gas volume consumption, 
VCT, the final test block temperature, TCT, the 
total test time, tCT. For a gas cooking top which uses 
electrical energy for ignition of the burners, also record 
EIC.
    3.3.10 Record the gas flow rate, QCP; or the gas 
consumption, VCP, and the elapsed time, tCP, that 
any continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional gas cooking top 
are under test.
    3.3.11 Record the heating value, Hn, as determined in 
Section 2.2.2.2 for the natural gas supply.
    3.3.12 Record the heating value, Hp, as determined in 
Section 2.2.2.3 for the propane supply.
    3.3.13 Record the electrical input energy and power input, 
EM and PM, for the microwave oven test; the 
initial and final temperature, T1 and T2, of the 
test water load; the mass of the test container before filling with the 
test water load and the mass of the test water load, MC and 
MW respectively; and the measured room temperature, 
T0; as determined in Section 3.2.3.

        4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements

    4.1 Conventional oven.
    4.1.1 Test energy consumption. For a conventional oven with a 
thermostat which operates by cycling on and off, calculate the test 
energy consumption, EO, expressed in watt-hours (kJ) for 
electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens, and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.000

for electric ovens, and,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.001


[[Page 178]]


For gas ovens

Where:

H = either Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas 
used in the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3, 
expressed in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L).
TO = 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) plus the initial test block 
temperature.

and,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.002

Where:

TA = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the end of the 
last ``ON'' period of the conventional oven before the test block 
reaches TO.
TB = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the beginning of 
the ``ON'' period following the measurement of TA.
TC = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the end of the 
``ON'' period which starts with TB.
TD = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the beginning of 
the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of TC.
EA = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the end of the 
last ``ON'' period before the test block reaches TO.
EB = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the beginning of 
the ``ON'' period following the measurement of TA.
EC = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the end of the 
``ON'' period which starts with TB.
ED = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the beginning of 
the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of TC.
VA = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the 
end of the last ``ON'' period before the test block reaches 
TO.
VB = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the 
beginning of the ``ON'' period following the measurement of 
TA.
VC = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the 
end of the ``ON'' period which starts with TB.
VD = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the 
beginning of the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of 
TC.

    The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be 
disconnected during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy 
to obtain the oven test energy consumption, EO.
    4.1.1.1 Average test energy consumption. If the conventional oven 
can be operated with or without forced convection, determine the average 
test energy consumption, EO and EIO, in watt-hours 
(kJ) for electric ovens and Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens using the following 
equations:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.003

Where:

(EO)1=test energy consumption using the forced 
convection mode in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) 
for gas ovens as measured in Section 3.2.1.1.
(EO)2=test energy consumption without using the 
forced convection mode in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens and in 
Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens as measured in Section 3.2.1.1.
(EIO)1=electrical energy consumption in watt-hours 
(kJ) of a gas oven in forced convection mode as measured in Section 
3.2.1.1. (EIO)2=electrical energy consumption in 
watt-hours (kJ) of a gas oven without using the forced convection mode 
as measured in Section 3.2.1.1.

    The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be 
disconnected during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy 
to obtain the average test energy consumption EO and 
EIO.
    4.1.2 Conventional oven annual energy consumption.
    4.1.2.1. Annual cooking energy consumption.
    4.1.2.1.1. Annual primary energy consumption. Calculate the annual 
primary energy consumption for cooking, ECO, expressed in 
kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year for electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) per 
year for gas ovens, and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.004

Where:

E O=test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1 or 
as calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.
K e=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh,) conversion factor of watt-hours 
to Btu's.
O O=29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output of conventional electric oven.
W 1=measured weight of test block in pounds (kg).
C p=0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg / [deg]C), specific heat 
of test block.
T S=234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C), temperature rise of test block.

[[Page 179]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.005

Where:

EO=test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1. or 
as calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.
OO=88.8 kBtu (93,684 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output of conventional gas oven.
W1, Cp and TS are the same as defined 
above.

    4.1.2.1.2 Annual secondary energy consumption for cooking of gas 
ovens. Calculate the annual secondary energy consumption for cooking, 
ESO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined 
as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.006

Where:

EIO=electrical test energy consumption as measured in Section 
3.2.1 or as calculated in Section 4.1.1.1.
OO=29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output.
Ke, W1, Cp, and TS are as 
defined in Section 4.1.2.1.1.

    4.1.2.2 Annual energy consumption of any continuously burning pilot 
lights. Calculate the annual energy consumption of any continuously 
burning pilot lights, EPO, expressed in Btu's (kJ) per year 
and defined as:

EPO=QOPxHx(A-B),

or,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.007

Where:

QOP=pilot gas flow rate in standard cubic feet per hour (L/
h), as measured in Section 3.2.1.3.
VOP=standard cubic feet (L) of gas consumed by any 
continuously burning pilot lights, as measured in Section 3.2.1.3.
tOP=elapsed test time in hours for any continuously burning 
pilot lights tested, as measured in Section 3.2.1.3.
H=Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas used in 
the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3 in Btu's 
per standard cubic foot (kJ/L).
A=8,760, number of hours in a year.
B=300, number of hours per year any continuously burning pilot lights 
contribute to the heating of an oven for cooking food.

    4.1.2.3 Annual conventional oven self-cleaning energy.
    4.1.2.3.1 Annual primary energy consumption. Calculate the annual 
primary energy consumption for conventional oven self-cleaning 
operations, ESC, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year 
for electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens, and defined as:

ESC=ESxSexK, for electric ovens,

Where:

ES=energy consumption in watt-hours, as measured in Section 
3.2.1.2.
Se=4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of a 
conventional electric oven is used per year.
K=0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.

or

ESC=VSxHxSg, for gas ovens,

Where:

VS=gas consumption in standard cubic feet (L), as measured in 
Section 3.2.1.2.
H=Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas used in 
the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3 in Btu's 
per standard cubic foot (kJ/L).
Sg=4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of a 
conventional gas oven is used per year.

    The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be 
disconnected during the self-cleaning test procedure may be subtracted 
from the test energy to obtain the test energy consumption, 
ESC.
    4.1.2.3.2 Annual secondary energy consumption for self-cleaning 
operation of gas ovens. Calculate the annual secondary energy 
consumption for self-cleaning operations of a gas oven, ESS, 
expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as:

ESS=EIS x Sg x K,

Where:

EIS=electrical energy consumed during the self-cleaning 
operation of a conventional gas oven, as measured in Section 3.2.1.2.
Sg=4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of a 
conventional gas oven is used per year.
K=0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.

    4.1.2.4 Annual clock energy consumption. Calculate the annual energy 
consumption of any constantly operating electric clock, ECL, 
expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as:

ECL = PCL x A x K,

Where:

PCL=power rating of clock which is on continuously, in watts, 
as measured in Section 3.2.1.4.
A=8,760, number of hours in a year.
K=0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.


[[Page 180]]


    4.1.2.5 Total annual energy consumption of a single conventional 
oven.
    4.1.2.5.1 Conventional electric oven energy consumption. Calculate 
the total annual energy consumption of a conventional electric oven, 
EAO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined 
as:

EAO=ECO+ESC+ECL,

Where:

ECO=annual primary cooking energy consumption as determined 
in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
ESC=annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as 
determined in Section 4.1.2.3.1.
ECL=annual clock energy consumption as determined in Section 
4.1.2.4.

    4.1.2.5.2 Conventional gas oven energy consumption. Calculate the 
total annual gas energy consumption of a conventional gas oven, 
EAOG, expressed in Btu's (kJ) per year and defined as:

EAOG=ECO+ESC+EPO,

Where:

ECO=annual primary cooking energy consumption as determined 
in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
EPO=annual pilot light energy consumption as determined in 
Section 4.1.2.2.
ESC=annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as 
determined in Section 4.1.2.3.1.

    If the conventional gas oven uses electrical energy, calculate the 
total annual electrical energy consumption, EAOE, expressed 
in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as:

EAOE=ESO+ESS+ECL,

Where:

ESO=annual secondary cooking energy consumption as determined 
in Section 4.1.2.1.2.
ESS=annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption as 
determined in Section 4.1.2.3.2.
ECL=annual clock energy consumption as determined in Section 
4.1.2.4.

    4.1.2.6. Total annual energy consumption of multiple conventional 
ovens. If the cooking appliance includes more than one conventional 
oven, calculate the total annual energy consumption of the conventional 
ovens using the following equations:
    4.1.2.6.1 Conventional electric oven energy consumption. Calculate 
the total annual energy consumption, ETO, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per 
year and defined as:

ETO = EACO + EASC + ECL,

Where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.008

is the average annual primary energy consumption for cooking,

and where:

n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.
ECO = annual primary energy consumption for cooking as 
determined in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.009

average annual self-cleaning energy consumption,
Where:

n = number of self-cleaning conventional ovens in the basic model.
ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as 
determined according to Section 4.1.2.3.1.
ECL = clock energy consumption as determined according to 
Section 4.1.2.4.

4.1.2.6.2 Conventional gas oven energy consumption. Calculate the total 
annual gas energy consumption, ETOG, in Btu's (kJ) per year 
and defined as:

ETOG = EACO + EASC + ETPO,

Where:

EACO = average annual primary energy consumption for cooking 
in Btu's (kJ) per year and is calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.010

Where:

n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.
ECO = annual primary energy consumption for cooking as 
determined in Section 4.1.2.1.1.

and,

EASC = average annual self-cleaning energy consumption in 
Btu's (kJ) per year and is calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.011

Where:

n = number of self-cleaning conventional ovens in the basic model.
ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as 
determined according to Section 4.1.2.3.1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.012

total energy consumption of any pilot lights,


[[Page 181]]


Where:

EPO = annual energy consumption of any continuously burning 
pilot lights determined according to Section 4.1.2.2.
n = number of pilot lights in the basic model.

    If the oven also uses electrical energy, calculate the total annual 
electrical energy consumption, ETOE, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) 
per year and defined as:

ETOE = EASO + EAAS + ECL,

Where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.013

is the average annual secondary energy consumption for cooking,

Where:

n=number of conventional ovens in the basic model.
ESO=annual secondary energy consumption for cooking of gas 
ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.1.2.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.014

is the average annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption,

Where:

n=number of self-cleaning ovens in the basic model.
ESS=annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption of gas 
ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.3.2.
ECL=annual clock energy consumption as determined in Section 
4.1.2.4.

    4.1.3 Conventional oven cooking efficiency.
    4.1.3.1 Single conventional oven. Calculate the conventional oven 
cooking efficiency, EffAO, using the following equations:
    For electric ovens:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.015
    
and,
    For gas ovens:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.016
    
Where:

W1=measured weight of test block in pounds (kg).
Cp=0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg/ [deg]C), specific heat of 
test block.
TS=234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C), temperature rise of test block.
EO=test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1 or 
calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.
Ke=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor for watt-hours 
to Btu's.
EIO=electrical test energy consumption according to Section 
3.2.1 or as calculated in Section 4.1.1.1.

    4.1.3.2 Multiple conventional ovens. If the cooking appliance 
includes more than one conventional oven, calculate the cooking 
efficiency for all of the conventional ovens in the appliance, 
EffTO, using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.017

Where:

n=number of conventional ovens in the cooking appliance.
EffAO=cooking efficiency of each oven determined according to 
Section 4.1.3.1.

    4.1.4 Conventional oven energy factor. Calculate the energy factor, 
or the ratio of useful cooking energy output to the total energy input, 
RO, using the following equations:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.018

    For electric ovens,

Where:

OO=29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output.
EAO=total annual energy consumption for electric ovens as 
determined in Section 4.1.2.5.1.

    For gas ovens:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.019
    
Where:

OO=88.8 kBtu (93,684 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output.
EAOG=total annual gas energy consumption for conventional gas 
ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.5.2.
EAOE=total annual electrical energy consumption for 
conventional gas ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.5.2.
Ke=3,412 Btu/kWh (3,600 kJ/kWh), conversion factor for 
kilowatt-hours to Btu's.

    4.2 Conventional cooking top
    4.2.1 Conventional cooking top cooking efficiency
    4.2.1.1 Electric surface unit cooking efficiency. Calculate the 
cooking efficiency,

[[Page 182]]

EffSU, of the electric surface unit under test, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.020

Where:

W=measured weight of test block, W2 or W3, 
expressed in pounds (kg).
Cp=0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg/ [deg]C), specific heat of 
test block.
TSU=temperature rise of the test block: final test block 
temperature, TCT, as determined in Section 3.2.2, minus the 
initial test block temperature, TI, expressed in [deg]F 
([deg]C) as determined in Section 2.7.5.
Ke=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor of watt-hours 
to Btu's.
ECT=measured energy consumption, as determined according to 
Section 3.2.2, expressed in watt-hours (kJ).

    The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be 
disconnected during the cooktop test may be subtracted from the energy 
consumption, ECT, as determined in Section 3.2.2.
    4.2.1.2 Gas surface unit cooking efficiency. Calculate the cooking 
efficiency, EffSU, of the gas surface unit under test, 
defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.021

Where:

W3=measured weight of test block as measured in Section 
3.3.2, expressed in pounds (kg).
Cp and TSU are the same as defined in Section 
4.2.1.1.

and,

E=[VCT - VCPxH] + (EICxKe),

Where:

VCT=total gas consumption in standard cubic feet (L) for the 
gas surface unit test as measured in Section 3.2.2.
EIC=electrical energy consumed in watt-hours (kJ) by an 
ignition device of a gas surface unit as measured in Section 3.2.2.
Ke=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor of watt-hours 
to Btu's.
H=either Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas 
used in the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3, 
expressed in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L) of gas.

VCP=QCPxtCT, pilot consumption, in 
standard cubic feet (L), during unit test,

Where:

tCT=the elapsed test time as defined in Section 3.2.2.

and
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.022

(pilot flow in standard cubic feet per hour)

Where:

VCP=any pilot lights gas consumption defined in Section 
3.2.2.1.
tCP=elapsed time of the cooking top pilot lights test as 
defined in Section 3.2.2.1.

    4.2.1.3 Conventional cooking top cooking efficiency. Calculate the 
conventional cooking top cooking efficiency, EffCT, using the 
following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.023

Where:

n=number of surface units in the cooking top.
EffSU=the efficiency of each of the surface units, as 
determined according to Section 4.2.1.1 or Section 4.2.1.2.

    4.2.2 Conventional cooking top annual energy consumption.
    4.2.2.1 Conventional electric cooking top energy consumption. 
Calculate the annual energy consumption of an electric cooking top, 
ECA, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.024

Where:

OCT=173.1 kWh (623,160 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output.
EffCT=conventional cooking top cooking efficiency as defined 
in Section 4.2.1.3.

    4.2.2.2 Conventional gas cooking top
    4.2.2.2.1 Annual cooking energy consumption. Calculate the annual 
energy consumption for cooking, ECC, in Btu's (kJ) per year 
for a gas cooking top, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.025

Where:

OCT=527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output.
EffCT=the gas cooking top efficiency as defined in Section 
4.2.1.3.

4.2.2.2.2 Annual energy consumption of any continuously burning gas 
pilots. Calculate the annual energy consumption of any continuously 
burning gas pilot lights of the cooking top, EPC, in Btu's 
(kJ) per year, defined as:

EPC=QCPxAxH,


[[Page 183]]


Where:

QCP=pilot light gas flow rate as measured in Section 3.2.2.1.
A=8,760 hours, the total number of hours in a year.
H=either Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas 
used in the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2. and Section 2.2.2.3, 
expressed in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L) of gas.

    4.2.2.2.3 Total annual energy consumption of a conventional gas 
cooking top. Calculate the total annual energy consumption of a 
conventional gas cooking top, ECA, in Btu's (kJ) per year, 
defined as:

ECA=ECC + EPC,

Where:

ECC=energy consumption for cooking as determined in Section 
4.2.2.2.1.
EPC=annual energy consumption of the pilot lights as 
determined in Section 4.2.2.2.2.

    4.2.3 Conventional cooking top energy factor. Calculate the energy 
factor or ratio of useful cooking energy output for cooking to the total 
energy input, RCT, as follows:
    For an electric cooking top, the energy factor is the same as the 
cooking efficiency as determined according to Section 4.2.1.3.
    For gas cooking tops,
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.026
    
Where:

OCT=527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output of cooking top.
ECA=total annual energy consumption of cooking top determined 
according to Section 4.2.2.2.3.

    4.3 Combined components. The annual energy consumption of a kitchen 
range, e.g. a cooktop and oven combined, shall be the sum of the annual 
energy consumption of each of its components. The annual energy 
consumption for other combinations of ovens, cooktops and microwaves 
will also be treated as the sum of the annual energy consumption of each 
of its components. The energy factor of a combined component is the sum 
of the annual useful cooking energy output of each component divided by 
the sum of the total annual energy consumption of each component.
    4.4 Microwave oven.
    4.4.1 Microwave oven test energy output. Calculate the microwave 
oven test energy output, ET, in watt-hour's (kJ). The 
calculation is repeated two or three times as required in section 3.2.3. 
The average of the ET's is used for a calculation in section 
4.4.3. For calculations specified in units of energy [watt-hours (kJ)], 
use the equation below:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.027

Where:

MW=the measured mass of the test water load, in pounds (g).
MC=the measured mass of the test container before filling 
with test water load, in pounds (g).
T1=the initial test water load temperature, in [deg]F 
([deg]C).
T2=the final test water load temperature, in [deg]F ([deg]C).
T0=the measured ambient room temperature, in [deg]F ([deg]C).
CC=0.210 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.88 kJ/kg [middot] [deg]C), specific 
heat of test container.
Cp=1.0 Btu/lb-[deg]F (4.187 kJ/kg [middot] [deg]C), specific 
heat of water.
Ke=3,412 Btu/kWh (3,600 kJ/kWh) conversion factor of 
kilowatt-hours to Btu's.

    4.4.2 Microwave oven test power output. Calculate the microwave oven 
test power output, PT, in watts (J/s) as specified in Section 
four, paragraph 12.5 of IEC 705 Amendment 2 See Section 430.22. The 
calculation is repeated for each test as required in section 3.2.3. The 
average of the two or three PT's is used for calculations in 
section 4.4.4. (See 10 CFR 430.22)
    4.4.3 Microwave oven annual energy consumption. Calculate the 
microwave oven annual energy consumption, Emo, in KWh's per 
year, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.028

Where:

EM=the energy consumption as defined in Section 3.2.3.
OM=79.8 kWh (287,280 kJ) per year, the microwave oven annual 
useful cooking energy output.
ET=the test energy as calculated in Section 4.4.1.

4.4.4 Microwave oven cooking efficiency. Calculate the microwave oven 
cooking efficiency, EffMO, as specified in Section four, 
paragraph 14 of IEC 705.
4.4.5 Microwave oven energy factor. Calculate the energy factor or the 
ratio of the useful cooking energy output to total energy input on a 
yearly basis, RMO, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.029

Where:

OM=79.8 kWh (287,280 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking 
energy output.

[[Page 184]]

EMO=annual total energy consumption as determined in Section 
4.4.3.

[62 FR 51981, Oct. 3, 1997]

 Appendix J to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
 the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-Automatic Clothes Washers

    The provisions of this appendix J shall apply to products 
manufactured after April 13, 2001. The procedures and calculations in 
sections 3.3, 4.3, and 4.4 of this Appendix need not be performed to 
determine compliance with the energy conservation standards for clothes 
washers.

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 Adaptive control system means a clothes washer control system, 
other than an adaptive water fill control system, which is capable of 
automatically adjusting washer operation or washing conditions based on 
characteristics of the clothes load placed in the clothes container, 
without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions. The 
automatic adjustments may, for example, include automatic selection, 
modification, or control of any of the following: wash water 
temperature, agitation or tumble cycle time, number of rinse cycles, and 
spin speed. The characteristics of the clothes load, which could trigger 
such adjustments, could, for example, consist of or be indicated by the 
presence of either soil, soap, suds, or any other additive laundering 
substitute or complementary product.

    Note: Appendix J does not provide a means for determining the energy 
consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system. 
Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27, a waiver must be obtained to 
establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.

    1.2 Adaptive water fill control system means a clothes washer water 
fill control system which is capable of automatically adjusting the 
water fill level based on the size or weight of the clothes load placed 
in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer 
intervention and/or actions.
    1.3 Bone-dry means a condition of a load of test cloth which has 
been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 
minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 
10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent 
or less.
    1.4 Clothes container means the compartment within the clothes 
washer that holds the clothes during operation of the machine.
    1.5 Compact means a clothes washer which has a clothes container 
capacity of less than 1.6 ft3 (45 L).
    1.6 Deep rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which the clothes 
container is filled with water to a selected level and the clothes load 
is rinsed by agitating it or tumbling it through the water.
    1.7 Front-loader clothes washer means a clothes washer which 
sequentially rotates or tumbles portions of the clothes load above the 
water level allowing the clothes load to fall freely back into the 
water. The principal axis of the clothes container is in a horizontal 
plane and the access to the clothes container is through the front of 
the machine.
    1.8 Lockout means that at least one wash/rinse water temperature 
combination is not available in the normal cycle that is available in 
another cycle on the machine.
    1.9 Make-up water means the amount of fresh water needed to 
supplement the amount of stored water pumped from the external laundry 
tub back into the clothes washer when the suds-return feature is 
activated in order to achieve the required water fill level in the 
clothes washer.
    1.10 Modified energy factor means the quotient of the cubic foot (or 
liter) capacity of the clothes container divided by the total clothes 
washer energy consumption per cycle, with such energy consumption 
expressed as the sum of the machine electrical energy consumption, the 
hot water energy consumption, and the energy required for removal of the 
remaining moisture in the wash load.
    1.11 Most energy intensive cycle means the non-normal cycle that 
uses the most energy for a given wash/rinse temperature combination.
    1.12 Non-normal cycle means a cycle other than the normal cycle, but 
does not include any manually selected pre-wash, pre-soak, and extra-
rinse option.
    1.13 Nonwater-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer which 
does not have an internal water heating device to generate hot water.
    1.14 Normal cycle means the cycle recommended by the manufacturer 
for washing cotton and/or linen clothes.
    1.15 Sensor filled means a water fill control which automatically 
terminates the fill when the water reaches an appropriate level in the 
tub.
    1.16 Spray rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which water is sprayed 
onto the clothes load for a definite period of time without maintaining 
any specific water level in the clothes container.
    1.17 Standard means a clothes washer which has a clothes container 
capacity of 1.6 ft \3\ (45 L) or greater.
    1.18 Suds-return means a feature or option on a clothes washer which 
causes the stored

[[Page 185]]

wash water obtained by utilizing the suds-saver feature to be pumped 
from the external laundry tub back into the clothes washer.
    1.19 Suds-saver means a feature or option on a clothes washer which 
allows the user to store used wash water in an external laundry tub for 
use with subsequent wash loads.
    1.20 Temperature use factor means the percentage of the total number 
of washes a user would wash with a particular wash/rinse temperature 
setting.
    1.21 Thermostatically controlled water valves means clothes washer 
controls that have the ability to sense and adjust the hot and cold 
supply water.
    1.22 Time filled means a water fill control which uses a combination 
of water flow controls in conjunction with time to terminate the water 
fill cycle.
    1.23 Top-loader-horizontal-axis clothes washer means a clothes 
washer which: rotates or tumbles portions of the clothes load above the 
water level allowing the clothes load to fall freely back into the water 
with the principal axis in a horizontal plane and has access to the 
clothes container through the top of the clothes washer.
    1.24 Top-loader-vertical-axis clothes washer means a clothes washer 
that: flexes and oscillates the submerged clothes load through the water 
by means of mechanical agitation or other movement; has a clothes 
container with the principal axis in a vertical plane; and has access to 
the clothes container through the top of the clothes washer.
    1.25 Water consumption factor means the quotient of the total 
weighted per-cycle water consumption divided by the capacity of the 
clothes washer.
    1.26 Water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer where some 
or all of the hot water for clothes washing is generated by a water 
heating device internal to the clothes washer.

                          2. Testing Conditions

    2.1 Installation. Install the clothes washer in accordance with 
manufacturer's instructions.
    2.2 Electrical energy supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the 
clothes washer terminal block within 2 percent of 120, 120/240 or 120/
208Y volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system 
as specified by the manufacturer. If the clothes washer has a dual 
voltage conversion capability, conduct the test at the highest voltage 
specified by the manufacturer.
    2.3 Supply water. For nonwater-heating clothes washers not equipped 
with thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the 
hot and cold water supply shall be maintained at 100 [deg]F10 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C5.5 [deg]C). 
For nonwater-heating clothes washers equipped with thermostatically 
controlled water valves, the temperature of the hot water supply shall 
be maintained at 140 [deg]F5 [deg]F (60.0 
[deg]C2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall 
be maintained at 60 [deg]F5 [deg]F (15.6 
[deg]C2.8 [deg]C). For water-heating clothes 
washers, the temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained at 
140 [deg]F5 [deg]F (60.0 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall not exceed 
60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). Water meters shall be installed in both the hot 
and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
    2.3.1 Supply water requirements for water and energy consumption 
testing. For nonwater-heating clothes washers not equipped with 
thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the hot and 
cold water supply shall be maintained at 100[deg]  
10 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C  5.5 [deg]C). For nonwater-
heating clothes washers equipped with thermostatically controlled water 
valves, the temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained at 
140 [deg]F  5 [deg]F (60.0 [deg]C  2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall be 
maintained at 60 [deg]F  5F[deg] (15.6 [deg]C 
 2.8 [deg]C). For water-heating clothes washers, 
the temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained at 140 
[deg]F  5 [deg]F (60.0 [deg]C  2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall not exceed 
60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). Water meters shall be installed in both the hot 
and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
    2.3.2 Supply water requirements for remaining moisture content 
testing. For nonwater-heating clothes washers not equipped with 
thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the hot 
water supply shall be maintained at 140 [deg]F  5 
[deg]F and the cold water supply shall be maintained at 60 [deg]F  5 [deg]F. All other clothes washers shall be connected 
to water supply temperatures as stated in 2.3.1 of this appendix.
    2.4 Water pressure. The static water pressure at the hot and cold 
water inlet connections of the machine shall be maintained during the 
test at 35 pounds per square inch gauge (psig)2.5 
psig (241.3 kPa17.2 kPa). The static water 
pressure for a single water inlet connection shall be maintained during 
the test at 35 psig2.5 psig (241.3 kPa17.2 kPa). Water pressure gauges shall be installed in 
both the hot and cold water lines to measure water pressure.
    2.5 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the 
following instruments, as appropriate:
    2.5.1 Weighing scales.
    2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a 
resolution no larger than 0.2 oz (5.7 g) and a maximum error no greater 
than 0.3 percent of the measured value.
    2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurements. 
The scale should have a resolution no larger than 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) and 
a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
    2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter shall have a resolution 
no larger than

[[Page 186]]

1 Wh (3.6 kJ) and a maximum error no greater than 2 percent of the 
measured value for any demand greater than 50 Wh (180.0 kJ).
    2.5.3 Temperature measuring device. The device shall have an error 
no greater than 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) over the range being measured.
    2.5.4 Water meter. The water meter shall have a resolution no larger 
than 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters) and a maximum error no greater than 2 
percent for all water flow rates from 1 gal/min (3.8 L/min) to 5 gal/min 
(18.9 L/min).
    2.5.5 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge shall have a 
resolution no larger than 1 psig (6.9 kPa) and shall have an error no 
greater than 5 percent of any measured value over the range of 32.5 psig 
(224.1 kPa) to 37.5 psig (258.6 kPa).
    2.6 Test cloths.
    2.6.1 Energy test cloth. The energy test cloth shall be clean and 
consist of the following:
    2.6.1.1 Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite 
weave, which is 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs 
5.75 oz/yd \2\ (195.0 g/m \2\) and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 picks 
on the fill.
    2.6.1.2 Cloth material that is 24 in by 36 in (61.0 cm by 91.4 cm) 
and has been hemmed to 22 in by 34 in (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) before 
washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than 
four percent on the length and width.
    2.6.1.3 The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall 
not exceed 60 test runs. All energy test cloth must be permanently 
marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed lots of 
material shall not be used for testing the clothes washers.
    2.6.2 Energy Stuffer Cloth. The energy stuffer cloths shall be made 
from energy test cloth material and shall consist of pieces of material 
that are 12 inches by 12 inches (30.5 cm by 30.5 cm) and have been 
hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches (25.4 cm by 25.4 cm) before washing. 
The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than four 
percent on the length and width. The number of test runs on the same 
energy suffer cloth shall not exceed 60 test runs. All energy stuffer 
cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the 
material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing the 
clothes washers.
    2.7 Composition of test loads.
    2.7.1 Seven pound test load. The seven pound test load shall consist 
of bone-dry energy test cloths which weigh 7 lbs 0.07 lbs (3.18 kg 0.03 kg). 
Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by 
the use of energy stuffer cloths.
    2.7.2 Three pound test load. The three pound test load shall consist 
of bone-dry energy test cloths which weigh 3 lbs 0.03 lbs (1.36 kg 0.014 kg). 
Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by 
the use of energy stuffer cloths.
    2.8 Use of test loads.
    2.8.1 For a standard size clothes washer, a seven pound load, as 
described in section 2.7.1, shall be used to test the maximum water fill 
and a three pound test load, as described in section 2.7.2, shall be 
used to test the minimum water fill.
    2.8.2 For a compact size clothes washer, a three pound test load as 
described in section 2.7.2 shall be used to test the maximum and minimum 
water fill levels.
    2.8.3 A vertical-axis clothes washer without adaptive water fill 
control system also shall be tested without a test load for purposes of 
calculating the energy factor.
    2.8.4 The test load sizes to be used to measure remaining moisture 
content (RMC) are specified in section 3.3.2.
    2.8.5 Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, 
shaking them to hang loosely and then dropping them into the clothes 
container prior to activating the clothes washer.
    2.9 Preconditioning. If the clothes washer has not been filled with 
water in the preceding 96 hours, pre-condition it by running it through 
a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure that the hose, pump, 
and sump are filled with water.
    2.10 Wash time (period of agitation or tumble) setting. If the 
maximum available wash time in the normal cycle is greater than 9.75 
minutes, the wash time shall be not less than 9.75 minutes. If the 
maximum available wash time in the normal cycle is less than 9.75 
minutes, the wash time shall be the maximum available wash time.
    2.11 Agitation speed and spin speed settings. Where controls are 
provided for agitation speed and spin speed selections, set them as 
follows:
    2.11.1 For energy and water consumption tests, set at the normal 
cycle settings. If settings at the normal cycle are not offered, set the 
control settings to the maximum speed permitted on the clothes washer.
    2.11.2 For remaining moisture content tests, see section 3.3.

                          3. Test Measurements

    3.1 Clothes container capacity. Measure the entire volume which a 
dry clothes load could occupy within the clothes container during washer 
operation according to sections 3.1.1 through 3.1.5.
    3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost 
edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that 
the container will hold the maximum amount of water.
    3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm) 
plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within 
the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy 
test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined

[[Page 187]]

with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any 
void space.
    3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
    3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 [deg]F 
5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C 2.8 
[deg]C) or 100 [deg]F 10 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C 
5.5 [deg]C) water to its uppermost edge. Measure 
and record the weight of water, W, in pounds.
    3.1.5 The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows:

C=W/d.

where:

C=Capacity in cubic feet (or liters).
W=Mass of water in pounds (or kilograms).
d=Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft 3 for 100 [deg]F (993 kg/m 
3 for 37.8 [deg]C) or 62.3 lbs/ft 3 for 60 [deg]F 
(998 kg/m 3 for 15.6 [deg]C)).

    3.2 Test cycle. Establish the test conditions set forth in section 2 
of this Appendix.
    3.2.1 A clothes washer that has infinite temperature selections 
shall be tested at the following temperature settings: hottest setting 
available on the machine, hot (a minimum of 140 [deg]F (60.0 [deg]C) and 
a maximum of 145 [deg]F (62.8 [deg]C)), warm (a minimum of 100 [deg]F 
(37.8 [deg]C) and a maximum of 105 [deg]F (40.6 [deg]C)), and coldest 
setting available on the machine. These temperatures must be confirmed 
by measurement using a temperature measuring device. If the measured 
final water temperature is not within the specified range, stop testing, 
adjust the temperature selector accordingly, and repeat the procedure.
    3.2.2 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system and/or 
unique temperature selections.
    3.2.2.1 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system. 
When testing a clothes washer that has adaptive water fill control, the 
maximum and the minimum test loads as specified in 2.8.1 and 2.8.2 shall 
be used. The amount of water fill shall be determined by the control 
system. If the clothes washer provides consumer selection of variable 
water fill amounts for the adaptive water fill control system, two 
complete sets of tests shall be conducted. The first set of tests shall 
be conducted with the adaptive water fill control system set in the 
setting that will use the greatest amount of energy. The second set of 
tests shall be conducted with the adaptive water fill control system set 
in the setting that will use the smallest amount of energy. Then, the 
results from these two tests shall be averaged to determine the adaptive 
water fill energy consumption value. If a clothes washer with an 
adaptive water fill control system allows consumer selection of manual 
controls as an alternative, both the manual and adaptive modes shall be 
tested and the energy consumption values, ET, ME, 
and DE (if desired), calculated in section 4 for each mode, 
shall be averaged between the manual and adaptive modes.
    3.2.2.2 Clothes washers with multiple warm wash temperature 
combination selections.
    3.2.2.2.1 If a clothes washer's temperature combination selections 
are such that the temperature of each warm wash setting that is above 
the mean warm wash temperature (the mean temperature of the coldest and 
warmest warm settings) is matched by a warm wash setting that is an 
equal distance below the mean, then the energy test shall be conducted 
at the mean warm wash temperature if such a selection is provided, or if 
there is no position on the control that permits selection of the mean 
temperature, the energy test shall be conducted with the temperature 
selection set at the next hotter temperature setting that is available 
above the mean.
    3.2.2.2.2 If the multiple warm wash temperature combination 
selections do not meet criteria in section 3.2.2.2.1, the energy test 
shall be conducted with the temperature selection set at the warm wash 
temperature setting that gives the next higher water temperature than 
the mean temperature of the coldest and warmest warm settings.
    3.2.2.3 Clothes washers with multiple temperature settings within a 
temperature combination selection. When a clothes washer is provided 
with a secondary control that can modify the wash or rinse temperature 
within a temperature combination selection, the secondary control shall 
be set to provide the hottest wash temperature available and the hottest 
rinse temperature available. For instance, when the temperature 
combination selection is set for the middle warm wash temperature and a 
secondary control exists which allows this temperature to be increased 
or decreased, the secondary control shall be set to provide the hottest 
warm wash temperature available for the middle warm wash setting.
    3.2.3 Clothes washers that do not lockout any wash/rinse temperature 
combinations in the normal cycle. Test in the normal cycle all 
temperature combination selections that are required to be tested.
    3.2.3.1 Hot water consumption, cold water consumption, and 
electrical energy consumption at maximum fill. Set the water level 
selector at maximum fill available on the clothes washer, if manually 
controlled, and insert the appropriate test load, if applicable. 
Activate the normal cycle of the clothes washer and also any suds-saver 
switch.
    3.2.3.1.1 For automatic clothes washers, set the wash/rinse 
temperature selector to the hottest temperature combination setting. For 
semi-automatic clothes washers, open the hot water faucet valve 
completely and close the cold water faucet valve completely to achieve 
the hottest temperature combination setting.

[[Page 188]]

    3.2.3.1.2 Measure the electrical energy consumption of the clothes 
washer for the complete cycle.
    3.2.3.1.3 Measure the respective number of gallons (or liters) of 
hot and cold water used to fill the tub for the wash cycle.
    3.2.3.1.4 Measure the respective number of gallons (or liters) of 
hot and cold water used for all deep rinse cycles.
    3.2.3.1.5 Measure the respective gallons (or liters) of hot and cold 
water used for all spray rinse cycles.
    3.2.3.1.6 For non-water-heating automatic clothes washers repeat 
sections 3.2.3.1.3 through 3.2.3.1.5 for each of the other wash/rinse 
temperature selections available that uses heated water and is required 
to be tested. For water-heating clothes washers, repeat sections 
3.2.3.1.2 through 3.2.3.1.5 for each of the other wash/rinse temperature 
selections available that uses heated water and is required to be 
tested. (When calculating water consumption under section 4.3 for any 
machine covered by the previous two sentences, also test the cold wash/
cold rinse selection.) For semi-automatic clothes washers, repeat 
sections 3.2.3.1.3 through 3.2.3.1.5 for the other wash/rinse 
temperature settings in section 6 with the following water faucet valve 
adjustments:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Faucet position
                                  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Hot valve                              Cold valve
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot..............................  Completely open.......................  Closed.
Warm.............................  Completely open.......................  Completely open.
Cold.............................  Closed................................  Completely open.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    3.2.3.1.7 If the clothes washer is equipped with a suds-saver cycle, 
repeat sections 3.2.3.1.2 to 3.2.3.1.5 with suds-saver switch set to 
suds return for the Warm/Cold temperature setting.
    3.2.3.2 Hot water consumption, cold water consumption, and 
electrical energy consumption with the water level selector at minimum 
fill. Set the water level selector at minimum fill, if manually 
controlled, and insert the appropriate test load, if applicable. 
Activate the normal cycle of the clothes washer and also any suds-saver 
switch. Repeat sections 3.2.3.1.1 through 3.2.3.1.7.
    3.2.3.3 Hot and cold water consumption for clothes washers that 
incorporate a partial fill during the rinse cycle. For clothes washers 
that incorporate a partial fill during the rinse cycle, activate any 
suds-saver switch and operate the clothes washer for the complete normal 
cycle at both the maximum water fill level and the minimum water fill 
level for each of the wash/rinse temperature selections available. 
Measure the respective hot and cold water consumed during the complete 
normal cycle.
    3.2.4 Clothes washers that lockout any wash/rinse temperature 
combinations in the normal cycle. In addition to the normal cycle tests 
in section 3.2.3, perform the following tests on non-normal cycles for 
each wash/rinse temperature combination selection that is locked out in 
the normal cycle.
    3.2.4.1 Set the cycle selector to a non-normal cycle which has the 
wash/rinse temperature combination selection that is locked out. Set the 
water level selector at maximum fill and insert the appropriate test 
load, if applicable. Activate the cycle of the clothes washer and also 
any suds-saver switch. Set the wash/rinse temperature selector to the 
temperature combination setting that is locked out in the normal cycle 
and repeat sections 3.2.3.1.2 through 3.2.3.1.5.
    3.2.4.2 Repeat section 3.2.4.1 under the same temperature 
combination setting for all other untested non-normal cycles on the 
machine that have the wash/rinse temperature combination selection that 
is locked out.
    3.2.4.3 Total the measured hot water consumption of the wash, deep 
rinse, and spray rinse of each non-normal cycle tested in sections 
3.2.4.1 through 3.2.4.2 and compare the total for each cycle. The cycle 
that has the highest hot water consumption shall be the most energy 
intensive cycle for that particular wash/rinse temperature combination 
setting.
    3.2.4.4 Set the water level selector at minimum fill and insert the 
appropriate test load, if applicable. Activate the most energy intensive 
cycle, as determined in section 3.2.4.3, of the clothes washer and also 
any suds-saver switch. Repeat tests as described in section 3.2.4.1.
    3.3 Remaining Moisture Content (RMC).
    3.3.1 The wash temperature shall be the same as the rinse 
temperature for all testing. Cold rinse is the coldest rinse temperature 
available on the machine. Warm rinse is the hottest rinse temperature 
available on the machine.
    3.3.2 Determine the test load as shown in the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   Container volume                         Test load
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        liter  = <             eq>= <         lb       kg
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0-0.80................................   0-22.7            3.00     1.36
0.80-0.90.............................  22.7-25.5          3.50     1.59
0.90-1.00.............................  25.5-28.3          3.90     1.77
1.00-1.10.............................  28.3-31.1          4.30     1.95
1.10-1.20.............................  31.1-34.0          4.70     2.13

[[Page 189]]


1.20-1.30.............................  34.0-36.8          5.10     2.31
1.30-1.40.............................  36.8-39.6          5.50     2.49
1.40-1.50.............................  39.6-42.5          5.90     2.68
1.50-1.60.............................  42.5-45.3          6.40     2.90
1.60-1.70.............................  45.3-48.1          6.80     3.08
1.70-1.80.............................  48.1-51.0          7.20     3.27
1.80-1.90.............................  51.0-53.8          7.60     3.45
1.90-2.00.............................  53.8-56.6          8.00     3.63
2.00-2.10.............................  56.6-59.5          8.40     3.81
2.10-2.20.............................  59.5-62.3          8.80     3.99
2.20-2.30.............................  62.3-65.1          9.20     4.17
2.30-2.40.............................  65.1-68.0          9.60     4.35
2.40-2.50.............................  68.0-70.8         10.00     4.54
2.50-2.60.............................  70.8-73.6         10.50     4.76
2.60-2.70.............................  73.6-76.5         10.90     4.94
2.70-2.80.............................  76.5-79.3         11.30     5.13
2.80-2.90.............................  79.3-82.1         11.70     5.31
2.90-3.00.............................  82.1-85.0         12.10     5.49
3.00-3.10.............................  85.0-87.8         12.50     5.67
3.10-3.20.............................  87.8-90.6         12.90     5.85
3.20-3.30.............................  90.6-93.4         13.30     6.03
3.30-3.40.............................  93.4-96.3         13.70     6.21
3.40-3.50.............................  96.3-99.1         14.10     6.40
3.50-3.60.............................  99.1-101.9        14.60     6.62
3.60-3.70.............................  101.9-104.8       15.00     6.80
3.70-3.80.............................  104.8-107.6       15.40     6.99
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
(1) All test load weights are bone dry weights.
(2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights are 0.10 lbs (0.05 kg).

    3.3.3 For clothes washers with cold rinse only.
    3.3.3.1 Record the actual bone dry weight of the test load (WI), 
then place the test load in the clothes washer.
    3.3.3.2 Set water level selector to maximum fill.
    3.3.3.3 Run the normal cycle.
    3.3.3.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after 
completion of the normal cycle (WC).
    3.3.3.5 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load, 
RMC, expressed as a percentage and defined as:

RMC=[(WC-WI)/WI]x100%

    3.3.4 For clothes washers with cold and warm rinse options.
    3.3.4.1 Complete steps 3.3.3.1 through 3.3.3.4 for the cold rinse. 
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load for cold 
rinse, RMCCOLD, expressed as a percentage and defined as:

RMCCOLD=[(WC-WI)/WI]x100%

    3.3.4.2 Complete steps 3.3.3.1 through 3.3.3.4 for the warm rinse. 
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load for warm 
rinse, RMCWARM, expressed as a percentage and defined as:

RMCWARM=[(WC-WI)/WI]x100%

    3.3.4.3 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load, 
RMC, expressed as a percentage and defined as:

RMC=0.73xRMCCOLD+0.27xRMCWARM

    3.3.5 Clothes washers which have options that result in different 
RMC values, such as multiple selection of spin speeds or spin times that 
are available in the normal cycle, shall be tested at the maximum and 
minimum settings of the available options, excluding any ``no spin'' 
(zero spin speed) settings, in accordance with requirements in 3.3.3 or 
3.3.4. The calculated RMCmax extraction and 
RMCmin extraction at the maximum and minimum settings, 
respectively, shall be combined as follows and the final RMC to be used 
in section 4.2 shall be:

RMC=0.75xRMCmax extraction+0.25xRMCmin extraction

    3.4 Data recording. Record for each test cycle in sections 3.2.1 
through 3.3.5.
    3.4.1 For non-water-heating clothes washers, record the kilowatt-
hours of electrical energy, ME, consumed during the test to 
operate the clothes washer in section 3.2.3.1.2. For water-heating 
clothes washers record the kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, 
Ehi consumed at maximum fill in sections 3.2.3.1.2 and 
3.2.3.1.6, and Ehj consumed at minimum fill in section 
3.2.3.2.
    3.4.2 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold 
water consumption, Vhi and Vci, measured at 
maximum fill level for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting 
tested in section 3.2.3, or in both 3.2.3 and 3.2.4, excluding any fresh 
make-up water required to complete the fill during a suds-return cycle.
    3.4.3 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold 
water consumption, Vhj and Vcj, measured at 
minimum fill level for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting 
tested in section 3.2.3, or in both 3.2.3 and 3.2.4, excluding any fresh 
make-up water required to complete the fill during a suds-return cycle.
    3.4.4 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold 
water, ShH and ScH, measured at maximum fill for 
the suds-return cycle.
    3.4.5 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold 
water, ShL and ScL, measured at minimum fill for 
the suds-return cycle.
    3.4.6 Data recording requirements for RMC tests are listed in 
sections 3.3.3 through 3.3.5.

        4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements

    4.1 Energy consumption.
    4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for 
maximum and minimum water fill levels. Calculate for the cycle under 
test the per-cycle temperature weighted hot water consumption for the 
maximum water fill level, Vhmax, and for the minimum water 
fill level, Vhmin, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters 
per cycle) and defined as:

[[Page 190]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.000

where:

 Vhi=reported hot water consumption in gallons per cycle (or 
liters per cycle) at maximum fill for each wash/rinse temperature 
combination setting, as provided in section 3.4.2. If a clothes washer 
is equipped with two or more different wash/rinse temperature selections 
that have the same basic temperature combination selection label (for 
example, one of them has its water temperature controlled by 
thermostatically controlled valves and the other one does not), then the 
largest Vhi shall be used for this calculation. If a clothes 
washer has lockout(s), there will be ``Vhi's'' for wash/rinse 
temperature combination settings available in the normal cycle and 
``Vhi's'' for wash/rinse temperature combination settings in 
the most energy intensive cycle.
Vhj=reported hot water consumption in gallons per cycle (or 
liters per cycle) at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature 
combination setting, as provided in section 3.4.3. If a clothes washer 
is equipped with two or more different wash/rinse temperature selections 
that have the same basic temperature combination selection label (for 
example, one of them has its water temperature controlled by 
thermostatically controlled valves and the other one does not), then the 
largest Vhj shall be used for the calculation. If a clothes 
washer has lockouts, there will be ``Vhj's'' for wash/rinse 
temperature combination settings available in the normal cycle and 
``Vhj's'' for wash/rinse temperature combination settings in 
the most energy intensive cycle.
L=lockout factor to be applied to the reported hot water consumption. 
For wash/rinse temperature combination settings that are not locked out 
in the normal cycle, L=1. For each wash/rinse temperature combination 
setting that is locked out in the normal cycle, L=0.32 in the normal 
cycle and L=0.68, in the most energy intensive cycle.
TUFi=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
TUFj=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=number of wash/rinse temperature combination settings available to the 
user for the clothes washer under test. For clothes washers that lockout 
temperature selections in the normal cycle, n=the number of wash/rinse 
temperature combination settings on the washers plus the number of wash/
rinse temperature combination settings that lockout the temperature 
selections in the normal cycle.
TUFw=temperature use factor for warm wash setting.

    For clothes washers equipped with the suds-saver feature:

X1=frequency of use without the suds-saver feature=0.86.
X2=frequency of use with the suds-saver feature=0.14.
ShH=fresh make-up water measured during suds-return cycle at 
maximum water fill level.
ShL=fresh hot make-up water measured during suds-return cycle 
at minimum water fill level.

    For clothes washers not equipped with the suds-saver feature:

X1=1.0
X2=0.0

    4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for maximum and 
minimum water fill levels. Calculate the total per-cycle hot water 
energy consumption for the maximum water fill level, Emax and 
for the minimum water fill level, Emin, expressed in 
kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

Emax=[VhmaxxTxKxMF]

Emin=[VhminxTxKxMF]

where:

T=temperature rise=90 [deg]F (50 [deg]C).
K=water specific heat=0.00240 kWh/(gal- [deg]F) [0.00114kWh/(L- 
[deg]C)].
Vhmax=as defined in section 4.1.1.
Vhmin=as defined in section 4.1.1.
MF=multiplying factor to account for absence of test load=0.94 for top-
loader vertical axis clothes washers that are sensor filled, 1.0 for all 
other clothes washers.

    4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption 
expressed in kilowatt-hours. Calculate the total weighted per cycle hot 
water energy consumption, ET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per 
cycle and defined as:

ET=[EmaxxFmax]+[EminxFmin
]

where:


[[Page 191]]


Fmax=usage fill factor=0.72.
Fmin=usage fill factor=0.28.
Emax=as defined in section 4.1.2.
Emin=as defined in section 4.1.2.

    4.1.4 Per-cycle water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-
heated water. Calculate for the normal cycle the per-cycle energy 
consumption, ETG, using gas-heated or oil-heated water, 
expressed in Btu per cycle (or megajoules per cycle) and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.001

where:

e=nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency=0.75.
ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.

    4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption.
    4.1.5.1 Non-water-heating clothes washers. The electrical energy 
value recorded for the maximum fill in section 3.4.1 is the per-cycle 
machine electrical energy consumption, ME, expressed in 
kilowatt-hours per cycle.
    4.1.5.2 Water-heating clothes washers.
    4.1.5.2.1 Calculate for the cycle under test the per-cycle 
temperature weighted electrical energy consumption for the maximum water 
fill level, Ehmax, and for the minimum water fill level, 
Ehmin, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.002

where:

Ehi=reported electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours 
per cycle at maximum fill for each wash/cycle temperature combination 
setting, as provided in section 3.4.1.
TUFi=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=number of wash/rinse temperature combination settings available to the 
user for the clothes washer under test.

and
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.003

where:

Ehj=reported electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours 
per cycle at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination 
setting, as provided in section 3.4.1.
TUFj=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=as defined above in this section.

    4.1.5.2.2 Weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. 
Calculate the weighted per cycle machine energy consumption, 
ME, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

ME=[EhmaxxFmax]+[EhminxFmin
]

where:

Fmax=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Fmin=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Ehmax=as defined in section 4.1.5.2.1.
Ehmin=as defined in section 4.1.5.2.1

    4.1.6 Total per-cycle energy consumption when electrically heated 
water is used. Calculate for the normal cycle the total per-cycle energy 
consumption, ETE, using electrically heated water, expressed 
in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

ETE=ET+ME

where:

ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.
ME=as defined in section 4.1.5.1 or 4.1.5.2.2.

    4.2 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of RMC. Calculate the 
amount of energy per cycle required to remove RMC. Such amount is 
DE, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

DE=(LAF)x(test load weight)x(RMC-4%)x(DEF)x(DUF)

where:

LAF=load adjustment factor=0.52.
Test load weight=as shown in test load table in 3.3.2 expressed in lbs/
cycle.
RMC=as defined in 3.3.3.5, 3.3.4.3, or 3.3.5.
DEF=nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture from 
clothes=0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg).
DUF=dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes 
dryer=0.84.

    4.3 Water consumption.
    4.3.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted water consumption for maximum 
and minimum water fill levels. To determine these amounts, calculate for 
the cycle under test the per-cycle temperature-weighted total water 
consumption for the maximum water fill level, Qmax, and for 
the minimum water fill level, Qmin,

[[Page 192]]

expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.004

where:

Vhi=hot water consumption in gallons per-cycle at maximum 
fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting, as provided in 
section 3.4.2.
Vci=total cold water consumption in gallons per-cycle at 
maximum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting, cold 
wash/cold rinse cycle, as provided in section 3.4.2.
TUFi=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=number of wash/rinse temperature combination settings available to the 
user for the clothes washer under test.
TUFw=temperature use factor for warm wash setting.

    For clothes washers equipped with suds-saver feature:

X1=frequency of use without suds-saver feature=0.86
X2=frequency of use with suds-saver feature=0.14
ShH=fresh hot water make-up measured during suds-return cycle 
at maximum water fill level.
ScH=fresh cold water make-up measured during suds-return 
cycle at maximum water fill level.

    For clothes washers not equipped with suds-saver feature:

X1=1.0
X2=0.0

and
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.005

where:

Vhj=hot water consumption in gallons per cycle (or liters per 
cycle) at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination 
setting, as provided in section 3.4.3.
Vcj=cold water consumption in gallons per cycle (or liters 
per cycle) at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination 
setting, cold wash/cold rinse cycle, as provided in section 3.4.3.
TUFj=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
ShL=fresh hot make-up water measured during suds-return cycle 
at minimum water fill level.
ScL=fresh cold make-up water measured during suds-return 
cycle at minimum water fill level.
n=as defined above in this section.
TUFw=as defined above in this section.
X1=as defined above in this section.
X2=as defined above in this section.

    4.3.2 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption. To determine this 
amount, calculate the total weighted per cycle water consumption, 
QT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and 
defined as:

QT=[QmaxxFmax]+[QminxFmin
]

where:

Fmax=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Fmin=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Qmax=as defined in section 4.3.1.
Qmin=as defined in section 4.3.1.

    4.3.3 Water consumption factor. The following calculates the water 
consumption factor, WCF, expressed in gallon per cycle per cubic foot 
(or liter per cycle per liter):

WCF=QT/C

where:

C=as defined in section 3.1.5.
QT=as defined in section 4.3.2.

    4.4 Modified energy factor. The following calculates the modified 
energy factor, MEF, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hours per cycle 
(or liters per kilowatt-hours per cycle):
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.006

where:


[[Page 193]]


C=as defined in section 3.1.5.
ME=as defined in section 4.1.5.1 or 4.1.5.2.2.
ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.
DE=as defined in section 4.2.

    4.5 Energy factor. Calculate the energy factor, EF, expressed in 
cubic feet per kilowatt-hours per cycle (or liters per kilowatt-hours 
per cycle), as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.007

where:

C=as defined in section 3.1.5.
ME=as defined in section 4.1.5.1 or 4.1.5.2.2.
ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.

 5. Applicable Temperature Use Factors for Determining Hot Water Usage 
for Various Wash/Rinse Temperature Selections for All Automatic Clothes 
                                 Washers

    5.1 Clothes washers with discrete temperature selections.
    5.1.1 Five-temperature selection (n=5).

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Temperature
             Wash/rinse temperature  setting                Use Factor
                                                               (TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot/Warm................................................            0.18
Hot/Cold................................................             .12
Warm/Warm...............................................             .30
Warm/Cold...............................................             .25
Cold/Cold...............................................             .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    5.1.2 Four-temperature selection (n=4).

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Temperature
             Wash/rinse temperature  setting                Use Factor
                                                               (TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alternate I:
  Hot/Warm..............................................            0.18
  Hot/Cold..............................................             .12
  Warm/Cold.............................................             .55
  Cold/Cold.............................................             .15
Alternate II:
  Hot/Warm..............................................            0.18
  Hot/Cold..............................................             .12
  Warm/Warm.............................................             .30
  Warm/Cold.............................................             .40
Alternate III:
  Hot/Cold..............................................            0.12
  Warm/Warm.............................................             .18
  Warm/Cold.............................................             .55
  Cold/Cold.............................................             .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    5.1.3 Three-temperature selection (n=3).

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Temperature
             Wash/rinse temperature  setting                Use Factor
                                                               (TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alternate I:
  Hot/Warm..............................................            0.30
  Warm/Cold.............................................             .55
  Cold/Cold.............................................             .15
Alternate II:
  Hot/Cold..............................................            0.30
  Warm/Cold.............................................             .55
  Cold/Cold.............................................             .15
Alternate III:
  Hot/Cold..............................................            0.30
  Warm/Warm.............................................             .55
  Cold/Cold.............................................             .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    5.1.4 Two-temperature selection (n=2).

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Temperature
             Wash/rinse temperature  setting                Use Factor
                                                               (TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Any heated water/Cold...................................            0.85
Cold/Cold...............................................             .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    5.1.5 One-temperature selection (n=1).

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Temperature
             Wash/rinse temperature  setting                Use Factor
                                                               (TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Any.....................................................            1.00
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    5.2 Clothes washers with infinite temperature selections.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Temperature Use Factor
                                                           (TUF)
                                                 -----------------------
                                                    <= 140
        Wash/rinse tempera-  ture setting           [deg]F   
                                                     (60      140 [deg]F
                                                   [deg]C)   (60 [deg]C)
                                                    (n=3)        (n=4)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Extra-hot.......................................  .........        0.05
Hot.............................................       0.30        0.25
Warm............................................       0.55        0.55
Cold............................................       0.15        0.15
------------------------------------------------------------------------

 6. Applicable Temperature Use Factors for Determining Hot Water Usage 
for Various Wash/Rinse Temperature Settings for All Semi-Automatic, Non-
                     Water-Heating, Clothes Washers

    6.1 Six-temperature settings (n=6).

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Temperature
             Wash/rinse temperature  setting                Use Factor
                                                               (TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot/Hot.................................................            0.15
Hot/Warm................................................             .09
Hot/Cold................................................             .06
Warm/Warm...............................................             .42
Warm/Cold...............................................             .13
Cold/Cold...............................................             .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                      7. Waivers and Field Testing

    7.1 Waivers and Field Testing for Non-conventional Clothes Washers. 
Manufacturers of non-conventional clothes washers, such as clothes 
washers with adaptive control systems, must submit a petition for waiver 
pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for 
that clothes washer. For these and other clothes washers that have 
controls or systems such that the DOE test procedures yield results that 
are so unrepresentative of the clothes washer's true energy consumption 
characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative

[[Page 194]]

data, field testing may be appropriate for establishing an acceptable 
test procedure. The following are guidelines for field testing which may 
be used by manufacturers in support of petitions for waiver. These 
guidelines are not mandatory and the Department may determine that they 
do not apply to a particular model. Depending upon a manufacturer's 
approach for conducting field testing, additional data may be required. 
Manufacturers are encouraged to communicate with the Department prior to 
the commencement of field tests which may be used to support a petition 
for waiver. Section 7.3 provides an example of field testing for a 
clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system. Other 
features, such as the use of various spin speed selections, could be the 
subject of field tests.
    7.2 Non-conventional Wash System Energy Consumption Test. The field 
test may consist of a minimum of 10 of the nonconventional clothes 
washers (``test clothes washers'') and 10 clothes washers already being 
distributed in commerce (``base clothes washers''). The tests should 
include a minimum of 50 normal test cycles per clothes washer. The test 
clothes washers and base clothes washers should be identical in 
construction except for the controls or systems being tested. Equal 
numbers of both the test clothes washer and the base clothes washer 
should be tested simultaneously in comparable settings to minimize 
seasonal and/or consumer laundering conditions and/or variations. The 
clothes washers should be monitored in such a way as to accurately 
record the total energy consumption per cycle. At a minimum, the 
following should be measured and recorded throughout the test period for 
each clothes washer: Hot water usage in gallons (or liters), electrical 
energy usage in kilowatt-hours, and the cycles of usage. The field test 
results would be used to determine the best method to correlate the 
rating of the test clothes washer to the rating of the base clothes 
washer. If the base clothes washer is rated at A kWh per year, but field 
tests at B kWh per year, and the test clothes washer field tests at D 
kWh per year, the test unit would be rated as follows:

Ax(D/B)=G kWh per year

    7.3 Adaptive water fill control system field test. Section 3.2.2.1 
defines the test method for measuring energy consumption for clothes 
washers which incorporate control systems having both adaptive and 
alternate manual selections. Energy consumption calculated by the method 
defined in section 3.2.2.1 assumes the adaptive cycle will be used 50 
percent of the time. This section can be used to develop field test data 
in support of a petition for waiver when it is believed that the 
adaptive cycle will be used more than 50 percent of the time. The field 
test sample size should be a minimum of 10 test clothes washers. The 
test clothes washers should be totally representative of the design, 
construction, and control system that will be placed in commerce. The 
duration of field testing in the user's house should be a minimum of 50 
normal test cycles, for each unit. No special instructions as to cycle 
selection or product usage should be given to the field test 
participants, other than inclusion of the product literature pack which 
should be shipped with all units, and instructions regarding filling out 
data collection forms, use of data collection equipment, or basic 
procedural methods. Prior to the test clothes washers being installed in 
the field test locations, baseline data should be developed for all 
field test units by conducting laboratory tests as defined by section 1 
through section 6 of these test procedures to determine the energy 
consumption values. The following data should be measured and recorded 
for each wash load during the test period: wash cycle selected, the mode 
of the clothes washer (adaptive or manual), clothes load dry weight 
(measured after the clothes washer and clothes dryer cycles are 
completed) in pounds, and type of articles in the clothes load (i.e., 
cottons, linens, permanent press, etc.). The wash loads used in 
calculating the in-home percentage split between adaptive and manual 
cycle usage should be only those wash loads which conform to the 
definition of the normal test cycle.
    Calculate:

T=The total number of normal test cycles run during the field test
Ta=The total number of adaptive control normal test cycles
Tm=The total number of manual control normal test cycles

    The percentage weighting factors:

Pa=(Ta/T) x 100 (the percentage weighting for 
adaptive control selection)
Pm=(Tm/T) x 100 (the percentage weighting for 
manual control selection)

    Energy consumption values, ET, ME, and 
DE (if desired) calculated in section 4 for the manual and 
adaptive modes, should be combined using Pa and Pm 
as the weighting factors.

                                8. Sunset

    The provisions of this appendix J expire on December 31, 2003.

[62 FR 45501, Aug. 27, 1997, as amended at 66 FR 3330, Jan. 12, 2001; 66 
FR 8745, Feb. 2, 2001]

[[Page 195]]

Appendix J1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
 the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-Automatic Clothes Washers

    The provisions of this appendix J1 shall apply to products 
manufactured beginning January 1, 2004.

                       1. Definitions and Symbols

    1.1 Adaptive control system means a clothes washer control system, 
other than an adaptive water fill control system, which is capable of 
automatically adjusting washer operation or washing conditions based on 
characteristics of the clothes load placed in the clothes container, 
without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions. The 
automatic adjustments may, for example, include automatic selection, 
modification, or control of any of the following: wash water 
temperature, agitation or tumble cycle time, number of rinse cycles, and 
spin speed. The characteristics of the clothes load, which could trigger 
such adjustments, could, for example, consist of or be indicated by the 
presence of either soil, soap, suds, or any other additive laundering 
substitute or complementary product.
    Note: Appendix J1 does not provide a means for determining the 
energy consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system. 
Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27, a waiver must be obtained to 
establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.
    1.2 Adaptive water fill control system means a clothes washer water 
fill control system which is capable of automatically adjusting the 
water fill level based on the size or weight of the clothes load placed 
in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer 
intervention or actions.
    1.3 Bone-dry means a condition of a load of test cloth which has 
been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 
minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 
10 minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent 
or less.
    1.4 Clothes container means the compartment within the clothes 
washer that holds the clothes during the operation of the machine.
    1.5 Compact means a clothes washer which has a clothes container 
capacity of less than 1.6 ft3 (45 L).
    1.6 Deep rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which the clothes 
container is filled with water to a selected level and the clothes load 
is rinsed by agitating it or tumbling it through the water.
    1.7 Energy test cycle for a basic model means (A) the cycle 
recommended by the manufacturer for washing cotton or linen clothes, and 
includes all wash/rinse temperature selections and water levels offered 
in that cycle, and (B) for each other wash/rinse temperature selection 
or water level available on that basic model, the portion(s) of other 
cycle(s) with that temperature selection or water level that, when 
tested pursuant to these test procedures, will contribute to an accurate 
representation of the energy consumption of the basic model as used by 
consumers. Any cycle under (A) or (B) shall include the agitation/tumble 
operation, spin speed(s), wash times, and rinse times applicable to that 
cycle, including water heating time for water heating clothes washers.
    1.8 Load use factor means the percentage of the total number of wash 
loads that a user would wash a particular size (weight) load.
    1.9 Manual control system means a clothes washer control system 
which requires that the consumer make the choices that determine washer 
operation or washing conditions, such as, for example, wash/rinse 
temperature selections, and wash time before starting the cycle.
    1.10 Manual water fill control system means a clothes washer water 
fill control system which requires the consumer to determine or select 
the water fill level.
    1.11 Modified energy factor means the quotient of the cubic foot (or 
liter) capacity of the clothes container divided by the total clothes 
washer energy consumption per cycle, with such energy consumption 
expressed as the sum of the machine electrical energy consumption, the 
hot water energy consumption, and the energy required for removal of the 
remaining moisture in the wash load.
    1.12 Non-water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer which 
does not have an internal water heating device to generate hot water.
    1.13 Spray rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which water is sprayed 
onto the clothes for a period of time without maintaining any specific 
water level in the clothes container.
    1.14 Standard means a clothes washer which has a clothes container 
capacity of 1.6 ft3 (45 L) or greater.
    1.15 Temperature use factor means, for a particular wash/rinse 
temperature setting, the percentage of the total number of wash loads 
that an average user would wash with that setting.
    1.16 Thermostatically controlled water valves means clothes washer 
controls that have the ability to sense and adjust the hot and cold 
supply water.
    1.17 Uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selection(s) means 
(A) multiple warm wash selections for which the warm wash water 
temperatures have a linear relationship with all discrete warm wash 
selections when the water temperatures are plotted against equally 
spaced consecutive warm wash selections between the hottest warm

[[Page 196]]

wash and the coldest warm wash. If the warm wash has infinite 
selections, the warm wash water temperature has a linear relationship 
with the distance on the selection device (e.g. dial angle or slide 
movement) between the hottest warm wash and the coldest warm wash. The 
criteria for a linear relationship as specified above is that the 
difference between the actual water temperature at any warm wash 
selection and the point where that temperature is depicted on the 
temperature/selection line formed by connecting the warmest and the 
coldest warm selections is less than 5 percent. In 
all cases, the mean water temperature of the warmest and the coldest 
warm selections must coincide with the mean of the ``hot wash'' (maximum 
wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and ``cold wash'' (minimum 
wash temperature) water temperatures within 3.8 
[deg]F (2.1 [deg]C); or (B) on a clothes washer 
with only one warm wash temperature selection, a warm wash temperature 
selection with a water temperature that coincides with the mean of the 
``hot wash'' (maximum wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and 
``cold wash'' (minimum wash temperature) water temperatures within 
3.8 [deg]F (2.1 [deg]C).
    1.18 Warm wash means all wash temperature selections that are below 
the hottest hot, less than 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C), and above the 
coldest cold temperature selection.
    1.19 Water consumption factor means the quotient of the total 
weighted per-cycle water consumption divided by the cubic foot (or 
liter) capacity of the clothes washer.
    1.20 Water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer where some 
or all of the hot water for clothes washing is generated by a water 
heating device internal to the clothes washer.
    1.21 Symbol usage. The following identity relationships are provided 
to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure.

E--Electrical Energy Consumption
H--Hot Water Consumption
C--Cold Water Consumption
R--Hot Water Consumed by Warm Rinse
ER--Electrical Energy Consumed by Warm Rinse
TUF--Temperature Use Factor
HE--Hot Water Energy Consumption
F--Load Usage Factor
Q--Total Water Consumption
ME--Machine Electrical Energy Consumption
RMC--Remaining Moisture Content
WI--Initial Weight of Dry Test Load
WC--Weight of Test Load After Extraction
m--Extra Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. 135 [deg]F (57.2 
[deg]C.))
h--Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C.))
w--Warm Wash
c--Cold Wash (minimum wash temp.)
r--Warm Rinse (hottest rinse temp.)
x or max--Maximum Test Load
a or avg--Average Test Load
n or min--Minimum Test Load

    The following examples are provided to show how the above symbols 
can be used to define variables:

Emx=``Electrical Energy Consumption'' for an ``Extra Hot 
Wash'' and ``Maximum Test Load''
Ra=``Hot Water Consumed by Warm Rinse'' for the ``Average 
Test Load''
TUFm=``Temperature Use Factor'' for an ``Extra Hot Wash''
HEmin=``Hot Water Energy Consumption'' for the ``Minimum Test 
Load''
    1.22 Cold rinse means the coldest rinse temperature available on the 
machine (and should be the same rinse temperature selection tested in 
3.7 of this appendix).
    1.23 Warm rinse means the hottest rinse temperature available on the 
machine (and should be the same rinse temperature selection tested in 
3.7 of this appendix).

                          2. Testing Conditions

    2.1 Installation. Install the clothes washer in accordance with 
manufacturer's instructions.
    2.2 Electrical energy supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the 
clothes washer terminal block within 2 percent of 120, 120/240, or 120/
208Y volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system 
and within 2 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the 
manufacturer. If the clothes washer has a dual voltage conversion 
capability, conduct test at the highest voltage specified by the 
manufacturer.
    2.3 Supply Water.
    2.3.1 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption or 
water energy consumption are affected by the inlet water temperature. 
(For example, water heating clothes washers or clothes washers with 
thermostatically controlled water valves.). The temperature of the hot 
water supply at the water inlets shall not exceed 135 [deg]F (57.2 
[deg]C) and the cold water supply at the water inlets shall not exceed 
60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). A water meter shall be installed in both the 
hot and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
    2.3.2 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption and 
water energy consumption are not affected by the inlet water 
temperature. The temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained 
at 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall be 
maintained at 60 [deg]F5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C). A water meter shall be installed in both 
the hot and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
    2.4 Water pressure. The static water pressure at the hot and cold 
water inlet connection of the clothes washer shall be maintained at 35 
pounds per square inch gauge (psig) 2.5 psig 
(241.3 kPa17.2 kPa) during

[[Page 197]]

the test. The static water pressure for a single water inlet connection 
shall be maintained at 35 psig2.5 psig (241.3 
kPa17.2 kPa) during the test. A water pressure 
gauge shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure 
water pressure.
    2.5 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the 
following instruments, as appropriate:
    2.5.1 Weighing scales.
    2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a 
resolution of no larger than 0.2 oz (5.7 g) and a maximum error no 
greater than 0.3 percent of the measured value.
    2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurements. 
The scale should have a resolution no larger than 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) and 
a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
    2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter shall have a resolution 
no larger than 1 Wh (3.6 kJ) and a maximum error no greater than 2 
percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 50 Wh (180.0 
kJ).
    2.5.3 Temperature measuring device. The device shall have an error 
no greater than 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) over the range being measured.
    2.5.4 Water meter. The water meter shall have a resolution no larger 
than 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters) and a maximum error no greater than 2 
percent for the water flow rates being measured.
    2.5.5 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge shall have a 
resolution of 1 pound per square inch gauge (psig) (6.9 kPa) and shall 
have an error no greater than 5 percent of any measured value.
    2.6 Test cloths.
    2.6.1 Energy Test Cloth. The energy test cloth shall be made from 
energy test cloth material, as specified in 2.6.4, that is 24 inches by 
36 inches (61.0 cm by 91.4 cm) and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 
inches (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) before washing. The energy test cloth shall 
be clean and shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after 
preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix). All energy test 
cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the 
material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing the 
clothes washers.
    2.6.1.1 The energy test cloth shall not be used for more than 25 
test runs and shall be clean and consist of the following:
    (A) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite 
weave, which is 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs 
5.75 ounces per square yard (195.0 g/m2) and has 65 ends on 
the warp and 57 picks on the fill; and
    (B) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches (61.0 cm by 91.4 
cm) and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) 
before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be 
more than four percent on the length and width.
    2.6.1.2 The new test cloths, including energy test cloths and energy 
stuffer cloths, shall be pre-conditioned in a clothes washer in the 
following manner:
    2.6.1.2.1 Wash the test cloth using a commercially available clothes 
washing detergent that is suitable for 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) wash 
water as recommended by the manufacturer, with the washer set on maximum 
water level. Place detergent in washer and then place the new load to be 
conditioned in the washer. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water 
(17ppm or less). Wash water is to be hot, and controlled at 135 
[deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). Rinse water temperature is to be cold, and 
controlled at 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C 
2.8 [deg]C). Rinse the load through a second rinse 
using the same water temperature (if an optional second rinse is 
available on the clothes washer, use it).
    2.6.1.2.2 Dry the load.
    2.6.1.2.3 A final cycle is to be hot water wash with no detergent 
followed by two cold water rinses.
    2.6.1.2.4 Dry the load.
    2.6.2 Energy Stuffer Cloth. The energy stuffer cloth shall be made 
from energy test cloth material, as specified in 2.6.4, and shall 
consist of pieces of material that are 12 inches by 12 inches (30.5 cm 
by 30.5 cm) and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches (25.4 cm by 
25.4 cm) before washing. The energy stuffer cloth shall be clean and 
shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after preconditioning as 
specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix). All energy stuffer cloth must be 
permanently marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed 
lots of material shall not be used for testing the clothes washers.
    2.6.3 Preconditioning of Test Cloths. The new test cloths, including 
energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths, shall be pre-conditioned 
in a clothes washer in the following manner:
    2.6.3.1 Perform 5 complete normal wash-rinse-spin cycles, the first 
two with AHAM Standard detergent 2A and the last three without 
detergent. Place the test cloth in a clothes washer set at the maximum 
water level. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water (17 ppm 
hardness or less) using 6.0 grams per gallon of water of AHAM Standard 
detergent 2A. The wash temperature is to be controlled to 135 [deg]F 
 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C  2.8 
[deg]C) and the rinse temperature is to be controlled to 60 [deg]F 
 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C  2.8 
[deg]C). Repeat the cycle with detergent and then repeat the cycle three 
additional times without detergent, bone drying the load between cycles 
(total of five wash and rinse cycles).
    2.6.4 Energy test cloth material. The energy test cloths and energy 
stuffer cloths shall be made from fabric meeting the following 
specifications. The material should come from a roll of material with a 
width of approximately 63 inches and approximately 500

[[Page 198]]

yards per roll, however, other sizes maybe used if they fall within the 
specifications.
    2.6.4.1 Nominal fabric type. Pure finished bleached cloth, made with 
a momie or granite weave, which is nominally 50 percent cotton and 50 
percent polyester.
    2.6.4.2 The fabric weight shall be 5.60 ounces per square yard 
(190.0 g/m\2\), 5 percent.
    2.6.4.3 The thread count shall be 61 x 54 per inch (warp x fill), 
2 percent.
    2.6.4.4 The warp yarn and filling yarn shall each have fiber content 
of 50 percent 4 percent cotton, with the balance 
being polyester, and be open end spun, 15/1 5 
percent cotton count blended yarn.
    2.6.4.5 Water repellent finishes, such as fluoropolymer stain 
resistant finishes shall not be applied to the test cloth. The absence 
of such finishes shall be verified by:
    2.6.4.5.1 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 
(AATCC) Test Method 118--1997, Oil Repellency: Hydrocarbon Resistance 
Test (reaffirmed 1997), of each new lot of test cloth (when purchased 
from the mill) to confirm the absence of Scotchguard\TM\ or other water 
repellent finish (required scores of ``D'' across the board).
    2.6.4.5.2 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 
(AATCC) Test Method 79-2000, Absorbency of Bleached Textiles (reaffirmed 
2000), of each new lot of test cloth (when purchased from the mill) to 
confirm the absence of Scotchguard\TM\ or other water repellent finish 
(time to absorb one drop should be on the order of 1 second).
    2.6.4.5.3 The standards listed in 2.6.4.5.1 and 2.6.4.5.2 of this 
appendix which are not otherwise set forth in this part 430 are 
incorporated by reference. The material listed in this paragraph has 
been approved for incorporation by reference by the Director of the 
Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. 
Any subsequent amendment to a standard by the standard-setting 
organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until 
amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the 
approval and notice of any change in the material will be published in 
the Federal Register. The standards incorporated by reference are the 
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists Test Method 118-
1997, Oil Repellency: Hydrocarbon Resistance Test (reaffirmed 1997) and 
Test Method 79-2000, Absorbency of Bleached Textiles (reaffirmed 2000).
    (a) The above standards incorporated by reference are available for 
inspection at:
    (i) National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For 
information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-
6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--
federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
    (ii) U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and 
Renewable Energy, Hearings and Dockets, ``Energy Conservation Program 
for Consumer Products: Clothes Washer Energy Conservation Standards,'' 
Docket No. EE--RM-94-403, Forrestal Building, 1000 Independence Avenue, 
SW, Washington, DC.
    (b) Copies of the above standards incorporated by reference can be 
obtained from the American Association of Textile Chemists and 
Colorists, P.O. Box 1215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, telephone 
(919) 549-8141, telefax (919) 549-8933, or electronic mail: 
orders@aatcc.org.
    2.6.4.6 The moisture absorption and retention shall be evaluated for 
each new lot of test cloth by the Standard Extractor Remaining Moisture 
Content (RMC) Test specified in 2.6.5 of this appendix.
    2.6.4.6.1 Repeat the Standard Extractor RMC Test in 2.6.5 of this 
appendix three times.
    2.6.4.6.2 An RMC correction curve shall be calculated as specified 
in 2.6.6 of this appendix.
    2.6.5 Standard Extractor RMC Test Procedure. The following procedure 
is used to evaluate the moisture absorption and retention 
characteristics of a lot of test cloth by measuring the RMC in a 
standard extractor at a specified set of conditions. Table 2.6.5 of this 
appendix is the matrix of test conditions. The 500g requirement will 
only be used if a clothes washer design can achieve spin speeds in the 
500g range. When this matrix is repeated 3 times, a total of 48 
extractor RMC test runs are required. For the purpose of the extractor 
RMC test, the test cloths may be used for up to 60 test runs (after 
preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix).

          Table 2.6.5.--Matrix of Extractor RMC Test Conditions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Warm soak       Cold soak
                                         -------------------------------
               ``g Force''                  15              15
                                           min.   4 min.   min.   4 min.
                                           spin    spin    spin    spin
------------------------------------------------------------------------
100.....................................  ......  ......  ......  ......
200.....................................  ......  ......  ......  ......
350.....................................  ......  ......  ......  ......
500.....................................  ......  ......  ......  ......
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    2.6.5.1 The standard extractor RMC tests shall be run in a Bock 
Model 215 extractor (having a basket diameter of 19.5 inches, length of 
12 inches, and volume of 2.1 ft3), with a variable speed 
drive (Bock Engineered Products, P.O. Box 5127, Toledo, OH 43611) or an 
equivalent extractor with same basket design (i.e. diameter, length, 
volume, and hole configuration) and variable speed drive.
    2.6.5.2 Test Load. Test cloths shall be preconditioned in accordance 
with 2.6.3 of this appendix. The load size shall be 8.4 lbs., consistent 
with 3.8.1 of this appendix.
    2.6.5.3 Procedure.

[[Page 199]]

    2.6.5.3.1 Record the ``bone-dry'' weight of the test load (WI).
    2.6.5.3.2 Soak the test load for 20 minutes in 10 gallons of soft 
(<17 ppm) water. The entire test load shall be submerged. The water 
temperature shall be 100 [deg]F  5 [deg]F.
    2.6.5.3.3 Remove the test load and allow water to gravity drain off 
of the test cloths. Then manually place the test cloths in the basket of 
the extractor, distributing them evenly by eye. Spin the load at a fixed 
speed corresponding to the intended centripetal acceleration level 
(measured in units of the acceleration of gravity, g) 1 g for the intended time period 5 
seconds.
    2.6.5.3.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after the 
completion of the extractor spin cycle (WC).
    2.6.5.3.5 Calculate the RMC as (WC-WI)/WI.
    2.6.5.3.6 The RMC of the test load shall be measured at three (3) g 
levels: 100g; 200g; and 350g, using two different spin times at each g 
level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes. If a clothes washer design can achieve 
spin speeds in the 500g range then the RMC of the test load shall be 
measured at four (4) g levels: 100g; 200g; 350g; and 500g, using two 
different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes.
    2.6.5.4 Repeat 2.6.5.3 of this appendix using soft (<17 ppm) water 
at 60 [deg]F  5 [deg]F.
    2.6.6 Calculation of RMC correction curve.
    2.6.6.1 Average the values of 3 test runs and fill in table 2.6.5 of 
this appendix. Perform a linear least-squares fit to relate the standard 
RMC (RMCstandard) values (shown in table 2.6.6.1 of this 
appendix) to the values measured in 2.6.5 of this appendix:
    (RMCcloth): RMCstandard  A * 
RMCcloth + B
Where A and B are coefficients of the linear least-squares fit.

                               Table 2.6.6.1.--Standard RMC Values (RMC Standard)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                     RMC %
                                                             ---------------------------------------------------
                                                                      Warm soak                 Cold soak
                         ``g Force''                         ---------------------------------------------------
                                                                15 min.                   15 min.
                                                                  spin     4 min. spin      spin     4 min. spin
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100.........................................................         45.9         49.9         49.7         52.8
200.........................................................         35.7         40.4         37.9         43.1
350.........................................................         29.6         33.1         30.7         35.8
500.........................................................         24.2         28.7         25.5         30.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    2.6.6.2. Perform an analysis of variance test using two factors, 
spin speed and lot, to check the interaction of speed and lot. Use the 
values from Table 2.6.5 and Table 2.6.6.1 in the calculation. The ``P'' 
value in the variance analysis shall be greater than or equal to 0.1. If 
the ``P'' value is less than 0.1 the test cloth is unacceptable. ``P'' 
is a theoretically based probability of interaction based on an analysis 
of variance.
    2.6.7 Application of RMC correction curve.
    2.6.7.1 Using the coefficients A and B calculated in 2.6.6.1 of this 
appendix:

RMCcorr = A * RMC + B

    2.6.7.2 Substitute RMCcorr values in calculations in 3.8 
of this appendix.

    2.7 Test Load Sizes. Maximum, minimum, and, when required, average 
test load sizes shall be determined using Table 5.1 and the clothes 
container capacity as measured in 3.1.1 through 3.1.5. Test loads shall 
consist of energy test cloths, except that adjustments to the test loads 
to achieve proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths 
with no more than 5 stuffer clothes per load.
    2.8 Use of Test Loads. Table 2.8 defines the test load sizes and 
corresponding water fill settings which are to be used when measuring 
water and energy consumptions. Adaptive water fill control system and 
manual water fill control system are defined in section 1 of this 
appendix:

       Table 2.8--Test Load Sizes and Water Fill Settings Required
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Manual water fill control system    Adaptive water fill control system
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       Water fill                          Water fill
  Test load size        setting        Test load size        setting
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max                Max                Max               As determined by
Min                Min                Avg                the Clothes
                                      Min                Washer.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    2.8.1 The test load sizes to be used to measure RMC are specified in 
section 3.8.1.
    2.8.2 Test loads for energy and water consumption measurements shall 
be bone dry prior to the first cycle of the test, and dried

[[Page 200]]

to a maximum of 104 percent of bone dry weight for subsequent testing.
    2.8.3 Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, 
shaking them to hang loosely and then put them into the clothes 
container prior to activating the clothes washer.
    2.9 Pre-conditioning.
    2.9.1 Nonwater-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not 
been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, pre-condition it by 
running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure 
that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
    2.9.2 Water-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not 
been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, or if it has not been 
in the test room at the specified ambient conditions for 8 hours, pre-
condition it by running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining 
it to ensure that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
    2.10 Wash time setting. If one wash time is prescribed in the energy 
test cycle, that shall be the wash time setting; otherwise, the wash 
time setting shall be the higher of either the minimum, or 70 percent of 
the maximum wash time available in the energy test cycle.
    2.11 Test room temperature for water-heating clothes washers. 
Maintain the test room ambient air temperature at 75 [deg]F5 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C).

                          3. Test Measurements

    3.1 Clothes container capacity. Measure the entire volume which a 
dry clothes load could occupy within the clothes container during washer 
operation according to the following procedures:
    3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost 
edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that 
the container will hold the maximum amount of water.
    3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm) 
plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within 
the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy 
test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined with 2 mil (0.051 mm) 
plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any void space.
    3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
    3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 
[deg]F5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C) or 100 [deg]F10 [deg]F 
(37.8 [deg]C5.5 [deg]C) water to its uppermost 
edge. Measure and record the weight of water, W, in pounds.
    3.1.5 The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows:

C=W/d.

where:

C=Capacity in cubic feet (liters).
W=Mass of water in pounds (kilograms).
d=Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft\3\ for 100 [deg]F (993 kg/m\3\ for 37.8 
[deg]C) or 62.3 lbs/ft\3\ for 60 [deg]F (998 kg/m\3\ for 15.6 [deg]C)).

    3.2 Procedure for measuring water and energy consumption values on 
all automatic and semi-automatic washers. All energy consumption tests 
shall be performed under the energy test cycle(s), unless otherwise 
specified. Table 3.2 defines the sections below which govern tests of 
particular clothes washers, based on the number of wash/rinse 
temperature selections available on the model, and also, in some 
instances, method of water heating. The procedures prescribed are 
applicable regardless of a clothes washer's washing capacity, loading 
port location, primary axis of rotation of the clothes container, and 
type of control system.
    3.2.1 Inlet water temperature and the wash/rinse temperature 
settings.
    3.2.1.1 For automatic clothes washers set the wash/rinse temperature 
selection control to obtain the wash water temperature desired (extra 
hot, hot, warm, or cold) and cold rinse, and open both the hot and cold 
water faucets.
    3.2.1.2 For semi-automatic washers: (1) For hot water temperature, 
open the hot water faucet completely and close the cold water faucet; 
(2) for warm inlet water temperature, open both hot and cold water 
faucets completely; (3) for cold water temperature, close the hot water 
faucet and open the cold water faucet completely.
    3.2.1.3 Determination of warm wash water temperature(s) to decide 
whether a clothes washer has uniformly distributed warm wash temperature 
selections. The wash water temperature, Tw, of each warm water wash 
selection shall be calculated or measured.
    For non-water-heating clothes washers, calculate Tw as follows:

Tw( [deg]F)=((Hwx135 [deg]F)+(Cwx60 [deg]F))/(Hw+Cw)

 or

Tw( [deg]C)=((Hwx57.2 [deg]C)+(Cwx15.6 [deg]C))/(Hw+Cw)

where:

Hw=Hot water consumption of a warm wash
Cw=Cold water consumption of a warm wash

    For water-heating clothes washers, measure and record the 
temperature of each warm wash selection after fill.
    3.2.2 Total water consumption during the energy test cycle shall be 
measured, including hot and cold water consumption during wash, deep 
rinse, and spray rinse.
    3.2.3 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill/manual water fill 
control systems
    3.2.3.1 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system and 
alternate manual water fill control systems. If a clothes washer with an 
adaptive water fill control system allows consumer selection of manual 
controls as an alternative, then both manual and adaptive

[[Page 201]]

modes shall be tested and, for each mode, the energy consumption 
(HET, MET, and DE) and water 
consumption (QT), values shall be calculated as set forth in 
section 4. Then the average of the two values (one from each mode, 
adaptive and manual) for each variable shall be used in section 4 for 
the clothes washer.
    3.2.3.2 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system.
    3.2.3.2.1. Not user adjustable. The maximum, minimum, and average 
water levels as defined in the following sections shall be interpreted 
to mean that amount of water fill which is selected by the control 
system when the respective test loads are used, as defined in Table 2.8. 
The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy 
consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3.
    3.2.3.2.2 User adjustable. Four tests shall be conducted on clothes 
washers with user adjustable adaptive water fill controls which affect 
the relative wash water levels. The first test shall be conducted with 
the maximum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system 
set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result. The 
second test shall be conducted with the minimum test load and with the 
adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the 
least energy intensive result. The third test shall be conducted with 
the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system 
set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result for 
the given test load. The fourth test shall be conducted with the average 
test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the 
setting that will give the least energy intensive result for the given 
test load. The energy and water consumption for the average test load 
and water level, shall be the average of the third and fourth tests.
    3.2.3.3 Clothes washers with manual water fill control system. In 
accordance with Table 2.8, the water fill selector shall be set to the 
maximum water level available on the clothes washer for the maximum test 
load size and set to the minimum water level for the minimum test load 
size. The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy 
consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3.

                                        Table 3.2--Test Section Reference


----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max. Wash Temp. Available................................   <=135 [deg]F (57.2
                                                                  [deg]C)
                                                             135 [deg]F (57.2
                                                                     [deg]C) \2\
Number of Wash Temp. Selections..........................          1          2  135 [deg]F (57.2 
[deg]C)) for water heating clothes washers only. Water and electrical 
energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level and/or 
test load size as specified in 3.3.1 through 3.3.3 for the hottest wash 
setting available.
    3.3.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hmx), cold water consumption (Cmx), and 
electrical energy consumption (Emx) shall be measured for an 
extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for 
the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used 
and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
    3.3.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hmn), cold water consumption (Cmn), and 
electrical energy consumption (Emn) shall be measured for an 
extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for 
the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used 
and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
    3.3.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an 
adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water 
consumption (Hma), cold water consumption (Cma), 
and electrical energy consumption (Ema) for an extra hot 
wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as 
determined per Table 5.1.
    3.4 ``Hot Wash'' (Max Wash Temp<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)). Water 
and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill 
level or test load size as specified in 3.4.1 through 3.4.3 for a 135 
[deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash, if available, or for the hottest selection 
less than 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)).
    3.4.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hhx), cold water consumption (Chx), and 
electrical energy consumption (Ehx) shall be measured for a 
hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the 
maximum water fill

[[Page 202]]

level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined 
per Table 5.1.
    3.4.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hhn), cold water consumption (Chn), and 
electrical energy consumption (Ehn) shall be measured for a 
hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the 
minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and 
shall be determined per Table 5.1.
    3.4.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an 
adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water 
consumption (Hha), cold water consumption (Cha), 
and electrical energy consumption (Eha) for a hot wash/cold 
rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined 
per Table 5.1.
    3.5 ``Warm Wash.'' Water and electrical energy consumption shall be 
determined for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified 
in 3.5.1 through 3.5.2.3 for the applicable warm water wash 
temperature(s).
    3.5.1 Clothes washers with uniformly distributed warm wash 
temperature selection(s). The reportable values to be used for the warm 
water wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of the measurements 
for the hot and cold wash selections. This is a calculation only, no 
testing is required.
    3.5.2 Clothes washers that lack uniformly distributed warm wash 
temperature selections. For a clothes washer with fewer than four 
discrete warm wash selections, test all warm wash temperature 
selections. For a clothes washer that offers four or more warm wash 
selections, test at all discrete selections, or test at 25 percent, 50 
percent, and 75 percent positions of the temperature selection device 
between the hottest hot (<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash and the 
coldest cold wash. If a selection is not available at the 25, 50 or 75 
percent position, in place of each such unavailable selection use the 
next warmer setting. Each reportable value to be used for the warm water 
wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of all tests conducted 
pursuant to this section.
    3.5.2.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hwx), cold water consumption (Cwx), and 
electrical energy consumption (Ewx) shall be measured with 
the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load 
size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
    3.5.2.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hwn), cold water consumption (Cwn), and 
electrical energy consumption (Ewn) shall be measured with 
the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load 
size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
    3.5.2.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with 
an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water 
consumption (Hwa), cold water consumption (Cwa), 
and electrical energy consumption (Ewa) with an average test 
load size as determined per Table 5.1.
    3.6 ``Cold Wash'' (Minimum Wash Temperature Selection). Water and 
electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill 
level or test load size as specified in 3.6.1 through 3.6.3 for the 
coldest wash temperature selection available.
    3.6.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hcx), cold water consumption (Ccx), and 
electrical energy consumption (Ecx) shall be measured for a 
cold wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the 
maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and 
shall be determined per Table 5.1.
    3.6.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption 
(Hcn), cold water consumption (Ccn), and 
electrical energy consumption (Ecn) shall be measured for a 
cold wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the 
minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and 
shall be determined per Table 5.1.
    3.6.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an 
adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water 
consumption (Hca), cold water consumption (Cca), 
and electrical energy consumption (Eca) for a cold wash/cold 
rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined 
per Table 5.1.
    3.7 Warm Rinse. Tests in sections 3.7.1 and 3.7.2 shall be conducted 
with the hottest rinse temperature available. If multiple wash 
temperatures are available with the hottest rinse temperature, any 
``warm wash'' temperature may be selected to conduct the tests.
    3.7.1 For the rinse only, measure the amount of hot water consumed 
by the clothes washer including all deep and spray rinses, for the 
maximum (Rx), minimum (Rn), and, if required by 
section 3.5.2.3, average (Ra) test load sizes or water fill 
levels.
    3.7.2 Measure the amount of electrical energy consumed by the 
clothes washer to heat the rinse water only, including all deep and 
spray rinses, for the maximum (ERx), minimum 
(ERn), and, if required by section 3.5.2.3, average 
(ERa), test load sizes or water fill levels.
    3.8 Remaining Moisture Content:
    3.8.1 The wash temperature will be the same as the rinse temperature 
for all testing. Use the maximum test load as defined in Table 5.1 and 
section 3.1 for testing.
    3.8.2 For clothes washers with cold rinse only:
    3.8.2.1 Record the actual `bone dry' weight of the test load 
(WImax), then place the test load in the clothes washer.
    3.8.2.2 Set water level selector to maximum fill.
    3.8.2.3 Run the energy test cycle.

[[Page 203]]

    3.8.2.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after 
completion of the energy test cycle (WCmax).
    3.8.2.5 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test 
load, RMCMAX, expressed as a percentage and defined as:

RMCmax=((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%

    3.8.3 For clothes washers with cold and warm rinse options:
    3.8.3.1 Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for cold rinse. 
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for 
cold rinse, RMCCOLD, expressed as a percentage and defined 
as:

RMCCOLD=((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%

    3.8.3.2 Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for warm rinse. 
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for 
warm rinse, RMCWARM, expressed as a percentage and defined 
as:

RMCWARM=((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%

    3.8.3.3 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test 
load, RMCmax, expressed as a percentage and defined as:

RMCmax=RMCCOLDx(1-
TUFr)+RMCWARMx(TUFr).

where:

TUFr is the temperature use factor for warm rinse as defined 
in Table 4.1.1.

    3.8.4 Clothes washers which have options that result in different 
RMC values, such as multiple selection of spin speeds or spin times, 
that are available in the energy test cycle, shall be tested at the 
maximum and minimum extremes of the available options, excluding any 
``no spin'' (zero spin speed) settings, in accordance with requirements 
in 3.8.2 or 3.8.3. The calculated RMCmax extraction and 
RMCmin extraction at the maximum and minimum settings, 
respectively, shall be combined as follows and the final RMC to be used 
in section 4.3 shall be:

RMC = 0.75xRMCmax extraction+0.25x
 RMCmin extraction

        4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements

    4.1 Hot water and machine electrical energy consumption of clothes 
washers.
    4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for 
maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels using each appropriate 
load size as defined in section 2.8 and Table 5.1. Calculate for the 
cycle under test the per-cycle temperature weighted hot water 
consumption for the maximum water fill level, Vhx, the 
average water fill level, Vha, and the minimum water fill 
level, Vhn, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per 
cycle) and defined as:
(a) 
Vhx=[HmxxTUFm]+[HhxxTUFh
]+[Hwx 
xTUFw]+[HcxxTUFc]+[RxxTUFr
]
(b) 
Vha=[HmaxTUFm]+[HhaxTUFh
]+[Hwa 
xTUFw]+[HcaxTUFc]+[RaxTUFr
]
(c) 
Vhn=[HmnxTUFm]+[HhnxTUFh
]+[Hwn 
xTUFw]+[HcnxTUFc]+[RnxTUFr
]

where:

Hmx, Hma, and Hmn, are reported hot 
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at 
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the extra-
hot wash cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section 
2.8.
Hhx, Hha, and Hhn, are reported hot 
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at 
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the hot wash 
cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
Hwx, Hwa, and Hwn, are reported hot 
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at 
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the warm 
wash cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
Hcx, Hca, and Hcn, are reported hot 
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at 
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the cold 
wash cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
Rx, Ra, and Rn are the reported hot 
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at 
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the warm 
rinse cycle and the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFc, and 
TUFr are temperature use factors for extra hot wash, hot 
wash, warm wash, cold wash, and warm rinse temperature selections, 
respectively, and are as defined in Table 4.1.1.

                                      Table 4.1.1--Temperature Use Factors


----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max Wash Temp Available.......  <=135 [deg]F     <=135 [deg]F     <=135 [deg]F    135  135
                                                                                   [deg]F          [deg]F
                                (57.2 [deg]C)    (57.2 [deg]C)    (57.2 [deg]C)   (57.2 [deg]C)   (57.2 [deg]C)
No. Wash Temp Selections......  Single           2 Temps          2    3 Temps         3
                                                                   Temps                           Temps
TUFm (extra hot)..............  NA               NA               NA              0.14            0.05
TUFh (hot)....................  NA               0.63             0.14            NA              0.09
TUFw (warm)...................  NA               NA               0.49            0.49            0.49
TUFc (cold)...................  1.00             0.37             0.37            0.37            0.37

[[Page 204]]


TUFr (warm rinse).............  0.27             0.27             0.27            0.27            0.27
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for all maximum, 
average, and minimum water fill levels tested. Calculate the total per-
cycle hot water energy consumption for the maximum water fill level, 
HEmax, the minimum water fill level, HEmin, and 
the average water fill level, HEavg, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle and defined as:

(a) HEmax = [VhxxTxK]=Total energy when a maximum 
load is tested.
(b) HEavg = [VhaxTxK]=Total energy when an average 
load is tested.
(c) HEmin = [VhnxTxK]=Total energy when a minimum 
load is tested.

where:

T=Temperature rise=75 [deg]F (41.7 [deg]C).
K=Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon degree F=0.00240 
(0.00114 kWh/L-[deg]C).
Vhx Vha, and Vhn, are as defined in 
4.1.1.

    4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption. 
Calculate the total weighted per cycle hot water energy consumption, 
HET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

HET=[HEmaxxFmax]+[HEavgxFavg
]+[HEmnxFmin]

where:

HEmax, HEavg, and HEmin are as defined 
in 4.1.2.
Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are the load usage 
factors for the maximum, average, and minimum test loads based on the 
size and type of control system on the washer being tested. The values 
are as shown in table 4.1.3.

                     Table 4.1.3--Load Usage Factors
------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Water fill control system               Manual     Adaptive
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fmax =..........................................    0.72 \1\    0.12 \2\
Favg =..........................................  ..........    0.74 \2\
Fmin=...........................................    0.28 \1\    0.14 \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Reference 3.2.3.3.
\2\ Reference 3.2.3.2.

    4.1.4 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption using gas-heated 
or oil-heated water. Calculate for the energy test cycle the per-cycle 
hot water consumption, HETG, using gas heated or oil-heated 
water, expressed in Btu per cycle (or megajoules per cycle) and defined 
as:

HETG=HTx1/ex3412 Btu/kWh or 
HETG=HETx1/ex3.6 MJ/kWh

where:

e=Nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency=0.75.
HET=As defined in 4.1.3.

    4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for all 
maximum, average, and minimum test load sizes. Calculate the total per-
cycle machine electrical energy consumption for the maximum water fill 
level, MEmax, the minimum water fill level, MEmin, 
and the average water fill level, MEavg, expressed in 
kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

(a)MEmax= [EmxxTUFm]+ 
[EhxxTUFh]+ [EwxxTUFw]+ 
[EcxxTUFc]+ [ERxxTUFr]
(b) MEavg= [EmaxTUFm]+ 
[EhaxTUFh]+ [EwaxTUFw]+ 
[EcaxTUFc]+ [ERaxTUFr]
(c) MEmin= [EmnxTUFm]+ 
[EhnxTUFh]+ [EwnxTUFw]+ 
[EcnxxTUFc]+ [ERnxTUFr]

where:

Emx, Ema, and Emn, are reported 
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at 
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the extra-
hot wash cycle.
Ehx, Eha, and Ehn, are reported 
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at 
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the hot wash 
cycle.
Ewx, Ewa, and Ewn, are reported 
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at 
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the warm 
wash cycle.
Ecx, Eca, and Ecn, are reported 
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at 
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the cold 
wash cycle.
ERx, ERa, ERn, are reported electrical 
energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at maximum, 
average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the warm rinse cycle 
per definitions in 3.7.2 of this appendix.
TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFc, and 
TUFr are as defined in Table 4.1.1.

    4.1.6 Total weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy 
consumption. Calculate the total per cycle load size weighted energy 
consumption, MET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and 
defined as:

MET=[MEmaxx Fmax]+[MEavgx 
Favg]+[MEminx Fmin]

where:

MEmax, MEavg, and MEmin are as defined 
in 4.1.5.
Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in 
Table 4.1.3.


[[Page 205]]


    4.1.7 Total per-cycle energy consumption when electrically heated 
water is used. Calculate for the energy test cycle the total per-cycle 
energy consumption, ETE, using electrical heated water, 
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:

ETE=HET+MET

where:

MET=As defined in 4.1.6.
HET=As defined in 4.1.3.

    4.2 Water consumption of clothes washers. (The calculations in this 
Section need not be performed to determine compliance with the energy 
conservation standards for clothes washers.)
    4.2.1 Per-cycle water consumption. Calculate the maximum, average, 
and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or 
liters per cycle), for the cold wash/cold rinse cycle and defined as:

Qmax=[Hcx+Ccx]
Qavg=[Hca+Cca]
Qmin=[Hcn+Ccn]

where:

Hcx, Ccx, Hca, Cca, 
Hcn, and Ccn are as defined in 3.6.

    4.2.2 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption. Calculate the 
total weighted per cycle consumption, QT, expressed in 
gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as:

QT=[QmaxxFmax]+[QavgxFavg
]+[QminxFmin]

where:

Qmax, Qavg, and Qmin are as defined in 
4.2.1.
Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in 
table 4.1.3.

    4.2.3 Water consumption factor. Calculate the water consumption 
factor, WCF, expressed in gallon per cycle per cubic feet (or liter per 
cycle per liter), as:

WCF=QT / C

where:

QT=as defined in section 4.2.2.
C = as defined in section 3.1.5.

    4.3 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of moisture from test 
load. Calculate the per-cycle energy required to remove the moisture of 
the test load, DE, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and 
defined as

DE=(LAF)x(Maximum test load weight)x(RMC--4%)x(DEF)x(DUF)

where:

LAF=Load adjustment factor=0.52.
Test load weight=As required in 3.8.1, expressed in lbs/cycle.
RMC=As defined in 3.8.2.5, 3.8.3.3 or 3.8.4.
DEF=nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture from 
clothes=0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg).
DUF=dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes 
dryer=0.84.

    4.4 Modified energy factor. Calculate the modified energy factor, 
MEF, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle (or liters per 
kilowatt-hour per cycle) and defined as:

MEF=C/(ETE + DE)

where:

C=As defined in 3.1.5.
ETE=As defined in 4.1.7.
DE=As defined in 4.3.

    4.5 Energy factor. Calculate the energy factor, EF, expressed in 
cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle (or liters per kilowatt-hour per 
cycle) and defined as:

EF=C/ETE

where:

C=As defined in 3.1.5.
ETE=As defined in 4.1.7.

                              5. Test Loads

                                           Table 5.1--Test Load Sizes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     Container volume                         Minimum load      Maximum load      Average load
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             (liter)  = <             thn-eq>= <       lb      (kg)      lb      (kg)      lb      (kg)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0-0.8.....................................   0-22.7            3.00     1.36     3.00     1.36     3.00     1.36
0.80-0.90.................................  22.7-25.5          3.00     1.36     3.50     1.59     3.25     1.47
0.90-1.00.................................  25.5-28.3          3.00     1.36     3.90     1.77     3.45     1.56
1.00-1.10.................................  28.3-31.1          3.00     1.36     4.30     1.95     3.65     1.66
1.10-1.20.................................  31.1-34.0          3.00     1.36     4.70     2.13     3.85     1.75
1.20-1.30.................................  34.0-36.8          3.00     1.36     5.10     2.31     4.05     1.84
1.30-1.40.................................  36.8-39.6          3.00     1.36     5.50     2.49     4.25     1.93
1.40-1.50.................................  39.6-42.5          3.00     1.36     5.90     2.68     4.45     2.02
1.50-1.60.................................  42.5-45.3          3.00     1.36     6.40     2.90     4.70     2.13
1.60-1.70.................................  45.3-48.1          3.00     1.36     6.80     3.08     4.90     2.22
1.70-1.80.................................  48.1-51.0          3.00     1.36     7.20     3.27     5.10     2.31
1.80-1.90.................................  51.0-53.8          3.00     1.36     7.60     3.45     5.30     2.40
1.90-2.00.................................  53.8-56.6          3.00     1.36     8.00     3.63     5.50     2.49
2.00-2.10.................................  56.6-59.5          3.00     1.36     8.40     3.81     5.70     2.59
2.10-2.20.................................  59.5-62.3          3.00     1.36     8.80     3.99     5.90     2.68
2.20-2.30.................................  62.3-65.1          3.00     1.36     9.20     4.17     6.10     2.77

[[Page 206]]


2.30-2.40.................................  65.1-68.0          3.00     1.36     9.60     4.35     6.30     2.86
2.40-2.50.................................  68.0-70.8          3.00     1.36    10.00     4.54     6.50     2.95
2.50-2.60.................................  70.8-73.6          3.00     1.36    10.50     4.76     6.75     3.06
2.60-2.70.................................  73.6-76.5          3.00     1.36    10.90     4.94     6.95     3.15
2.70-2.80.................................  76.5-79.3          3.00     1.36    11.30     5.13     7.15     3.24
2.80-2.90.................................  79.3-82.1          3.00     1.36    11.70     5.31     7.35     3.33
2.90-3.00.................................  82.1-85.0          3.00     1.36    12.10     5.49     7.55     3.42
3.00-3.10.................................  85.0-87.8          3.00     1.36    12.50     5.67     7.75     3.52
3.10-3.20.................................  87.8-90.6          3.00     1.36    12.90     5.85     7.95     3.61
3.20-3.30.................................  90.6-93.4          3.00     1.36    13.30     6.03     8.15     3.70
3.30-3.40.................................  93.4-96.3          3.00     1.36    13.70     6.21     8.35     3.79
3.40-3.50.................................  96.3-99.1          3.00     1.36    14.10     6.40     8.55     3.88
3.50-3.60.................................  99.1-101.9         3.00     1.36    14.60     6.62     8.80     3.99
3.60-3.70.................................  101.9-104.8        3.00     1.36    15.00     6.80     9.00     4.08
3.70-3.80.................................  104.8-107.6        3.00     1.36    15.40     6.99     9.20     4.17
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
(1) All test load weights are bone dry weights.
(2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights are 0.10 lbs (0.05 kg).

                      6. Waivers and Field Testing

    6.1 Waivers and Field Testing for Non-conventional Clothes Washers. 
Manufacturers of nonconventional clothes washers, such as clothes 
washers with adaptive control systems, must submit a petition for waiver 
pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for 
that clothes washer. For these and other clothes washers that have 
controls or systems such that the DOE test procedures yield results that 
are so unrepresentative of the clothes washer's true energy consumption 
characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data, 
field testing may be appropriate for establishing an acceptable test 
procedure. The following are guidelines for field testing which may be 
used by manufacturers in support of petitions for waiver. These 
guidelines are not mandatory and the Department may determine that they 
do not apply to a particular model. Depending upon a manufacturer's 
approach for conducting field testing, additional data may be required. 
Manufacturers are encouraged to communicate with the Department prior to 
the commencement of field tests which may be used to support a petition 
for waiver. Section 6.3 provides an example of field testing for a 
clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system. Other 
features, such as the use of various spin speed selections, could be the 
subject of field tests.
    6.2 Nonconventional Wash System Energy Consumption Test. The field 
test may consist of a minimum of 10 of the nonconventional clothes 
washers (``test clothes washers'') and 10 clothes washers already being 
distributed in commerce (``base clothes washers''). The tests should 
include a minimum of 50 energy test cycles per clothes washer. The test 
clothes washers and base clothes washers should be identical in 
construction except for the controls or systems being tested. Equal 
numbers of both the test clothes washer and the base clothes washer 
should be tested simultaneously in comparable settings to minimize 
seasonal or consumer laundering conditions or variations. The clothes 
washers should be monitored in such a way as to accurately record the 
total energy consumption per cycle. At a minimum, the following should 
be measured and recorded throughout the test period for each clothes 
washer: Hot water usage in gallons (or liters), electrical energy usage 
in kilowatt-hours, and the cycles of usage.
    The field test results would be used to determine the best method to 
correlate the rating of the test clothes washer to the rating of the 
base clothes washer. If the base clothes washer is rated at A kWh per 
year, but field tests at B kWh per year, and the test clothes washer 
field tests at D kWh per year, the test unit would be rated as follows:

Ax(D/B)=G kWh per year

    6.3 Adaptive water fill control system field test. Section 3.2.3.1 
defines the test method for measuring energy consumption for clothes 
washers which incorporate control systems having both adaptive and 
alternate cycle selections. Energy consumption calculated by the method 
defined in section 3.2.3.1 assumes the adaptive cycle will be used 50 
percent of the time. This section can be used to develop field test data 
in support of a petition for waiver when it is believed that the 
adaptive cycle will be used more than 50 percent of the time. The field 
test sample size should be a minimum of 10 test clothes washers. The 
test clothes washers should be totally representative of the design, 
construction, and control system that

[[Page 207]]

will be placed in commerce. The duration of field testing in the user's 
house should be a minimum of 50 energy test cycles, for each unit. No 
special instructions as to cycle selection or product usage should be 
given to the field test participants, other than inclusion of the 
product literature pack which would be shipped with all units, and 
instructions regarding filling out data collection forms, use of data 
collection equipment, or basic procedural methods. Prior to the test 
clothes washers being installed in the field test locations, baseline 
data should be developed for all field test units by conducting 
laboratory tests as defined by section 1 through section 5 of these test 
procedures to determine the energy consumption, water consumption, and 
remaining moisture content values. The following data should be measured 
and recorded for each wash load during the test period: wash cycle 
selected, the mode of the clothes washer (adaptive or manual), clothes 
load dry weight (measured after the clothes washer and clothes dryer 
cycles are completed) in pounds, and type of articles in the clothes 
load (e.g., cottons, linens, permanent press). The wash loads used in 
calculating the in-home percentage split between adaptive and manual 
cycle usage should be only those wash loads which conform to the 
definition of the energy test cycle.
    Calculate:

T=The total number of energy test cycles run during the field test
Ta=The total number of adaptive control energy test cycles
Tm=The total number of manual control energy test cycles

    The percentage weighting factors:

Pa=(Ta/T)x100 (the percentage weighting for 
adaptive control selection)

Pm=(Tm/T)x100 (the percentage weighting for manual 
control selection)


    Energy consumption (HET, MET, and 
DE) and water consumption (QT), values calculated 
in section 4 for the manual and adaptive modes, should be combined using 
Pa and Pm as the weighting factors.

[62 FR 45508, Aug. 27, 1997; 63 FR 16669, Apr. 6, 1998, as amended at 66 
FR 3330, Jan. 12, 2001; 68 FR 62204, Oct. 31, 2003; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 
2004]

           Appendixes K-L to Subpart B of Part 430 [Reserved]

 Appendix M to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
           the Energy Consumption of Central Air Conditioners

                             1. Definitions

    1.1 ``Annual performance factor'' means the total heating and 
cooling done by a heat pump in a particular region in one year divided 
by the total electric power used in one year.
    1.2 ``ARI'' means Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
    1.3 ``ARI Standard 210-79'' means the test standard published in 
1979 by the ARI and titled ``Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning 
Equipment''.
    1.4 ``ARI Standard 240-77'' means the test standard published in 
1977 by the ARI and titled ``Standard for Air-Source Unitary Heat Pump 
Equipment''.
    1.5 ``ARI Standard 320-76'' means the test standard published in 
1976 by the ARI and titled ``Standard for Water-Source Heat Pumps''. The 
single number HSPF energy conservation standard for central air 
conditioning heat pumps specified in section 325(d)(2) (A) and (B) is 
based on Region IV and the standardized DHR found in section 6 of this 
appendix, nearest the capacity measured in the 47 [deg]F test.
    1.6 ``ASHRAE'' means the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration 
and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
    1.7 ``ASHRAE Standard 37-78'' means the test standard published by 
ASHRAE in 1978 and titled ``Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air-
Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.''
    1.8 ``Continuously recorded'' means a method of recording 
measurements in intervals no greater than 5 seconds.
    1.9 ``Cooling load factor (CLF)'' means the ratio of the total 
cooling done in a complete cycle of a specified time period, consisting 
of an ``on'' time and ``off'' time, to the steady-state cooling done 
over the same period at constant ambient conditions.
    1.10 ``Cyclic Test'' means a test where the indoor and outdoor 
conditions are held constant, but the unit is manually turned ``on'' and 
``off'' for specific time periods to simulate part-load operation.
    1.11 ``Degradation coefficient (CD)'' means the measure 
of the efficiency loss due to the cycling of the unit.

[[Page 208]]

    1.12 ``Demand-defrost control system'' means a system which is 
designed to perform the defrost function on the outdoor coil of the heat 
pump only when a predetermined degradation of performance is measured.
    1.13 ``Design heating requirement (DHR)'' is the amount of heating 
required to maintain a given indoor temperature at a particular outdoor 
design temperature.
    1.14 ``Dry-coil test'' means a test conducted at a wet-bulb 
temperature and a dry-bulb temperature such that moisture will not 
condense on the evaporator coil of the unit.
    1.15 ``Heating seasonal performance factor (HSPF)'' means the total 
heating output of a heat pump during its normal annual usage period for 
heating divided by the total electric power input during the same 
period.
    1.16 ``Heating load factor (HLF)'' means the ratio of the total 
heating done in a complete cycle of a specified time period, consisting 
of an ``on'' time ``off'' time, to the steady state heating done over 
the same period at constant ambient conditions.
    1.17 ``Latent cooling'' means the amount of cooling in Btu's 
necessary to remove water vapor from the air passing over the indoor 
coil by condensation during a period of time.
    1.18 ``Part-load factor (PLF)'' means the ratio of the cyclic energy 
efficiency ratio to the steady-state energy efficiency ratio at 
identical ambient conditions.
    1.19 ``Seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER)'' means the total 
cooling of a central air conditioner in Btu's during its normal annual 
usage period for cooling divided by the total electric power input in 
watt-hours during the same period.
    1.20 ``Sensible cooling'' means the amount of cooling in Btu's 
performed by a unit over a period of time, excluding latent cooling.
    1.21 ``Single package unit'' means any central air conditioner in 
which all the major assemblies are enclosed in one cabinet.
    1.22 ``Split system'' means any central air conditioner in which one 
or more of the major assemblies are separate from the others.
    1.23 ``Steady-state test'' means a test in which all indoor and 
outdoor conditions are held constant and the unit is in non-changing 
operating mode.
    1.24 ``Temperature bin'' means a 5 [deg]F increment over a dry-bulb 
temperature range of 65 [deg]F through 104 [deg]F for the cooling cycle 
and -25 [deg]F through 64 [deg]F for the heating cycle.
    1.25 ``Time-temperature defrost control system'' means a system 
which automatically provides the defrost function at a predetermined 
time interval whenever the outdoor temperature drops below a level where 
frosting will occur.
    1.26 ``Test condition tolerance'' means the maximum permissible 
variation of the average of the test observations from the standard or 
desired test condition as provided in 6.1.1, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, and 6.2.3 of 
this Appendix.
    1.27 ``Test operating tolerance'' means the maximum permissible 
difference between the maximum and the minimum instrument observation 
during a test as provided in 6.1.1, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, and 6.2.3 of this 
Appendix.
    1.28 ``Wet-coil test'' means a test conducted at a wet-bulb 
temperature and a dry-bulb temperature such that moisture will condense 
on the test unit evaporator coil.

                           2. Testing Required

    2.1 Testing required for air source cooling only units. Two steady 
state wet coil tests required to be performed, test A and test B. Test A 
is to be conducted as an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 95 [deg] F and 
test B at 82 [deg] F. Test C and D are optional tests to be conducted 
when cyclic performance parameters are to be measured in order to 
determine the degradation coefficient, CD Test C is a steady state dry 
coil test conducted at an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F. 
Test D is a cyclic test also conducted at an outdoor dry bulb 
temperature of 82 [deg] F. In lieu of conducting tests C and D, an 
assigned value of 0.25 may be used for the degradation coefficient, CD.
    2.1.1 Testing required for units with single speed compressors and 
single speed condenser fans. Test A and test B shall be performed 
according to the test procedures outlined in 4.1 of this Appendix. In 
addition, the cyclic performance shall be evaluated by conducting test C 
and D according to the requirements outlined in 4.1 of this Appendix.
    2.1.2 Testing required for units with single speed compressors and 
multiple-speed condenser fans. The test requirements for multiple-speed 
condenser fan units shall be the same as described in section 2.1.1 for 
single speed condensor fan units.
    2.1.3 Testing required for units with two-speed compressors, two 
compressors, or cylinder unloading. The test requirements for two-speed 
compressor units, two compressor units, or units with cylinder unloading 
are the same as described in 2.1.1 of this Appendix except that test A 
and test B shall be performed at each compressor speed or at each 
compressor capacity.
    2.1.4 Testing required for units with two-speed compressors, two 
compressors, or cylinder unloading capable of varying the sensible to 
total (S/T) capacity ratio. When a unit employing a two-speed 
compressor, two compressors, or cylinder unloading provides a method of 
varying the ratio of the sensible cooling capacity to the total cooling 
capacity, (S/T), the test requirements are the same as for two-speed 
compressor units as described in 2.1.3 of this Appendix.

[[Page 209]]

    2.1.5 Testing required for units with triple-capacity compressors. 
(Reserved)
    2.1.6 Testing required for units with variable-speed compressors. 
The tests for variable-speed equipment consist of five (5) wet coil 
tests and two (2) dry coil tests. Two of the wet coil tests, A and B, 
are conducted at the maximum speed. Two wet coil tests, B2 
and low temperature test, are conducted at the minimum speed. The fifth 
wet coil test is conducted at an intermediate speed. Dry coil tests, C 
and D, are conducted at the minimum speed if the coefficient of 
degradation (CD) value of 0.25 is not adopted. The test 
conditions and procedures for the above are outlined in sections 3.1 and 
4.1 of this Appendix.
    2.1.7 Testing required for split-type ductless systems. The tests 
for split-type ductless systems are determined by the type of compressor 
installed in the outdoor unit. For the appropriate tests refer to 
sections 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, or 2.1.6 of this Appendix.
    2.2 Testing required for air source heating only units. Four types 
of tests are required to be performed: High Temperature, Cyclic, Frost 
Accumulation, and Low Temperature. In lieu of conducting the Cyclic Test 
an assigned value of 0.25 may be used for the degradation coefficient, 
CD.
    2.2.1 Testing required for units with single speed compressors. 
Units with single speed compressors shall be subjected respectively to 
the High Temperature Test at 47 [deg] F described in section 3.2.1.1, 
the Cyclic Test as described in section 3.2.1.2, the Frost Accumulation 
Test as described in section 3.2.1.3, and the Low Temperature Test as 
described in section 3.2.1.4.
    2.2.2 Testing required for units with two-speed compressors, two 
compressors, or cylinder unloading. With the unit operating: at high 
compressors speed (two-speed compressor), with both compressors in 
operation (two-compressors), or at the maximum capacity (cylinder 
unloading); the following tests are required to be performed on all 
units; the High Temperature Test at 47 [deg] F, the Frost Accumulation 
Test, and the Low Temperature Test. An additional test (cyclic at 47 
[deg] F) is required, with the unit operating at the high compressor 
speed (two-speed compressor), with both compressors in operation (two 
compressors), or at the maximum capacity (cylinder unloading); if the 
normal mode of operation requires cycling ``on'' and ``off'' of the 
compressor(s) at high speed or maximum capacity.
    With the unit operating: at the low compressor speed (two-speed 
compressor), with the single compressor which normally operates at low 
loads (two compressors), or at the low compressor capacity (cylinder 
unloading); the following tests are required to be performed on all 
units: the High Temperature Test at 47 [deg] F, the High Temperature 
Test at 62 [deg] F, and the Cyclic Test. Additional tests, (Frost 
Accumulation Test and Low Temperature Test) are required, with the unit 
operating: on low compressor speed (two-speed compressor), with the 
single compressor which normally operates at low loads (two compressors) 
or at the low compressor capacity (cylinder unloading), if the unit's 
low speed, one compressor or low capacity performance at and below 40 
[deg] F is needed to calculate its seasonal performance.
    2.2.3 Testing required for units with triple-capacity compressors. 
(Reserved)
    2.2.4 Testing required for units with variable-speed compressors. 
There are seven basic tests and one optional test for variable-speed 
units. Three tests (high temperature test, low temperature test, and 
frost accumulation test) are performed at the maximum speed. Three tests 
(two high temperature and one cyclic test) are performed with the unit 
operating at minimum speed. A second frost accumulation test is 
performed at an intermediate speed. The intermediate speed is the same 
as in the cooling mode.
    In lieu of the maximum speed frost accumulation test, two equations 
are provided in section 4.2 of this Appendix. In lieu of the cyclic test 
an assigned value of 0.25 may be used for the coefficient of degradation 
CD. The optional test is a nominal capacity test applicable 
to units which have a heating mode maximum speed greater than the 
cooling mode maximum speed. The conditions and procedures for the above 
tests are described in sections 3.2 and 4.2 respectively, of this 
Appendix.
    2.2.5 Testing required for split-type ductless system. The type of 
compressor installed in the outdoor unit determines the testing 
required, refer to previous sections 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 2.2.3, or 2.2.4. The 
conditions and procedures will be modified as indicated for the various 
types as stated in sections 3.2 and 4.2 respectively.
    2.3 Testing required for air source units which provide both heating 
and cooling. The requirements for units which provide both heating and 
cooling shall be the same as the requirements in Section 2.1. and 2.2 of 
this Appendix.

                          3. Testing Conditions

    3.1 Testing conditions for air source cooling only units. The test 
room requirement and equipment installation procedures are the same as 
those specified in sections 11.1 and 11.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78. 
Units designed for both horizontal and vertical installation shall be 
tested in the orientation in which they are most frequently installed. 
All tests shall be performed at the normal residential voltage and 
frequency for which the equipment is designed (either 115 or 230 volts 
and 60 hertz), the test installation shall be designed such that there 
will be no air flow through the cooling coil due to natural or forced 
convection while the indoor fan is

[[Page 210]]

``off''. This shall be accomplished by installing dampers upstream and 
downstream of the test unit to block the off period air flow. Values of 
capacity for rating purposes are to be rounded off to the nearest 100 
Btu/hour for capacities less than 20,000 Btu/hour; to the nearest 200 
Btu/hour for capacities between 20,000 and 37,999 Btu/hour; and to the 
nearest 500 Btu/hour for capacities between 38,000 and 64,999 Btu/hour.
    The following conditions listed in ARI Standard 210.79 shall apply 
to all tests performed in Section 3.1 of this Appendix:

5.1.3.4 Cooling Coil Air Quantity.
5.1.3.6 Requirements for Separated Assemblies.

3.1.1 Testing conditions for units with single speed compressors and 
single speed condenser fans.
    3.1.1.1 Steady state wet-coil performance tests (Test A and Test B). 
Test A and test B shall be performed with the air entering the indoor 
side of the unit having a dry-bulb temperature of 80 [deg] F and a wet-
bulb temperature of 87 [deg] F. The dry-bulb temperature of the air 
entering the outdoor side of the unit shall be 95 [deg] F in test A and 
82 [deg] F in test B. The temperature of the air surrounding the outdoor 
side of the unit in each test shall be the same as the outdoor entering 
air temperature except for units or sections thereof intended to be 
installed only indoors, in which case the dry-bulb temperature 
surrounding that indoor side of the unit shall be 80 [deg] F. For those 
units which reject condensate to the condenser, located in the outdoor 
side of the unit, the outdoor wet-bulb temperature surrounding the 
outdoor side of the unit shall be 75 [deg] F in test A and 65 [deg] F in 
test B.
    3.1.1.2 Steady state dry coil performance test (Test C) and cyclic 
dry coil performance test (Test D). Test C and test D shall be performed 
with the air entering the indoor side of the unit having a dry-bulb 
temperature of 80 [deg] F and a wet-bulb temperature which does not 
result in formation of condensate on the indoor coil. (It is recommended 
that an indoor wet-bulb temperature of 57 [deg] F or less be used.) The 
dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the outdoor portion of the unit 
shall be 82 [deg] F. The outdoor portion of the unit shall be subject to 
the same conditions as the requirements for conducting test B as stated 
previously in section 3.1.1.1. Test C shall be conducted with the unit 
operating steadily. Test D shall be conducted by cycling the unit ``on'' 
and ``off'' by manual or automatic operation of the normal control 
circuit of the unit. The unit shall cycle with the compressor ``on'' for 
6 minutes and ``off'' for 24 minutes. The indoor fan shall also cycle 
``on'' and ``off'', the duration of the indoor fan ``on'' and ``off'' 
periods being governed by the automatic controls which the manufacturer 
normally supplies with the unit. The results of tests C and D shall be 
used to calculate a degradation coefficient, CD by the 
procedures outlined in 5.1 of this Appendix.
    3.1.2 Testing conditions for units with single speed compressors and 
multiple-speed condenser fans. The condenser fan speed to be used in 
test A shall be that speed which normally occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb 
temperature of 95 [deg] F, and for test B, the fan speed shall be that 
which normally occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F. 
If elected to be performed, tests C and D shall be conducted at the same 
condenser fan speed as in test B.
    3.1.3 Testing conditions for units with two-speed compressors, two 
compressors, or cylinder unloading. The condenser fan speed used in 
conducting test A at each compressor speed shall be that which normally 
occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 95 [deg] F. For test B, the 
condenser fan speed at each compressor speed shall be that which 
normally occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F. If 
elected to be performed, tests C and D shall be conducted at the low 
compressor speed with the same condenser fan speed as used in test B. 
For those two-speed units in which the normal mode of operation involves 
cycling the compressor ``on'' and ``off'' at high speed, tests C and D 
shall also be performed with the compressor operating at high speed and 
at a condenser fan speed that normally occurs at test A ambient 
conditions. Units consisting of two compressors are subject to the same 
requirements as those units containing two-speed compressors, except 
that when operated at high speed, both compressors shall be operating 
and when operating at low speed, only the compressor which normally 
operates at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F shall be 
operating.
    In lieu of conducting tests C and D, an assigned value of 0.25 may 
be used for the degradation coefficient, CD , at each 
compressor speed. If the assigned degradation coefficient is used for 
one compressor speed it must also be used for the other compressor 
speed.
    In the case of units with cylinder unloading, the loaded and the 
unloaded conditions correspond to high and low compressor speed on two-
speed units respectively.
    3.1.4 Testing conditions for units with two-speed compressors, two 
compressors, or cylinder unloading capable of varying the sensible to 
total (S/T) capacity ratio. The mode of operation selected for 
controlling the S/T ratio in the performance of test A and test B at 
each compressor speed shall be such that it does not result in an 
operating configuration which is not typical of a normal residential 
installation. If elected to be performed, tests C and D shall be 
conducted at low compressor speed (single compressor operating) with the 
same S/T control mode as used in test B when performed at the low 
compressor

[[Page 211]]

speed. Likewise, tests C and D shall also be conducted at high 
compressor speed (two compressors operating) and with the same S/T 
control mode as in test A when performed at the high compressor speed.
    In the case of units with cylinder unloading, the loaded and 
unloaded conditions correspond to high and low compressor speed on two-
speed units respectively.
    3.1.5 Testing conditions for units with triple-capacity compressors. 
(Reserved)
    3.1.6 Additional testing conditions for cooling-only units with 
variable-speed compressors. For cooling-only units and air-source heat 
pumps with varaible-speed compressors, the air flow rate at fan speeds 
less than the maximum fan speed shall be determined by using the fan law 
for a fixed resistance system. The air flow rate is given by the ratio 
of the actual fan speed to the maximum fan speed multiplied by the air 
flow rate at the maximum fan speed. Minimum static pressure requirements 
only apply when the fan is running at the maximum speed.
    3.1.6.1 Testing conditions for steady-state wet coil tests. Tests A 
and B shall be performed at the maximum speed at conditions specified in 
section 3.1.1 of this Appendix. Test B2 and the low 
temperature test are performed at the minimum speed with outdoor dry 
bulb temperatures of 82 [deg]F and 67 [deg]F respectively. The 
intermediate speed wet coil test is performed at the outdoor dry bulb 
temperature of 87 [deg]F. For units which reject condensate the outdoor 
wet bulb temperature shall be maintained at 75 [deg]F for Test A, 65 
[deg]F for Tests B and B2, 53.5 [deg]F for the low 
temperature test and 69 [deg]F for the intermediate test. The indoor 
conditions for all wet coil tests are the same as those given in section 
3.1.1 of this Appendix.
    3.1.6.2 Test conditions for dry coil tests. Dry coil Tests C and D 
are conducted at an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 67 [deg]F. For units 
which reject condensate the outdoor wet bulb temperature shall be 
maintained at 53.5 [deg]F. The indoor dry bulb temperature shall be 80 
[deg]F and the wet bulb temperature shall be sufficiently low so no 
condensation occurs on the evaporator (It is recommended that an indoor 
wet bulb temperature of 57 [deg]F or less be used).
    3.1.7 Split-type ductless systems. Test conditions shall be the same 
as those specified for the same single outdoor unit compressor type, 
assuming it was matched with a single indoor coil.
    3.1.7.1 Interconnection. For split-type ductless systems, all 
standard rating tests shall be performed with a minimum length of 25 
feet of interconnecting tubing between each indoor fan-coil unit and the 
common outdoor unit. Such equipment in which the interconnection tubing 
is furnished as an integral part of the machine not recommended for 
cutting to length shall be tested with complete length of tubing 
furnished, or with 25 feet of tubing, whichever is greater. At least 10 
feet of the interconnection tubing shall be exposed to the outside 
conditions. The line sizes, insulation and details of installation shall 
be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendation.
    3.1.7.2 Control testing conditions for split-type ductless systems. 
For split-type ductless systems, a single control circuit shall be 
substituted for any multiple thermostats in order to maintain a uniform 
cycling rate during test D and the high temperature heating cyclic test. 
During the steady-state tests, all thermostats shall be shunted 
resulting in all indoor fan-coil units being in operation.
    3.1.7.3 Split-type ductless systems with multiple coils or multiple 
discharge outlets shall have short plenums attached to each outlet. Each 
plenum shall discharge into a single common duct section, the duct 
section in turn discharging into the air measuring device (or a suitable 
dampering device when direct air measurement is not employed). Each 
plenum shall have an adjustable restrictor located in the plane where 
the plenums enter the common duct section for the purpose of equalizing 
the static pressures in each plenum. The length of the plenum is a 
minimum of 2.5x(AxB).5, A=width and B=height of duct or 
outlet. Static pressure readings are taken at a distance of 
2x(AxB).5 from the outlet.
    3.2 Testing conditions for air source heating only units. The 
equipment under test shall be installed according to the requirements of 
Section 11.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78 and Section 5.1.4.5 of ARI 
Standard 240-77. Test chamber requirements are the same as given in 
Section 11.1 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78. Units designed for both 
horizontal and vertical installation shall be tested in the orientation 
in which they are most often installed. All tests shall be performed at 
the normal residential voltage and frequency for which the equipment is 
designed (either 115 or 230 volts and 60 hertz). Values of capacity for 
rating purposes are to be rounded off to the nearest 100 Btu/hour for 
capacities less than 20,000 Btu/hour; to the nearest 200 Btu/hour for 
capacities between 20,000 and 37,999 Btu/hour; and to the nearest 500 
Btu/hour for capacities between 38,000 and 64,999 Btu/hour.
    3.2.1 Testing conditions for units with single speed compressors.
    3.2.1.1 High temperature test conditions. The High Temperature Test 
at 47 [deg] F shall be conducted at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 
47 [deg] F and an outdoor wet-bulb temperature at 43 [deg] F. The High 
Temperature Test at 62 [deg] F shall be conducted at an outdoor dry-bulb 
temperature of 62 [deg] F and an outdoor wet-bulb temperature of 56.5 
[deg] F. For both tests, the dry-bulb air temperature entering and 
surrounding the indoor portion of the unit shall be 70 [deg] F and a 
maximum wet-bulb

[[Page 212]]

temperature of 60 [deg] F. The duration of the tests shall be for a 
minimum of \1/2\ hour.
    3.2.1.2 Cycling test conditions. The Cycling Test at 47 [deg]F shall 
be conducted at the same dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperature as the High 
Temperature Test at 47 [deg]F as described in 3.2.1.1. During the 
Cycling Test, the indoor fan shall cycle ``on'' and ``off'', as the 
compressor cycles ``on'' and ``off'', except that the indoor fan cycling 
times may be delayed due to controls that are normally installed with 
the unit. The compressor cycling times shall be 6 minutes ``On'' and 24 
minutes ``off.'' The test installation shall be designed such that there 
will be no airflow through the indoor unit due to natural or forced 
convection while the indoor fan is ``off.'' This shall be accomplished 
by installing dampers upstream and downstream of the test unit to block 
the off period airflow.
    3.2.1.3 Frost accumulation test conditions. The dry-bulb temperature 
and the resultant dew-point temperature of the air entering the outdoor 
portion of the unit shall be 35 [deg]F and 30 [deg]F respectively. The 
indoor dry-bulb temperature shall be 70 [deg]F and the maximum indoor 
wet-bulb temperature shall be 60 [deg]F. The Frost Accumulation Test 
requires that the unit undergo a defrost prior to the actual test. The 
test then begins at defrost termination and ends at the next defrost 
termination. Defrost termination occurs when the controls normally 
installed within the unit are actuated to cause it to change defrost 
operation to normal heating operation. During the test, auxiliary 
resistance heaters shall not be employed during either the heating or 
defrost portion of the test.
    3.2.1.4 Low temperature test conditions. The Low Temperature Test 
shall be conducted at a dry-bulb temperature entering the outdoor 
portion of the unit of 17 [deg]F and a wet-bulb temperature of 15 
[deg]F. The air entering the indoor portion of the unit shall have a 
dry-bulb temperature of 70 [deg]F and a maximum wet-bulb temperature of 
60 [deg]F.
    3.2.1.5 Additional testing conditions. All tests shall be conducted 
at the indoor-side air quantities specified in Sections 4.1.4.3 and 
5.1.4.6 and Table 2 of ARI Standard 240-77. The following conditions 
listed in ARI Standard 240-77 shall apply to all tests performed in 
Section 3.2 of this Appendix.

    3.2.3 Testing conditions for units with triple-capacity compressors. 
(Reserved)
    3.2.4 Testing conditions for units with variable-speed compressors. 
The testing condition for variable-speed compressors shall be the same 
as those for single speed units as described in section 3.2.1 of this 
Appendix with the following exceptions; the cyclic test is performed 
with an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 62 [deg]F and a wet bulb 
temperature of 56.5 [deg]F. The optional, nominal capacity test shall be 
performed at the conditions specified for the 47 [deg]F high temperature 
test.
    3.2.5 Testing conditions for split-type ductless system. The testing 
conditions for split-type ductless systems shall be based on the type of 
compressor installed in the single outdoor unit. The heating mode shall 
have the same piping and control requirements as in 3.1.7.
5.4.4.4 Outdoor-Side Air Quantity; and
5.1.4.5 Requirements for Separated Assemblies.

In all tests, the specified dry-bulb temperature entering the outdoor 
portion of the unit also applies to the air temperature surrounding the 
outdoor portion of the unit. Similarly, models where portions are 
intended to be installed indoors shall have the air temperature 
surrounding that portion of the unit the same as the indoor air 
temperature.
    3.2.2 Testing conditions for units with two-speed compressors, two 
compressors or cylinder unloading. The testing conditions for two-speed 
compressors, two compressors, or cylinder unloading shall be the same as 
those for single speed units as described in 3.2.1.
    3.3 Testing conditions for air source units which provide both 
heating and cooling. The testing conditions for units which provide both 
heating and cooling shall be the same as the requirements in Sections 
3.1 and 3.2 of this Appendix.
    4.0 Testing procedures. Measure all electrical inputs as described 
in the procedures below. All electrical measurements during all ``on'' 
and ``off'' periods shall include auxiliary power or energy (controls, 
transformers, crankcase heaters, etc.) delivered to the unit.
    4.1 Test procedures for air source cooling-only units. All steady-
state wet- and dry-coil performance tests on single package units shall 
simultaneously employ the Air-Enthalpy Method (Section 3 of ASHRAE 
Standard 37-78) on the indoor side and one other method consisting of 
either the Air-Enthalpy Method or the Compressor Calibration Method 
(Section 4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78 on the outdoor side. All steady-
state wet- and dry-coil performance tests on split systems shall 
simultaneously employ the Air-Enthalpy Method or the Compressor 
Calibration Method on the indoor side and the Air-Enthalpy Method, the 
Compressor Calibration Method or the Volatile Refrigerant Flow Method 
(Section 5 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78) on the outside. All cyclic dry-coil 
performance tests shall employ the Air-Enthalpy Method, indoor side 
only. The values calculated from the two test methods must agree within 
6 percent in order to constitute a valid test. Only the results from the 
Air-Enthalpy Method on the indoor side shall be used in the calculations 
in Section 5.1. Units shall be installed and tested in such a manner 
that when operated under steady-state conditions, the cooling coil and 
condenser

[[Page 213]]

coil air flows meet the requirements of Sections 5.1.3.4, 5.1.3.5, and 
5.1.3.7 of ARI Standard 210.79.
    4.1.1 Test operating procedures.
    4.1.1.1 Steady-state wet-coil performance tests (Test A and Test B). 
Steady-state wet-coil performance tests (A and B) shall be conducted in 
accordance with the conditions described in sections 3.1.1.1, 3.1.2, 
3.1.3, 3.1.4, and 3.1.5 of this Appendix and the procedures described 
for cooling tests in Section 11.3 of ASHRAE standard 37-78 and evaluated 
in accordance with the cooling-related requirements of Section 12 of the 
ASHRAE Standard 37-78. The test room reconditioning apparatus and the 
equipment under test shall be operated until equilibrium conditions are 
attained.
    4.1.1.2 Steady-state and cyclic dry-coil performance tests (Test C 
and Test D). The steady-state and cyclic dry-coil tests (C and D) shall 
be conducted as described below in accordance with the conditions 
described in sections 3.1.1.2, 3.1.2, 3.1.3, 3.1.4, and 3.1.5 of this 
Appendix. The results shall be evaluated in accordance with the cooling 
related requirements of Sections 12.1.5, 12.1.6, 12.1.7, of ASHRAE 
Standard 37.78. The test room reconditioning apparatus and the equipment 
under test shall be operated until equilibrium conditions are attained, 
but not for less than one hour before data for test C are recorded. For 
all equipment test methods including the Compressor Calibration Method, 
test C shall be performed with data recorded at 10-minute intervals 
until four consecutive sets of readings are attained with the tolerance 
prescribed in Section 11.6 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78. When the Air-
Enthalpy Method is used on the outdoor side for test C, the requirements 
of this section shall apply to both the preliminary test and the regular 
equipment test; the requirements of Section 3.6 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78 
shall also apply. Immediately after test C is completed the test unit 
shall be manually cycled ``off'' and ``on'' using the time periods from 
3.1.1 of this Appendix until steadily repeating ambient conditions are 
again achieved in both the indoor and outdoor test chambers, but for not 
less than 2 complete ``off''/``on'' cycles. Without a break in the 
cycling pattern, the unit shall be run through an additional ``off''/
``on'' cycle during which the test data required in 5.1 shall be 
recorded. During this last cycle, which is referred to as the test 
cycle, the indoor and outdoor test room ambient conditions shall remain 
within the tolerances specified in 4.1.3 of this Appendix during the 
cyclic dry-coil tests, all air moving equipment on the condenser side 
shall cycle ``on'' and ``off'' when the compressor cycles ``on'' and 
``off''. The indoor air moving equipment shall also cycle ``off'' as 
governed by any automatic controls normally installed with the unit. 
This last requirement applies to units having an indoor fan time delay. 
Units not supplied with an indoor fan time delay shall have the indoor 
air moving equipment cycle ``on'' and ``off'' as the compressor cycles 
``on'' and ``off.''
    Cooling cyclic tests for variable-speed units shall be conducted by 
cycling the compressor 12 minutes ``on'' and 48 minutes ``off''. The 
capacity shall be measured for the integration time ([thetas]), which is 
the compressor ``on'' time of 12 minutes or the ``on'' time as extended 
by fan delay, if so equipped. The electrical energy shall be measured 
for the total integration time ([thetas]cyc) of 60 minutes. 
In lieu of conducting C and D tests, an assigned value of 0.25 shall be 
used for the degradation coefficient for cooling, CD.
    4.1.1.3 Testing procedures for triple-capacity compressors. 
(Reserved)
    4.1.1.4 Intermediate cooling steady-state test for units with 
variable-speed compressors. For units with variable-speed compressors, 
an intermediate cooling steady-state test shall be conducted in which 
the unit shall be operated at a constant, intermediate compressor speed 
(k=i) in which the dry/bulb and wet-bulb temperatures of the air 
entering the indoor coil are 80 [deg]FDB and 67 
[deg]FWB and the outdoor coil are 87 [deg]DB and 
69 [deg]FWB. The tolerances for the dry-bulb and wet-bulb 
temperatures of the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils shall be 
the test operating tolerance and test condition tolerance specified in 
Table 6.1.1 of this Appendix. The intermediate compressor speed shall be 
the minimum compressor speed plus one-third the difference between the 
maximum and minimum speeds of the cooling mode. (Inter. speed=min. 
speed+\1/3\ (max. speed-min. speed.) A tolerance of plus five percent or 
the next higher inverter frequency step from that calculated is allowed.
    4.1.1.5 Testing procedures for split-type ductless systems. Cyclic 
tests of ductless units will be conducted without dampers. The data 
cycle shall be preceded by a minimum of two cycles in which the indoor 
fan cycles on and off with the compressor. For the data cycle the indoor 
fan will operate three minutes prior to compressor cut-on and remain on 
for three minutes after compressor cut-off. The integration time for 
capacity and power shall be from compressor cut-on time to indoor fan 
cut-off time. The fan power for three minutes after compressor cut-off 
shall be added to the integrated cooling capacity.
    4.1.2 Test instrumentation. The steady-state and cyclic performance 
tests shall have the same requirements pertaining to instrumentation and 
data as those specified in Section 10 and Table II of ASHRAE Standard 
37.78. For the cyclic dry-coil performance tests, the dry-bulb 
temperature of the air entering and leaving the cooling coil, or the 
difference between these two dry-bulb temperatures, shall be 
continuously recorded with instrumentation accurate to within 0.3 [deg]F of indicated value and have a response

[[Page 214]]

time of 2.5 seconds or less. Response time in the time required for the 
instrumentation to obtain 63 percent of the final steady-state 
temperature difference when subjected to a step change in temperature 
difference of 15 [deg]F or more. Electrical measurement devices (watt-
hour meters) used during all tests shall be accurate to within 0.5 percent of indicated value.
    4.1.3 Test tolerances. All steady-state wet-and dry-coil performance 
tests shall be performed within the applicable operating and test 
condition tolerances specified in Section 11.6 and Table III of ASHRAE 
Standard 37-78.
    4.1.3.1 The indoor and outdoor average dry-bulb temperature for the 
cyclic dry coil test D shall both be within 1.0 [deg]F of the indoor and 
outdoor average dry bulb temperature for the steady-state dry coil test 
C, respectively.
    4.1.3.2 The test condition and test operating tolerances for 
conducting test D are stated in 6.1.1 of this Appendix. Variation in the 
test conditions greater than the tolerances prescribed in 6.1.1 of this 
Appendix shall invalidate the test. It is suggested that an electric 
resistance heater having a heating capacity approximately equal to the 
sum of the cooling capacity and compressor and condenser fan power 
should be installed in the outdoor test room and cycled ``off'' and 
``on'' as the unit cycles ``on'' and ``off'' respectively to improve 
control in the outdoor test room. Similarly, an electric resistance 
heater having a heating capacity approximately equal to the cooling 
capacity of the unit could be installed in the indoor test room, and 
cycled ``on'' and ``off'' as the test unit cycles ``on'' and ``off'' to 
improve indoor room control.
    4.2 Testing procedures for air source heating only units.
    4.2.1 Test operating procedures. All High Temperature Tests, the 
Cyclic Test, the Frost Accumulation Test, and the low Temperature test 
shall have the performance evaluated by the Air-Enthalpy Method on the 
indoor side. In addition, the High Temperature Test and the Low 
Temperature Test shall have a simultaneous test method (as described in 
4.1) used as a check. The values calculated from the two methods must 
agree within 6 percent in order to constitute a valid test. Only the 
results from the Air-Enthalpy Method on the indoor side shall be used in 
the calulations in section 5.2.
    4.2.1.1 Test procedure for high temperature test. When the outdoor 
Air-Enthalpy Method is used, the outdoor chamber must not interfere with 
the normal air circulating pattern during the preliminary test. It is 
necessary to determine and adjust for system resistance when the outdoor 
air measuring apparatus is attached to the outdoor portion of the unit. 
The test room apparatus and test units must be operated for at least one 
hour with at least \1/2\ hour at equilibrium and at the specified test 
conditions prior to starting the test. The High Temperature Test shall 
then be conducted for a minimum of \1/2\ hour with intermittent data 
being recorded at 10-minute intervals. For all units, especially those 
having controls which periodically cause the unit to operate in defrost 
mode, attention should be given to prevent defrost during the High 
Temperature Test. Units which have undergone a defrost should operate in 
the heating mode for at least 10-minutes after defrost termination prior 
to the start of the test. When the outdoor Air-Enthalpy Method is used 
as a second test then a preliminary test must be conducted for a minimum 
of 30 minutes with 4 or more sets of data recorded at 10 minute 
intervals, all remaining requirements of Section 3.6.1 in the ASHRAE 
Standard 37-78 shall then apply in conducting the preliminary test for 
the outdoor air enthalpy method. For some units, at the ambient 
condition of the test, frost may accumulate on the outdoor coil. If the 
supply air temperature or the difference between the supply air 
temperature and the indoor air entering temperature has decreased by 
more than 1.5 [deg]F at the end of the test, the unit shall be defrosted 
and the test restarted. Only the results of this second High Temperature 
Test shall be used in the heating seasonal performance calculation in 
section 5.2. Prior to beginning the High Temperature Test, a unit shall 
operate in the heating mode for at least 10 minutes after defrost 
termination to establish equilibrium conditions for the unit and the 
room reconditioning apparatus. The High Temperature Test may only begin 
when the test unit and room conditions are within the test condition 
tolerances specified in Section 6.2.1 of this Appendix.
    4.2.1.2 Test procedures for the cyclic test. The cyclic test shall 
follow the High Temperature Test and by cycled ``on'' and ``off'' as 
specified in 3.2.1.2 until steadily repeating ambient conditions are 
achieved for both the indoor and outdoor test chambers, but for not less 
than 2 complete ``off''/``on'' cycles. Without a break in the cycling 
pattern, the unit shall be operated through an additional ``off''/``on'' 
cycle, during which the required test data shall be recorded. During the 
last cycle, which is referred to as the test cycle, the indoor and 
outdoor test room ambient conditions shall remain within the tolerance 
specified in section 6.2.2. of this Appendix. If, prior to the High 
Temperature Test, the unit underwent a defrost cycle to rid the outdoor 
coil of any accumulated frost, then prior to cycling the unit ``off'' 
and ``on'' it should be made to undergo a defrost. After defrost is 
completed and before starting the cycling process, the unit shall be 
operated continuously in the heating mode for a least 10 minutes to 
assure that equilibrium conditions have again been established for the 
unit and the room conditioning apparatus. Cycling

[[Page 215]]

the unit may begin when the test unit and room conditions are within the 
High Temperature Test condition tolerances specified in section 6.2.1 of 
this Appendix. Attention should be given to prevent defrost after the 
cycling process has begun.
    The cycle times for variable-speed units is the same as the cyclic 
time in the cooling mode as specified in section 4.1.1.2 of this 
Appendix. Cyclic tests of split-type ductless units will be conducted 
without dampers, and the data cycle shall be preceded by a minimum of 
two cycles in which the indoor fan cycles on and off with the 
compressor. During the data cycle for the split type ductless units, the 
indoor fan will operate three minutes prior to compressor ``cut-on'' and 
remain on for three minutes after compressor ``cut-off''. The 
integration time for capacity and power will be from compressor ``cut-
on'' time to indoor fan ``cut-off'' time. The fan power for the three 
minutes after compressor ``cut-off'' shall be subtracted from the 
integrated heating capacity. For split-type ductless systems which turn 
the indoor fan off during defrost, the indoor supply duct shall not be 
blocked.
    4.2.1.3 Test procedures for the frost accumulation test. The defrost 
controls shall be set at the normal settings which most typify those 
encountered in Region IV as described in section 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 of this 
Appendix. The test room reconditioning equipment and the unit under test 
shall be operated for at least \1/2\ hour prior to the start of a 
``preliminary'' test period. The preliminary test period and the test 
period itself are to be conducted within the test tolerances given in 
section 4.2.3.3 of this Appendix. In some cases, the preliminary defrost 
cycle may be manually induced, however, it is important that the 
normally operating controls govern the defrost termination in all cases. 
For units containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrost 
at intervals less than one hour when the unit is operating at the 
required test conditions, the preliminary test period shall start at the 
termination of a defrost cycle which automatically occurs and shall end 
at the termination of the next automatically occurring defrost cycle. 
For units containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrost 
at intervals exceeding one hour when operating at the required test 
condition, the preliminary test period consists of ``heating-only'' 
preliminary operation for at least one hour, after which a defrost may 
be manually or automatically induced. The test period then begins at the 
termination of this defrost cycle and ends at the termination of the 
next automatically occurring defrost cycle. If the unit has not 
undergone a defrost after 12 hours, then the tests shall be concluded 
and the results calculated for this 12-hour period. For units which turn 
the indoor fan off during defrost the indoor supply duct shall be 
blocked during all defrost cycles to prevent natural or forced 
convection through the indoor unit. During defrost, resistance heaters 
normally installed with the unit shall be prevented from operating.
    For units with variable-speed compressors, the frost accumulation 
test at the intermediate speed shall be conducted such that the unit 
will operate at a constant, intermediate compressor speed (k=i) as 
determined in section 4.1.1.4 of this Appendix. The following two 
equations may be used in lieu of the frost accumulation test for 
variable-speed.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.039

    4.2.1.4 Test procedures for the low temperature test. Where 
applicable, the High Temperature Test preparation and performance 
requirements shall also be used in the Low Temperature Test. The test 
room reconditioning equipment shall first be operated in a steady-state 
manner for at least one-half hour at equilibrium and at the specified 
test conditions. The unit shall then undergo a defrost, either automatic 
or manually induced. It is important that the unit terminate the defrost 
sequence by the action of its own defrost controls. The defrost controls 
are to remain at the same setting as specified in 4.2.1.3. At a time no 
earlier than 10 minutes after defrost termination, the test shall start. 
Test duration is one-half hour. For all units, defrost should be 
prevented during the one-half hour test period.
    4.2.2 Test instrumentation.
    4.2.2.1 Test instrumentation for the high temperature test. The 
indoor air flow rate shall be determined as described in Section 7.1 
through 7.4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78. This requires the construction of 
an air receiving chamber and discharge chamber separated by

[[Page 216]]

partition in which one or more nozzles are located. The receiving 
chamber is connected to the indoor air discharge side of the test 
specimen through a short plenum. The exhaust side of the air flow rate 
measuring device contains an exhaust fan with some means to vary its 
capacity to obtain the desired external resistance to air flow rate. The 
exhaust side is then left open to the test room or is ducted through a 
conditioning apparatus and then back to the test specimen inlet. The 
static pressure across the nozzles, the velocity pressure, and the 
static pressure measurements at the nozzle throat shall be measured with 
manometers which will result in errors which are no greater than 1.0 percent of indicated value and having minimum scale 
divisions not exceeding 2.0 percent of the reading. Static pressure and 
temperature measurements must be taken at the nozzle throat in order to 
obtain density of the air. The areas of the nozzles shall be determined 
by measuring their diameter with an error no greater than 0.2 percent in four places approximately 45 degrees 
apart around the nozzle in each of two places through the nozzle throat, 
one at the outlets and the others in the straight section near the 
radius. The energy usage of the compressor, indoor and outdoor fan, and 
all other equipment components shall be measured with a watt-hour meter 
which is accurate to within 0.5 percent of the 
quantity measured. Measurements of the air temperature entering and 
leaving the indoor coil or the difference between these two shall be 
made in accordance with the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 41 part 1. 
These temperatures shall be continuously recorded with instrumentation 
having a total system accuracy within 0.3 [deg]F 
of indicated value and a response time of 2.5 seconds or less. 
Temperature measurements are to be made upstream of the static pressure 
tap on the inlet and downstream of the static pressure taps on the 
outlet. The indoor and outdoor dry-bulb temperatures shall be 
continuously recorded with instrumentation which will result in an error 
no greater than 0.3 [deg]F of indicated value. The 
outdoor wet-bulb temperature shall be continuously recorded. Static 
pressure measurements in the ducts and across the unit shall be made in 
accordance with Section 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78 using equipment which 
will result in an error no greater than 0.01 inch 
of water. Static pressure measurements shall be made and recorded at 5 
minute intervals. All other data not continuously recorded shall be 
recorded at 10 minute intervals.
    4.2.2.2 Test instrumentation for the cycling test. The air flow rate 
during the on-period of the Cyclic Test shall be the same agreed within 
1. percent as the air flow rate measured during 
the previously conducted High Temperature Test. All other 
instrumentation requirements are identical to 4.2.2.1 of this Appendix.
    4.2.2.3 Test instrumentation for the frost accumulation test. The 
air flow rate for the Frost Accumulation Test shall be the same as 
described in 4.2.2.1. The indoor-side dry-bulb temperature and outdoor-
side dry-bulb temperature shall be continuously recorded with 
instrumentation having a total system accuracy within 0.3 [deg]F of indicated value. The outdoor dew point 
temperature shall be determined with an error no greater than 0.5 [deg]F of indicated value using continuously 
recording instrumentation. All other data shall be recorded at 10 minute 
intervals during the heating cycle. Defrost initiation, termination and 
complete test cycle time (from defrost termination to defrost 
termination) shall be recorded. Defrost initiation is defined as the 
actuation (either automatically or manually) of the controls normally 
installed with the unit which cause it to alter its normal heating 
operation in order to eliminate possible accumulations of frost on the 
outdoor coil. Defrost termination occurs when the controls normally 
within the unit are actuated to change from defrost operation to normal 
heating operation. Provisions should be made so that instrumentation in 
capable of recording the cooling done during defrost as well as the 
total electrical energy usage during defrost. These data and the 
continuously recorded data need be the only data obtained during 
defrost.
    4.2.2.4 Test instrumentation for the low temperature test. 
Instrumentation for the Low Temperature Test is identical to that of the 
High Temperature Test described in section 4.2.2.1 of this Appendix.
    4.2.3 Test tolerances.
    4.2.3.1 Test tolerances for the high temperature test. All tests 
shall be conducted within the tolerances specified in Section 6.2.1. 
Variation greater than those given shall invalidate the test. The 
heating capacity results by the indoor Air Enthalpy Method shall agree 
within 6 percent of the value determined by any other simultaneously 
conducted capacity test in order for the test to be valid.
    4.2.3.2 Test tolerances for the cyclic test. The test condition 
tolerances and test operating tolerances for the on-period portion of 
the test cycle are specified in Section 6.2.2. Variation exceeding any 
specified test tolerance shall invalidate the test results.
    4.2.3.3 Test tolerances for the frost accumulation test. Test 
condition and test operating tolerances for Frost Accumulation Tests are 
specified in Section 6.2.3. Test operating tolerances during heating 
applies when the unit is in the heating mode, except for the first 5 
minutes after the termination of a defrost cycle. Test operating 
tolerance during defrost applies during a defrost cycle and during the 
first 5 minutes after defrost termination when the unit is operating in 
the

[[Page 217]]

heating mode. In determining whether the test condition tolerances are 
met, only the heating portion of the test period shall be used in 
calculating the average values. Variations exceeding the tolerances 
presented in Section 6.2.3 shall invalidate the test.
    4.2.3.4 Test tolerances for the low temperature test. During the 
test period for the Low Temperature Test, the operating conditions shall 
be within the tolerances specified in Section 6.2.1 of this Appendix.
    4.3 Testing procedures for air source units which provide both 
heating and cooling. The testing procedures for units which provide both 
heating and cooling shall be the same as those specified in Sections 4.1 
and 4.2 of this Appendix. Also during the off-period of the dry-coil 
cooling test (test D), the switch-over valve shall remain in the cooling 
mode, unless the controls normally supplied with the unit are designed 
to reverse it, in which case the controls shall operate the valve. 
During the off-period of the cyclic heating test at 47 [deg] F, the 
switch-over valve shall remain in the heating mode, unless the controls 
normally supplied with the unit are designed to reverse it, in which 
case the controls shall operate the valve.
    5.0 Calculations for performance factors.
    5.1 Calculations of seasonal energy efficiency ratios (SEER) in air-
source units.
    The testing data and results required to calculate the seasonal 
energy efficiency ratio (SEER) in Btu's per watt-hour shall include the 
following:
    (i) Cooling capacities (Btu/hr) from tests A and B and, if 
applicable, the cooling capacity (Btu/hr) from test C and the total 
cooling done from test D (Btu's).
Qss k (95F)
Qss k (82F)
Qss, dry
Qcyc, dry
    (ii) Electrical power input to all components and controls (watts) 
from tests A, B, and if applicable the electrical power input to all 
components and controls (watts) from test C and the electrical usage 
(watt-hour) from test D.
    Where the cooling capacities Qss k (95F), from test A, 
Qss k (82), from test B, and Qss, dry, from test 
C, are calculated using the equations specified in section 3.7 of ASHRAE 
Standard 37-78. The total cooling done, Qcyc, dry from test 
D, is calculated using equation (1) below.
    Units which do not have indoor air circulating fans furnished as 
part of the model shall have their measured total cooling capacities 
adjusted by subtracting 1250 Btu/hr per 1,000 CFM of measured indoor air 
flow and adding to the total steady-state electrical power input 365 
watts per 1,000 CFM of measured indoor air flow.
    Energy efficiency ratios from tests A, B, and C, EERA, 
EERB, EERss, dry respectively, are each calculated 
as the ratio of the total cooling capacity in Btu/hr to the total 
electrical power input in watts.
    Units which do not have indoor air circulating fans furnished as 
part of the model shall adjust their total cooling done and energy used 
in one complete cycle for the effect of circulating indoor air equipment 
power. The value to be used for the circulating indoor air equipment 
power shall be 1250 Btu/hr per 1,000 CFM of circulating indoor air. The 
energy usage required in one complete cycle required for indoor air 
circulation is the product of the circulating indoor air equipment power 
and the duration of time in one cycle that the circulating indoor air 
equipment is on. The total cooling done shall then be the measured 
cooling in one complete cycle minus the energy usage required for indoor 
air circulation in one complete cycle. The total electrical energy usage 
shall be the sum of the energy usage required for indoor air circulation 
in one complete cycle and the energy used by the remaining equipment 
components (compressor(s), outdoor fan, crankcase heater, 
transformer(s), etc.) in one complete test cycle.
    Energy efficiency ratio from tests D, EERcyc dry is 
calculated as the ratio of the total cooling done in Btu's to the total 
electrical energy usage in watt-hours.

[[Page 218]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.040


[[Page 219]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.041


[[Page 220]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.042


[[Page 221]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.043


[[Page 222]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.044


[[Page 223]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.045


[[Page 224]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.046


[[Page 225]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.047


[[Page 226]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.048


[[Page 227]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.049


[[Page 228]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.050


[[Page 229]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.051


[[Page 230]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.052

                         6.0 Reference material

    6.1 Cooling reference material.
    6.1.1 Test operating and test condition tolerance for cyclic dry-
coil tests.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Test        Test
                                                   operating   condition
                Readings, remarks                  tolerance   tolerance
                                                      \1\         \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Outdoor dry-bulb air temperature, Fahrenheit:            2.0         0.5
 Entering.......................................
Indoor dry-bulb air temperature, Fahrenheit:             2.0         0.5
 Entering.......................................
Indoor wet-bulb air temperature, Fahrenheit:           (\3\)       (\3\)
 Entering.......................................
After the first 30 sec after compressor startup:
  External resistance to airflow, inches water..        0.05        0.02
  Nozzle pressure drops, percent of reading.....         2.0  ..........

[[Page 231]]


  Electrical voltage inputs to the test unit,            2.0  ..........
   percent......................................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Total observed range.
\2\ Variation of average from specified test condition.
\3\ Shall at no time exceed that value of the wet-bulb temperature which
  results in the production of condensate by the indoor coil at the dry-
  bulb temperature existing for the air entering the indoor portion of
  the unit.

    6.1.2 Distribution of fractional hours in temperature bins to be 
used for calculation of the SEER for 2-speed compressor and 2-compressor 
units.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Bin      Representative  Fraction of
                                temperature    temperature      total
          Bin No. j:               range         bin for     temperature
                                  (degrees      (degrees      bin hours
                                Fahrenheit)    Fahrenheit)       nj/N
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.............................        65-69             67          .214
2.............................        70-74             72          .231
3.............................        75-79             77          .216
4.............................        80-84             82          .161
5.............................        85-89             87          .104
6.............................        90-94             92          .052
7.............................        95-99             97          .018
8.............................      100-104            102          .004
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 232]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.053

    6.2 Heating reference material.
    6.2.1 Test operating and test condition tolerance for Steady-State 
High Temperature Test [at 47 [deg]F (8.3 [deg]C) or 62 [deg]F (16.7 
[deg]C)] and Low Temperature Test [at 17 [deg]F (-8.3 [deg]C)].

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                    Test         Test
                                                 operating    condition
                                                    \1\          \2\
                                                 tolerance    tolerance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          2.0          0.5
  Leaving.....................................          2.0  ...........
Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          1.0  ...........
  Leaving.....................................          1.0  ...........

[[Page 233]]


Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          2.0          0.5
  Leaving.....................................          2.0  ...........
Outdoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          1.0          0.3
  Leaving.....................................          1.0  ...........
External resistance to air flow, inches of              .05          .02
 water........................................
Electrical voltage, percent...................          2.0  ...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Test operating tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of any
  measurement. When expressed as a percentage, the maximum allowable
  variation is the specified percentage of the average value.
\2\ Test condition tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of the
  average value of the measurement from the standard or desired test
  condition.

    6.2.2 Test operating and test condition tolerances for the on-period 
portion of cyclic performance tests.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                    Test         Test
                                                 operating    condition
                                                 tolerances   tolerance
                                                    \1\          \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          2.0          0.5
  Leaving.....................................  ...........  ...........
Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          1.0  ...........
  Leaving.....................................  ...........  ...........
Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          2.0          0.5
  Leaving.....................................  ...........  ...........
Outdoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering....................................          2.0          1.0
  Leaving.....................................  ...........  ...........
External resistance to air-flow, inches of              .05          .02
 water........................................
Electrical voltage, percent...................          2.0  ...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Test operating tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of any
  measurement. When expressed as a percentage, the maximum allowable
  variation is the specified percentage of the average value. (Applies
  after the first 30 seconds after compressor start-up.)
\2\ Test condition tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of the
  average value of the measurement from the standard or desired test
  condition.

    6.2.3 Test operating and test tolerances for frost accumulation 
tests.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      Testing operating
                                        tolerance \1\     Test condition
                                   ----------------------  tolerance \2\
                                      During     During      (heating
                                     heating    defrost    portion only)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering........................        2.0    \3\ 4.0             0.5
  Leaving.........................  .........  .........  ..............
Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering........................        1.0  .........  ..............
  Leaving.........................  .........  .........  ..............
Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
  Entering........................        2.0       10.0             1.0
  Leaving.........................  .........  .........  ..............
Outdoor dew-point, [deg]F:
  Entering........................        1.5  .........             0.7
  Leaving.........................  .........  .........  ..............
External resistance to air-flow,          .05  .........             .02
 inches of water..................
Electrical voltage, percent.......        2.0  .........  ..............
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Test operating tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of any
  measurement. When expressed as a percentage, the maximum allowable
  variation is the specified percentage of the average value. Test
  Operating Tolerance During Heating applies when the heat pump is in
  the heating mode, except for the first 5 minutes after termination of
  a defrost cycle. Test Operating Tolerance During Defrost applies
  during a defrost cycle and during the first 5 minutes after the
  termination of a defrost cycle when the heat pump is operating in the
  heating mode.
\2\ Test condition tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of the
  average value of the measurement from the standard or desired test
  condition. Test Condition Tolerance applies only when the heat pump is
  operating in the heating mode.
\3\ Not applicable during defrost if the indoor fan is off.

    6.2.4 Distribution of fractional hours in temperature bins, heating 
load hours and outdoor design temperature for the different climatic 
regions.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
      Fractional hours                                              Region
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
   Bin No.      Tj ([deg]F)         I            II            III           IV             V            VI
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Heating Load Hours, HLH

               .............          750         1,250         1,750         2,250         2,750     \1\ 2,750
                             ---------------
                                         Outdoor Design Temperature, TOD, for the region

               .............           37            27            17             5           -10            30
                             ---------------
        j=1             62           .291          .215          .153          .132          .106          .113
          2             57           .239          .189          .142          .111          .092          .206
          3             52           .194          .163          .138          .103          .086          .215
          4             47           .129          .143          .137          .093          .076          .204
          5             42           .081          .112          .135          .100          .078          .141
          6             37           .041          .088          .118          .109          .087          .076
          7             32           .019          .056          .092          .126          .102          .034
          8             27           .005          .024          .047          .087          .094          .008
          9             22           .001          .008          .021          .055          .074          .003
         10             17              0          .002          .009          .036          .055             0
         11             12              0             0          .005          .026          .047             0
         12              7              0             0          .002          .013          .038             0
         13              2              0             0          .001          .006          .029             0
         14             -3              0             0             0          .002          .018             0

[[Page 234]]


         15             -8              0             0             0          .001          .010             0
         16            -13              0             0             0             0          .005             0
         17            -18              0             0             0             0          .002             0
         18            -23              0             0             0             0          .001             0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Pacific Coast Region.


[[Page 235]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.054

    6.2.6 Standard Design Heating Requirements (Btu/hr)

        5,000             25,000             50,000            90,000
       10,000             30,000             60,000           100,000
       15,000             35,000             70,000           110,000
       20,000             40,000             80,000           130,000


    6.3 Representative Cooling Load Hours (CLHR) for Each 
Heating Load Hours Region.

[[Page 236]]



------------------------------------------------------------------------
                    Region                          CLHR         HLHR
------------------------------------------------------------------------
I.............................................        2,400          750
II............................................        1,800        1,250
III...........................................        1,200        1,750
IV............................................          800        2,250
V.............................................          400        2,750
VI............................................          200        2,750
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    6.4 Ground Water Temperature Map (Reserved).

[44 FR 76707, Dec. 27, 1979, as amended at 54 FR 6076, Feb. 7, 1989]

 Appendix N to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
             the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers

    1.0 Scope. The scope of this appendix is as specified in section 2.0 
of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
    2.0 Definitions. Definitions include the definitions specified in 
section 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and the following additional 
and modified definitions:
    2.1 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 means the test standard published 
in 1993 by ASHRAE, approved by the American National Standards Institute 
(ANSI) on October 4, 1993, and entitled ``Method of Testing for Annual 
Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and 
Boilers'' (with errata of October 24, 1996).
    2.2 ASHRAE means the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
    2.3 Thermal stack damper means a type of stack damper which is 
dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of 
thermal energy of the stack gases to open the damper.
    2.4 Isolated combustion system. The definition of isolation 
combustion system in section 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 is 
incorporated with the addition of the following: ``The unit is installed 
in an un-conditioned indoor space isolated from the heated space.''
    3.0 Classifications. Classifications are as specified in section 4 
of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
    4.0 Requirements. Requirements are as specified in section 5 of 
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
    5.0 Instruments. Instruments must be as specified in section 6 of 
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
    6.0 Apparatus. The apparatus used in conjunction with the furnace or 
boiler during the testing shall be as specified in section 7 of ANSI/
ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 except for the second paragraph of section 
7.2.2.2 and except for section 7.2.2.5, and as specified in section 6.1 
of this appendix.
    6.1 Downflow furnaces. Install the internal section of vent pipe the 
same size as the flue collar for connecting the flue collar to the top 
of the unit, if not supplied by the manufacturer. Do not insulate the 
internal vent pipe during the jacket loss test (if conducted) described 
in section 8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 or the steady-state test 
described in section 9.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993. Do not 
insulate the internal vent pipe before the cool-down and heat-up tests 
described in sections 9.5 and 9.6, respectively, of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 
103-1993. If the vent pipe is surrounded by a metal jacket, do not 
insulate the metal jacket. Install a 5-ft test stack of the same cross 
sectional area or perimeter as the vent pipe above the top of the 
furnace. Tape or seal around the junction connecting the vent pipe and 
the 5-ft test stack. Insulate the 5-ft test stack with insulation having 
an R-value not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil. (See 
Figure 3-E of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.)
    7.0 Testing conditions. The testing conditions shall be as specified 
in section 8 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 with errata of October 24, 
1996, except for section 8.6.1.1; and as specified in section 7.1 of 
this appendix.
    7.1 Measurement of jacket surface temperature. The jacket of the 
furnace or boiler shall be subdivided into 6-inch squares when 
practical, and otherwise into 36-square-inch regions comprising 4 in. x 
9 in. or 3 in. x 12 in. sections, and the surface temperature at the 
center of each square or section shall be determined with a surface 
thermocouple. The 36-square-inch areas shall be recorded in groups where 
the temperature differential of the 36-square-inch area is less than 10 
[deg]F for temperature up to 100 [deg]F above room temperature and less 
than 20 [deg]F for temperature more than 100 [deg]F above room 
temperature. For forced air central furnaces, the circulating air blower 
compartment is considered as part of the duct system and no surface 
temperature measurement of the blower compartment needs to be recorded 
for the purpose of this test. For downflow furnaces, measure all cabinet 
surface temperatures of the heat exchanger and combustion section, 
including the bottom around the outlet duct, and the burner door, using 
the 36 square-inch thermocouple grid. The cabinet surface temperatures 
around the blower section do not need to be measured (See figure 3-E of 
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.)
    8.0 Test procedure. Testing and measurements shall be as specified 
in section 9 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 except for sections 
9.5.1.1, 9.5.1.2.1, 9.5.1.2.2, 9.5.2.1, and section 9.7.1. ; and as 
specified in sections 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5, of this appendix.
    8.1 Input to interrupted ignition device. For burners equipped with 
an interrupted ignition device, record the nameplate electric power used 
by the ignition device, PEIG, or use PEIG=0.4 kW 
if no nameplate power input

[[Page 237]]

is provided. Record the nameplate ignition device on-time interval, 
tIG, or measure the on-time period at the beginning of the 
test at the time the burner is turned on with a stop watch, if no 
nameplate value is given. Set tIG=0 and PEIG=0 if 
the device on-time is less than or equal to 5 seconds after the burner 
is on.
    8.2 Gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced air central furnaces 
without stack dampers cool-down test. Turn off the main burner after 
steady-state testing is completed, and measure the flue gas temperature 
by means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/
ASHRAE 103-1993 at 1.5 minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and 9 
minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the burner shuts off. 
An integral draft diverter shall remain blocked and insulated, and the 
stack restriction shall remain in place. On atmospheric systems with an 
integral draft diverter or draft hood, equipped with either an 
electromechanical inlet damper or an electro-mechanical flue damper that 
closes within 10 seconds after the burner shuts off to restrict the flow 
through the heat exchanger in the off-cycle, bypass or adjust the 
control for the electromechanical damper so that the damper remains open 
during the cool-down test. For furnaces that employ post purge, measure 
the length of the post-purge period with a stopwatch. The time from 
burner OFF to combustion blower OFF (electrically de-energized) shall be 
recorded as tp. For the case where tp is intended 
to be greater than 180 seconds, stop the combustion blower at 180 
seconds and use that value for tp. Measure the flue gas 
temperature by means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 
of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 at the end of post-purge period, tp 
(TF,OFF(tp)), and at the time (1.5 + 
tp) minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and (9.0 + 
tp) minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the main 
burner shuts off. For the case where the measured tp is less than or 
equal to 30 seconds, it shall be tested as if there is no post purge and 
tp shall be set equal to 0.
    8.3 Gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced air central furnaces 
without stack dampers with adjustable fan control--cool-down test. For a 
furnace with adjustable fan control, this time delay will be 3.0 minutes 
for non-condensing furnaces or 1.5 minutes for condensing furnaces or 
until the supply air temperature drops to a value of 40 [deg]F above the 
inlet air temperature, whichever results in the longest fan on-time. For 
a furnace without adjustable fan control or with the type of adjustable 
fan control whose range of adjustment does not allow for the delay time 
specified above, the control shall be bypassed and the fan manually 
controlled to give the delay times specified above. For a furnace which 
employs a single motor to drive the power burner and the indoor air 
circulating blower, the power burner and indoor air circulating blower 
shall be stopped together.
    8.4 Gas-and oil-fueled boilers without stack dampers cool-down test. 
After steady-state testing has been completed, turn the main burner(s) 
OFF and measure the flue gas temperature at 3.75 
(TF,OFF(t3)) and 22.5 
(TF,OFF(t4)) minutes after the burner shut off, 
using the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-
1993. During this off-period, for units that do not have pump delay 
after shutoff, no water shall be allowed to circulate through the hot 
water boilers. For units that have pump delay on shutoff, except those 
having pump controls sensing water temperature, the pump shall be 
stopped by the unit control and the time t+, between burner 
shutoff and pump shutoff shall be measured within one-second accuracy. 
For units having pump delay controls that sense water temperature, the 
pump shall be operated for 15 minutes and t+ shall be 15 
minutes. While the pump is operating, the inlet water temperature and 
flow rate shall be maintained at the same values as used during the 
steady-state test as specified in sections 9.1 and 8.4.2.3 of ANSI/
ASHRAE 103-1993.
    For boilers that employ post purge, measure the length of the post-
purge period with a stopwatch. The time from burner OFF to combustion 
blower OFF (electrically de-energized) shall be recorded as 
tP. For the case where tP is intended to be 
greater than 180 seconds, stop the combustion blower at 180 seconds and 
use that value for tP. Measure the flue gas temperature by 
means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 
103-1993 at the end of the post purge period 
tP(TF,OFF(tP)) and at the time (3.75 + 
tP) minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and (22.5 + 
tP) minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the main 
burner shuts off. For the case where the measured tP is less 
or equal to 30 seconds, it shall be tested as if there is no post purge 
and tP shall be set to equal 0.
    8.5 Direct measurement of off-cycle losses testing method. 
[Reserved.]
    9.0 Nomenclature. Nomenclature shall include the nomenclature 
specified in section 10 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and the 
following additional variables:

Effmotor=Efficiency of power burner motor
PEIG=Electrical power to the interrupted ignition device, kW
RT,a=RT,F if flue gas is measured
    =RT,S if stack gas is measured
RT,F=Ratio of combustion air mass flow rate to stoichiometric 
air mass flow rate
RT,S=Ratio of the sum of combustion air and relief air mass 
flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate
tIG=Electrical interrupted ignition device on-time, min.
Ta,SS,X=TF,SS,X if flue gas temperature is 
measured, [deg]F
    =TS,SS,X if stack gas temperature is measured, [deg]F

[[Page 238]]

yIG=ratio of electrical interrupted ignition device on-time 
to average burner on-time
yP=ratio of power burner combustion blower on-time to average 
burner on-time

    10.0 Calculation of derived results from test measurements. 
Calculations shall be as specified in section 11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 
103-1993 and the October 24, 1996, Errata Sheet for ASHRAE Standard 103-
1993, except for appendices B and C; and as specified in sections 10.1 
through 10.8 and Figure 1 of this appendix.
    10.1 Annual fuel utilization efficiency. The annual fuel utilization 
efficiency (AFUE) is as defined in sections 11.2.12 (non-condensing 
systems), 11.3.12 (condensing systems), 11.4.12 (non-condensing 
modulating systems) and 11.5.12 (condensing modulating systems) of ANSI/
ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, except for the definition for the term 
EffyHS in the defining equation for AFUE. EffyHS 
is defined as:

EffyHS=heating seasonal efficiency as defined in sections 
11.2.11 (non-condensing systems), 11.3.11 (condensing systems), 11.4.11 
(non-condensing modulating systems) and 11.5.11 (condensing modulating 
systems) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and is based on the 
assumptions that all weatherized warm air furnaces or boilers are 
located out-of-doors, that warm air furnaces which are not weatherized 
are installed as isolated combustion systems, and that boilers which are 
not weatherized are installed indoors.

    10.2 National average burner operating hours, average annual fuel 
energy consumption and average annual auxiliary electrical energy 
consumption for gas or oil furnaces and boilers.
    10.2.1 National average number of burner operating hours. For 
furnaces and boilers equipped with single stage controls, the national 
average number of burner operating hours is defined as:

BOHSS=2,080 (0.77) A DHR-2,080 B

where:

2,080=national average heating load hours
0.77=adjustment factor to adjust the calculated design heating 
requirement and heating load hours to the actual heating load 
experienced by the heating system
DHR=typical design heating requirements as listed in Table 8 (in unit of 
kBtu/h) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, using the proper value of 
QOUT defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
A=100,000 / 
[341,300(yPPE+yIGPEIG+yBE)+(QIN
-QP)EffyHS], for forced draft unit, indoors
    =100,000 / [341,300(yPPE 
Effmotor+yIGPEIG+y BE)+(QIN-
QP)EffyHS], for forced draft unit, ICS,
    =100,000 / [341,300(yPPE(1-
Effmotor)+yIGPEIG+y 
BE)+(QIN-QP)EffyHS], for induced draft 
unit, indoors, and
    =100,000 / 
[341,300(yIGPEIG+yBE)+(QIN-
QP)EffyHS], for induced draft unit, ICS
B=2 QP(EffyHS)(A) / 100,000

where:

Effmotor=Power burner motor efficiency provided by 
manufacturer,
    =0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by 
manufacturer.
100,000=factor that accounts for percent and kBtu
PE=burner electrical power input at full-load steady-state operation, 
including electrical ignition device if energized, as defined in 9.1.2.2 
of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
yP=ratio of induced or forced draft blower on-time to average 
burner on-time, as follows:
    1 for units without post purge;
    1+(tP/3.87) for single stage furnaces with post purge;
    1+(tP/10) for two-stage and step modulating furnaces with 
post purge;
    1+(tP/9.68) for single stage boilers with post purge; or
    1+(tP/15) for two stage and step modulating boilers with 
post purge.
PEIG=electrical input rate to the interrupted ignition device 
on burner (if employed), as defined in 8.1 of this appendix
yIG=ratio of burner interrupted ignition device on-time to 
average burner on-time, as follows:
    0 for burners not equipped with interrupted ignition device;
    (tIG/3.87) for single stage furnaces;
    (tIG/10) for two-stage and step modulating furnaces;
    (tIG/9.68) for single stage boilers; or
    (tIG/15) for two stage and step modulating boilers.
tIG=on-time of the burner interrupted ignition device, as 
defined in 8.1 of this appendix
tP=post purge time as defined in 8.2 (furnace) or 8.4 
(boiler) of this appendix
    =0 if tP is equal to or less than 30 second.
y=ratio of blower or pump on-time to average burner on-time, as follows:
    1 for furnaces without fan delay;
    1 for boilers without a pump delay;
    1+(t+--t-)/3.87 for single stage furnaces with 
fan delay;
    1+(t+--t-)/10 for two-stage and step 
modulating furnaces with fan delay;
    1+(t+/9.68) for single stage boilers with pump delay; or
    1+(t+/15) for two stage and step modulating boilers with 
pump delay.
BE=circulating air fan or water pump electrical energy input rate at 
full load steady-state operation, as defined in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 
103-1993
QIN=as defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993

[[Page 239]]

EffyHS=as defined in 11.2.11 (non-condensing systems) or 
11.3.11.3 (condensing systems) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
percent, and calculated on the basis of:
    ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
    indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
    outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.
2=ratio of the average length of the heating season in hours to the 
average heating load hours
t+=as defined in 9.5.1.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 or 
8.4 of this appendix
t-=as defined in 9.6.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993

    10.2.1.1 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage or step 
modulating controls the average annual energy used during the heating 
season, EM, is defined as:

EM=(QIN-QP) BOHSS+(8,760-
4,600)QP

where:

QIN=as defined in 11.4.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
BOHSS=as defined in section 10.2.1 of this appendix, in which 
the weighted EffyHS as defined in 11.4.11.3 or 11.5.11.3 of 
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 is used for calculating the values of A 
and B, the term DHR is based on the value of QOUT defined in 
11.4.8.1.1 or 11.5.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, and the term 
(yPPE+yIGPEIG+yBE) in the factor A is 
increased by the factor R, which is defined as:
R=2.3 for two stage controls
    =2.3 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-
maximum output is greater than or equal to 0.5
    =3.0 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-
maximum output is less than 0.5
A=100,000/[341,300(yPPE+yIGPEIG+y BE) 
R+(QIN-QP) EffyHS], for forced draft 
unit, indoors
    =100,000/[341,300(yPPE 
Effmotor+yIGPEIG+y BE) 
R+(QIN-QP)EffyHS], for forced draft 
unit, ICS,
    =100,000/[341,300(yPPE(1-
Effmotor)+yIGPEIG+y BE) 
R+(QIN-QP) EffyHS], for induced draft 
unit, indoors, and
    =100,000/[341,300(yIGPEIG+y BE) 
R+(QIN-QP) EffyHS], for induced draft 
unit, ICS

where:

Effmotor=Power burner motor efficiency provided by 
manufacturer,
    =0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if none provided 
by manufacturer.
EffyHS=as defined in 11.4.11.3 or 11.5.11.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 
Standard 103-1993, and calculated on the basis of:
    --ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces
    --indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers
    --outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are 
weatherized
8,760=total number of hours per year
4,600=as specified in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993

    10.2.1.2 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage or step 
modulating controls the national average number of burner operating 
hours at the reduced operating mode is defined as:

BOHR=XREM/QIN,R

where:

XR=as defined in 11.4.8.7 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
EM=as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
QIN,R=as defined in 11.4.8.1.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-
1993

    10.2.1.3 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage controls 
the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum 
operating mode (BOHH) is defined as:

BOHH=XHEM/QIN

where:

XH=as defined in 11.4.8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
EM=as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
QIN=as defined in 11.4.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993

    10.2.1.4 For furnaces and boilers equipped with step modulating 
controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the 
modulating operating mode (BOHM) is defined as:

BOHM=XHEM/QIN,M

where:

XH=as defined in 11.4.8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
EM=as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
QIN,M=QOUT,M/(EffySS,M/100)
QOUT,M=as defined in 11.4.8.10 or 11.5.8.10 of ANSI/ASHRAE 
Standard 103-1993, as appropriate
EffySS,M=as defined in 11.4.8.8 or 11.5.8.8 of ANSI/ASHRAE 
Standard 103-1993, as appropriate, in percent
100=factor that accounts for percent

    10.2.2 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil fueled 
furnaces or boilers. For furnaces or boilers equipped with single stage 
controls the average annual fuel energy consumption (EF) is 
expressed in Btu per year and defined as:

EF=BOHSS(QIN-QP)+8,760 
QP


[[Page 240]]


where:

BOHSS=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
QIN=as defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
8,760=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix

    10.2.2.1 For furnaces or boilers equipped with either two stage or 
step modulating controls EF is defined as:

EF=EM + 4,600QP

where:

EM=as defined in 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
4,600=as specified in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993

    10.2.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for 
gas or oil fueled furnaces or boilers. For furnaces or boilers equipped 
with single stage controls the average annual auxiliary electrical 
consumption (EAE) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined 
as:

EAE=BOHSS(yPPE 
+yIGPEIG+yBE)

where:

BOHSS=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PE=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
yP=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
yIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PEIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
y=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
BE=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix

    10.2.3.1 For furnaces or boilers equipped with two stage controls 
EAE is defined as:

EAE=BOHR(yPPER+yIG
PEIG+yBER) + 
BOHH(yPPEH+yIGPEIG
+y BEH)

where:

BOHR=as defined in 10.2.1.2 of this appendix
yP=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 and measured at the reduced fuel 
input rate, of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
yIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PEIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
y=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
BER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
measured at the reduced fuel input rate
BOHH=as defined in 10.2.1.3 of this appendix
PEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
measured at the maximum fuel input rate
BEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
measured at the maximum fuel input rate

    10.2.3.2 For furnaces or boilers equipped with step modulating 
controls EAE is defined as:

EAE=BOHR(yP 
PER+yIGPEIG+y 
BER)+BOHM(yPPEH+yIG
PEIG+y BEH)

where:

BOHR=as defined in 10.2.1.2 of this appendix
yP=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
measured at the reduced fuel input rate
yIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PEIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
y=as defined in 10.2.1. of this appendix
BER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
measured at the reduced fuel input rate
BOHM=as defined in 10.2.1.4 of this appendix
PEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
measured at the maximum fuel input rate
BEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
measured at the maximum fuel inputs rate

    10.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric 
furnaces or boilers. For electric furnaces and boilers the average 
annual energy consumption (EE) is expressed in kilowatt-hours 
and defined as:

EE=100(2,080)(0.77)DHR/(3.412 AFUE)

where:

100=to express a percent as a decimal
2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
0.77=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
DHR=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
3.412=conversion to express energy in terms of watt-hours instead of Btu
AFUE=as defined in 11.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, in percent, 
and calculated on the basis of:
    ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
    indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
    outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.

    10.4 Energy factor.
    10.4.1  Energy factor for gas or oil furnaces and boilers. Calculate 
the energy factor, EF, for gas or oil furnaces and boilers defined as, 
in percent:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MY97.038

where:

EF=average annual fuel consumption as defined in 10.2.2 of 
this appendix.
EAE=as defined in 10.2.3 of this appendix.
EffyHS=Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency as defined in 
11.2.11, 11.3.11, 11.4.11 or 11.5.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, 
in percent, and calculated on the basis of:
    ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
    indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or

[[Page 241]]

    outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.
3,412=conversion factor from kilowatt to Btu/h

    10.4.2 Energy factor for electric furnaces and boilers. The energy 
factor, EF, for electric furnaces and boilers is defined as:

EF=AFUE

where:

AFUE=Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency as defined in section 10.3 of 
this appendix, in percent

    10.5 Average annual energy consumption for furnaces and boilers 
located in a different geographic region of the United States and in 
buildings with different design heating requirements.
    10.5.1 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled 
furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the 
United States and in buildings with different design heating 
requirements. For gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers the average 
annual fuel energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a 
specific typical design heating requirement (EFR) is 
expressed in Btu per year and defined as:

EFR=(EF-8,760 QP)(HLH/2,080)+8,760 
QP

where:

EF=as defined in 10.2.2 of this appendix
8,760=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
HLH=heating load hours for a specific geographic region determined from 
the heating load hour map in Figure 1 of this appendix
2,080=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix

    10.5.2  Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for 
gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic 
region of the United States and in buildings with different design 
heating requirements. For gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers the 
average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for a specific 
geographic region and a specific typical design heating requirement 
(EAER) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as:

EAER=EAE (HLH/2,080)

where:

EAE=as defined in 10.2.3 of this appendix
HLH=as defined in 10.5.1 of this appendix
2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix

    10.5.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric 
furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the 
United States and in buildings with different design heating 
requirements. For electric furnaces and boilers the average annual 
electric energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a 
specific typical design heating requirement (EER) is 
expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as:

EER=100 (0.77) DHR HLH/(3.412 AFUE)

where:

100=as specified in 10.3 of this appendix
0.77=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
DHR=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
HLH=as defined in 10.5.1 of this appendix
3.412=as specified in 10.3 of this appendix
AFUE=as defined in 10.3 of this appendix, in percent

    10.6 Annual energy consumption for mobile home furnaces
    10.6.1  National average number of burner operating hours for mobile 
home furnaces (BOHSS). BOHSS is the same as in 
10.2.1 of this appendix, except that the value of EffyHS in 
the calculation of the burner operating hours, BOHSS, is 
calculated on the basis of a direct vent unit with system number 9 or 
10.
    10.6.2 Average annual fuel energy for mobile home furnaces 
(EF). EF is same as in 10.2.2 of this appendix 
except that the burner operating hours, BOHSS, is calculated 
as specified in 10.6.1 of this appendix.
    10.6.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for 
mobile home furnaces (EAE). EAE is the same as in 
10.2.3 of this appendix, except that the burner operating hours, 
BOHSS, is calculated as specified in 10.6.1 of this appendix.
    10.7 Calculation of sales weighted average annual energy consumption 
for mobile home furnaces. In order to reflect the distribution of mobile 
homes to geographical regions with average HLHMHF value 
different from 2,080, adjust the annual fossil fuel and auxiliary 
electrical energy consumption values for mobile home furnaces using the 
following adjustment calculations.
    10.7.1 For mobile home furnaces the sales weighted average annual 
fossil fuel energy consumption is expressed in Btu per year and defined 
as:

EF,MHF=(EF-8,760 QP)HLHMHF/
2,080+8,760 QP

where:

EF=as defined in 10.6.2 of this appendix
8,760=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
HLHMHF=1880, sales weighted average heating load hours for 
mobile home furnaces
2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix

    10.7.2 For mobile home furnaces the sales weighted average annual 
auxiliary electrical energy consumption is expressed in kilowatt-hours 
and defined as:

EAE,MHF=EAEHLHMHF/2,080

where:

EAE=as defined in 10.6.3 of this appendix
HLHMHF=as defined in 10.7.1 of this appendix

[[Page 242]]

2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
      

    10.8  Direct determination of off-cycle losses for furnaces and 
boilers equipped with thermal stack dampers. [Reserved.]
      
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MY97.039
    
[62 FR 26157, May 12, 1997, as amended at 62 FR 53510, Oct. 14, 1997]

[[Page 243]]

 Appendix O to Subpart B of Part 430-Uniform Test Method for Measuring 
         the Energy Consumption of Vented Home Heating Equipment

                             1.0 Definitions

    1.1 ``Air shutter'' means an adjustable device for varying the size 
of the primary air inlet(s) to the combustion chamber power burner.
    1.2 ``Air tube'' means a tube which carries combustion air from the 
burner fan to the burner nozzle for combustion.
    1.3 ``Barometic draft regulator or barometric damper'' means a 
mechanical device designed to maintain a constant draft in a vented 
heater.
    1.4 ``Draft hood'' means an external device which performs the same 
function as an integral draft diverter, as defined in section 1.17 of 
this appendix.
    1.5 ``Electro-mechanical stack damper'' means a type of stack damper 
which is operated by electrical and/or mechanical means.
    1.6 ``Excess air'' means air which passes through the combustion 
chamber and the vented heater flues in excess of that which is 
theoretically required for complete combustion.
    1.7 ``Flue'' means a conduit between the flue outlet of a vented 
heater and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric damper or 
vent terminal through which the flue gases pass prior to the point of 
draft relief.
    1.8 ``Flue damper'' means a device installed between the furnace and 
the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric draft regulator, or 
vent terminal which is not equipped with a draft control device, 
designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation 
and to close the venting system when the appliance is in a standby 
condition.
    1.9 ``Flue gases'' means reaction products resulting from the 
combustion of a fuel with the oxygen of the air, including the inerts 
and any excess air.
    1.10 ``Flue losses'' means the sum of sensible and latent heat 
losses above room temperature of the flue gases leaving a vented heater.
    1.11 ``Flue outlet'' means the opening provided in a vented heater 
for the exhaust of the flue gases from the combustion chamber.
    1.12 ``Heat input'' (Qin) means the rate of energy 
supplied in a fuel to a vented heater operating under steady-state 
conditions, expressed in Btu's per hour. It includes any input energy to 
the pilot light and is obtained by multiplying the measured rate of fuel 
consumption by the measured higher heating value of the fuel.
    1.13 ``Heating capacity'' (Qout) means the rate of useful 
heat output from a vented heater, operating under steady-state 
conditions, expressed in Btu's per hour. For room and wall heaters, it 
is obtained by multiplying the ``heat input'' (Qin) by the 
steady-state efficency ([eta]ss) divided by 100. For floor 
furnaces, it is obtained by multiplying (A) the ``heat input'' 
(Qin) by (B) the steady-state efficiency divided by 100, 
minus the quantity (2.8) (Lj) divided by 100, where 
Lj is the jacket loss as determined in section 3.2 of this 
appendix.
    1.14 ``Higher heating value'' (HHV) means the heat produced per unit 
of fuel when complete combustion takes place at constant pressure and 
the products of combustion are cooled to the initial temperature of the 
fuel and air and when the water vapor formed during combustion is 
condensed. The higher heating value is usually expressed in Btu's per 
pound, Btu's per cubic foot for gaseous fuel, or Btu's per gallon for 
liquid fuel.
    1.15 ``Induced draft'' means a method of drawing air into the 
combustion chamber by mechanical means.
    1.16 ``Infiltration parameter'' means that portion of unconditioned 
outside air drawn into the heated space as a consequence of loss of 
conditioned air through the exhaust system of a vented heater.
    1.17 ``Integral draft diverter'' means a device which is an integral 
part of a vented heater, designed to: (1) Provide for the exhaust of the 
products of combustion in the event of no draft, back draft, or stoppage 
beyond the draft diverter, (2) prevent a back draft from entering the 
vented heater, and (3) neutralize the stack action of the chimney or gas 
vent upon the operation of the vented heater.
    1.18 ``Manually controlled vented heaters'' means either gas or oil 
fueled vented heaters equipped without thermostats.
    1.19 ``Modulating control'' means either a step-modulating or two-
stage control.
    1.20 ``Power burner'' means a vented heater burner which supplies 
air for combustion at a pressure exceeding atmospheric pressure, or a 
burner which depends on the draft induced by a fan incorporated in the 
furnace for proper operation.
    1.21 ``Reduced heat input rate'' means the factory adjusted lowest 
reduced heat input rate for vented home heating equipment equipped with 
either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats.
    1.22 ``Single stage thermostat'' means a thermostat that cycles a 
burner at the maximum heat input rate and off.
    1.23 ``Stack'' means the portion of the exhaust system downstream of 
the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator.
    1.24 ``Stack damper'' means a device installed downstream of the 
integral draft diverter, draft hood, or barometric draft regulator, 
designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation 
and to

[[Page 244]]

close off the venting system when the appliance is in the standby 
condition.
    1.25 ``Stack gases'' means the flue gases combined with dilution air 
that enters at the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric 
draft regulator.
    1.26 ``Steady-state conditions for vented home heating equipment'' 
means equilibrium conditions as indicated by temperature variations of 
not more than 5 [deg]F (2.8C) in the flue gas temperature for units 
equipped with draft hoods, barometric draft regulators or direct vent 
systems, in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart or not more 
than 3 [deg]F (1.7C) in the stack gas temperature for units equipped 
with integral draft diverters in three successive readings taken 15 
minutes apart.
    1.27 ``Step-modulating control'' means a control that either cycles 
off and on at the low input if the heating load is light, or gradually, 
increases the heat input to meet any higher heating load that cannot be 
met with the low firing rate.
    1.28 ``Thermal stack damper'' means a type of stack damper which is 
dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of 
thermal energy of the stack gases into movement of the damper plate.
    1.29 ``Two stage control'' means a control that either cycles a 
burner at the reduced heat input rate and off or cycles a burner at the 
maximum heat input rate and off.
    1.30 ``Vaporizing-type oil burner'' means a device with an oil 
vaporizing bowl or other receptacle designed to operate by vaporizing 
liquid fuel oil by the heat of combustion and mixing the vaporized fuel 
with air.
    1.31 ``Vent/air intake terminal'' means a device which is located on 
the outside of a building and is connected to a vented heater by a 
system of conduits. It is composed of an air intake terminal through 
which the air for combustion is taken from the outside atmosphere and a 
vent terminal from which flue gases are discharged.
    1.32 ``Vent limiter'' means a device which limits the flow of air 
from the atmospheric diaphragm chamber of a gas pressure regulator to 
the atmosphere. A vent limiter may be a limiting orifice or other 
limiting device.
    1.33 ``Vent pipe'' means the passages and conduits in a direct vent 
system through which gases pass from the combustion chamber to the 
outdoor air.

                         2.0 Testing conditions.

    2.1 Installation of test unit.
    2.1.1 Vented wall furnaces (including direct vent systems). Install 
gas fueled vented wall furnaces for test as specified in sections 2.1.3 
and 2.1.4 of ANSI Z21.49-1975. Install gas fueled wall furnaces with 
direct vent systems for test as described in sections 2.1.3 and 2.1.4 of 
ANSI Z21.44-1973. Install oil fueled vented wall furnaces as specified 
in UL-730-1974, section 33. Install oil fueled vented wall furnaces with 
direct vent systems as specified in UL-730-1974, section 34.
    2.1.2 Vented floor furnaces. Install vented floor furnaces for test 
as specified in sections 35.1 through 35.5 of UL-729-1976.
    2.1.3 Vented room heaters. Install in accordance with manufacturer's 
instructions.
    2.2 Flue and stack requirements.
    2.2.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment employing integral 
draft diverters and draft hoods (excluding direct vent systems). Attach 
to, and vertically above the outlet of gas fueled vented home heating 
equipment employing draft diverters or draft hoods with vertically 
discharging outlets, a five (5) foot long test stack having a cross 
sectional area the same size as the draft diverter outlet.
    Attach to the outlet of vented heaters having a horizontally 
discharging draft diverter or draft hood outlet a 90 degree elbow, and a 
five (5) foot long vertical test stack. A horizontal section of pipe may 
be used on the floor furnace between the diverter and the elbow if 
necessary to clear any framing used in the installation. Use the minimum 
length of pipe possible for this section. Use stack, elbow, and 
horizontal section with same cross sectional area as the diverter 
outlet.
    2.2.2 Oil fueled vented home heating equipment (excluding direct 
vent systems). Use flue connections for oil fueled vented floor furnaces 
as specified in section 35 of UL 729-1976, sections 34.10 through 34.18 
of UL 730-1974 for oil fueled vented wall furnaces and sections 36.2 and 
36.3 of UL 896-1973 for oil fueled vented room heaters.
    2.2.3 Direct vent systems. Have the exhaust/air intake system 
supplied by the manufacturer in place during all tests. Test units 
intended for installation with a variety of vent pipe lengths with the 
minimum length recommended by the manufacturer. Do not connect a heater 
employing a direct vent system to a chimney or induced draft source. 
Vent the gas solely on the provision for venting incorporated in the 
heater and the vent/air intake system supplied with it.
    2.3 Fuel supply.
    2.3.1 Natural gas. For a vented heater utilizing natural gas, 
maintain the gas supply to the unit under test at a normal inlet test 
pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7 to 10 inches water 
column. Maintain the regulator outlet pressure at normal test pressure 
approximately at that recommended by the manufacturer. Use natural gas 
having a specific gravity of approximately 0.65 and a higher heating 
value within  5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per 
standard cubic foot. Determine the actual higher heating value in Btu's 
per standard cubic foot for the natural gas to be used in the test with 
an error no greater than one percent.
    2.3.2 Propane gas. For a vented heater utilizing propane gas, 
maintain the gas supply

[[Page 245]]

to the unit under test at a normal inlet pressure of 11 to 13 inches 
water column and a specific gravity of approximately 1.53. Maintain the 
regulator outlet pressure, on units so equipped, approximately at that 
recommended by the manufacturer. Use propane having a specific gravity 
of approximately 1.53 and a higher heating value within  5 percent of 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot. 
Determine the actual higher heating value in Btu's per standard cubic 
foot for the propane to be used in the test with an error no greater 
than one percent.
    2.3.3 Other test gas. Use other test gases with characteristics as 
described in section 2.2, table VII, of ANSI Standard Z21.11.1-1974. Use 
gases with a measured higher heating value within  
5 percent of the values specified in the above ANSI standard. Determine 
the actual higher heating value of the gas used in the test with an 
error no greater than one percent.
    2.3.4 Oil supply. For a vented heater utilizing fuel oil, use No. 1, 
fuel oil (kerosene) for vaporizing-type burners and either No. 1 or No. 
2 fuel oil, as specified by the manufacturer, for mechanical atomizing 
type burners. Use No. 1 fuel oil with a viscosity meeting the 
specifications as specified in UL-730-1974, section 36.9. Use test fuel 
conforming to the specifications given in tables 2 and 3 of ANSI 
Standard Z91.1-1972
for No. 1 and No. 2 fuel oil. Measure the higher heating value of the 
test fuel with an error no greater than one percent.
    2.3.5 Electrical supply. For auxiliary electric components of a 
vented heater, maintain the electrical supply to the test unit within 
one percent of the nameplate voltage for the entire test cycle. If a 
voltage range is used for nameplate voltage, maintain the electrical 
supply within one percent of the mid-point of the nameplate voltage 
range.
    2.4 Burner adjustments.
    2.4.1 Gas burner adjustments. Adjust the burners of gas fueled 
vented heaters to their maximum Btu ratings at the test pressure 
specified in section 2.3 of this appendix. Correct the burner volumetric 
flow rate to 60 [deg]F (15.6C) and 30 inches of mercury barometric 
pressure, set the fuel flow rate to obtain a heat rate of within 2 percent of the hourly Btu rating specified by the 
manufacturer as measured after 15 minutes of operation starting with all 
parts of the vented heater at room temperature. Set the primary air 
shutters in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to give a 
good flame at this adjustment. Do not allow the deposit of carbon during 
any test specified herein.
    If a vent limiting means is provided on a gas pressure regulator, 
have it in place during all tests.
    For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls 
to operate the heater at the maximum fuel input rate. Set the thermostat 
control to the maximum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety 
control valve to the ``on'' position. In order to prevent modulation of 
the burner at maximum input, place the thermostat sensing element in a 
temperature control bath which is held at a temperature below the 
maximum set point temperature of the control.
    For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls 
to operate the heater at the reduced fuel input rate. Set the thermostat 
control to the minimum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety 
control valve to the ``on'' position. If ambient test room temperature 
is above the lowest control set point temperature, initiate burner 
operation by placing the thermostat sensing element in a temperature 
control bath that is held at a temperature below the minimum set point 
temperature of the control.
    2.4.2 Oil burner adjustments. Adjust the burners of oil fueled 
vented heaters to give the CO2 reading recommended by the 
manufacturer and an hourly Btu input, during the steady-state 
performance test described below, which is within 2 percent of the heater manufacturer's specified normal 
hourly Btu input rating. On units employing a power burner do not allow 
smoke in the flue to exceed a No. 1 smoke during the steady-state 
performance test as measured by the procedure in ANSI Standard Z11.182-
1965 (R1971) (ASTM D 2156-65 (1970)). If, on units employing a power 
burner, the smoke in the flue exceeds a No. 1 smoke during the steady-
state test, readjust the burner to give a lower smoke reading, and, if 
necessary a lower CO2 reading, and start all tests over. 
Maintain the average draft over the fire and in the flue during the 
steady-state performance test at that recommended by the manufacturer 
within 0.005 inches of water gauge. Do not make 
additional adjustments to the burner during the required series of 
performance tests. The instruments and measuring apparatus for this test 
are described in section 6.3 of ANSI standard Z91.1-1972.
    2.5 Circulating air adjustments.
    2.5.1 Forced air vented wall furnaces (including direct vent 
systems). During tests maintain the air flow through the heater as 
specified by the manufacturer and operate the vented heater with the 
outlet air temperature betwe